Bvpe10 Pim

Studio/OB/EFP Camera Family
BVP-E10 Series
Product Information Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1-1. Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1-2. Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1-3. Creative Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1-4. Operational Versatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Chapter 2 A Total System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2-1. System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2-2. Camera Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2-3. Viewfinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2-4. Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2-4-1 The CCU-700A/700AP has the following features: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2-4-2 The CCU-550D/550DP has the following features:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2-4-3 The CCU-900/900P has the following features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2-5. Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2-5-1 Master Set-up Unit (MSU-700A and MSU-750) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2-5-2 Camera Command Network Units (CNU-700 and CNU-500) . . . . . . . . . . 23 2-5-3 Video Selector (VCS-700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2-5-4 Remote Control Panels (RCP-700 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2-6. System Setup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2-6-1 Connection Example Using CCU-550D/ 550DP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2-6-2 Connection Example Using CCU-900/ 900P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2-6-3 Connection Example Using CCU-700A/ 700AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2-7. Rack Mounting of System Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing). . . . . . . . . 31 3-1. Full DSP Camera Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3-2. Maximum Dynamic Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3-3. Other ADSP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3-4. Outstanding reliability and easy maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3-5. Low power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Chapter 4 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 4-1. Sony Camera Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4-2. Master Set-up Unit - MSU-700A/750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4-3. Camera Command Network Units - CNU-500/ 700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4-4. Remote Control Panels - RCP-700/ 701/ 750/ 751 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 4-5. Flexible System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 4-6. File Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 4-7. Auto Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 4-8. Control Priority and Parallel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 4-9. S-BUS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Chapter 5 Optical Fibre Transmission System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 5-1. Optical Fibre Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 5-2. Cleaning of the Connector and Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 6-1. Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2 Table of Contents BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 7-1. BVP-E10 Series, Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 7-1-1 Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 7-1-2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 7-2. CA-570/ 570P, Camera Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 7-3. CA-950/ 950P, Camera Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 7-4. CCU-550D/ 550DP, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 7-4-1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 7-4-2 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 7-5. CCU-700A/ 700AP, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 7-5-1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 7-5-2 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 7-6. CCU-900/ 900P, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 7-6-1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 7-6-2 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 7-7. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 7-7-1 Front and Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 7-8. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 7-8-1 Front and Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 7-8-2 Internal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 7-9. VCS-700, Video Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 7-9-1 Front and Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 7-10. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 7-10-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 7-10-2 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7-11. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7-11-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7-12. RCP-700/701, Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7-12-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7-13. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 7-13-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 7-13-2 Iris/master black control block (RCP-750) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7-13-3 Iris/master black control block (RCP-751) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 7-13-4 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 7-14. RM-B150, Hand-held Remote Control Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7-14-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7-14-2 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 7-15. RM-B750, Hand-held Remote Control Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 7-15-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 7-15-2 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 7-16. BVF-77/77CE, Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 7-16-1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 7-16-2 Adjusting the Angle of the Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 7-17. BVF-55/ 55CE, Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 7-17-1 Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 7-18. BVF-20W/20WCE, Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 7-18-1 Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 7-19. CA-905K/F/L, Large Lens Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 7-19-1 Lens Attachment Section (Front) and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 7-19-2 Camera-mounting Section (Inner Base) and the Optional BKP-9057
Table of Contents BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 3
Viewfinder Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 7-19-3 Rear control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Chapter 8 Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 8-1. MSU Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 8-1-1 Specifying the Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 8-1-1-1 To set a new security code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 8-1-1-2 To change the security code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8-1-1-3 To override the security code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8-1-2 Setting the Security Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8-1-3 MSU Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 8-1-3-1 To restore operations of the MSU-700A/750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 8-1-4 Setting the Operating Conditions of the MSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 8-1-4-1 To display the MSU Configuration menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 8-1-4-2 To set the built-in clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 8-1-4-3 To adjust the buzzer sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 8-1-4-4 To turn on/off the buzzers independently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 8-1-4-5 To turn off all the buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 8-1-4-6 To adjust the brightness of the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 8-1-4-7 To adjust the brightness of the EL display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 8-1-4-8 To adjust the brightness of the LED camera number displays (MSU-750 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 8-1-4-9 To set the screen saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 8-2. Stand-alone Viewfinder Menu Tables for the BVP-E10 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 8-2-1 Menu Items - Operation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 8-2-2 Menu Items - Paint Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 8-2-3 Menu Items - Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 8-2-4 Menu Items - File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 8-2-5 Menu Items - Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 9-1. BVP-E10 Series, Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 9-1-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 9-1-1-1 TEST OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 9-1-1-2 VF (20P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 9-1-1-3 ANALOG CA (68P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 9-1-1-4 DIGITAL CA (68P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 9-2. CA-570/ 570P, Camera Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9-2-1 Connector Input/Output Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9-2-1-1 PROMTER *1/GENLOCK *2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9-2-1-2 TRIAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9-2-1-3 TEST OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9-2-1-4 REMOTE (8P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9-2-1-5 RET CONT (6P FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 9-2-1-6 INCOM 1/2 (5P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 9-2-1-7 TRACKER (10P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 9-2-1-8 AUDIO IN 1/2 (3P MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 9-2-1-9 DC IN (4P MALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 9-2-1-10 DC OUT (4P FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 9-2-1-11 VTR (26P MALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 9-2-1-12 CAMERA (68P MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9-3. CA-950/ 950P, Camera Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9-3-1 onnector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9-3-1-1 PROMTER *1/GENLOCK *2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9-3-1-2 TEST OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9-3-1-3 SERIAL IN/SERIAL OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9-3-1-4 REMOTE (8P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9-3-1-5 RET CONT (6P FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9-3-1-6 INCOM 1/2 (5P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 9-3-1-7 AUDIO IN 1/2 (3P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 9-3-1-8 DC IN (4P MALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 9-3-1-9 DC OUT (4P FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 9-3-1-10 CCU (MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 9-3-1-11 TRACKER (FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 9-3-1-12 CAMERA (68P MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 9-3-1-13 CAMERA (68P MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 9-3-2 Wiring Diagrams for Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 9-3-2-1 CCA-5 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 9-3-2-2 REMOTE Cable (supplied with RM-B150). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 9-4. CCU-500D/ 500DP, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 9-4-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 9-4-1-1 MIC OUTPUT CH1/CH2 (XLR 3P, MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 9-4-1-2 WF MODE (4P FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 9-4-1-3 MIC REMOTE (D-Sub 15P, FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 9-4-1-4 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (D-Sub 25P, FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 9-4-1-5 REMOTE (8P, FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 9-4-1-6 INTERCOM (5P, FEMALE) on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 9-5. CCU-700A/ 700AP, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 9-5-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 9-5-1-1 MIC OUTPUT CH1/CH2 (3P, MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 9-5-1-2 RTS IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 9-5-1-3 MIC REMOTE (15P, FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 9-5-1-4 INTERCOM REMOTE (25P, FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 9-5-1-5 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (19P, MALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 9-5-1-6 WF MODE (4P, FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 9-5-1-7 REMOTE (8P, FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 9-5-1-8 INTERCOM (5P, FEMALE) on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 9-5-2 Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 9-6. CCU-900/ 900P, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 9-6-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 9-6-1-1 AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2 (XLR 3-pin, Male) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 9-6-1-2 WF MODE (4-pin Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 9-6-1-3 MIC REMOTE (D-sub 15-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 9-6-1-4 4 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (D-sub 25-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . 152 9-6-1-5 WF MODE (D-sub 15-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9-6-1-6 AUX1 (D-sub 9-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9-6-1-7 AUX2 (D-sub 9-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9-6-1-8 TRUNK LINE1 (D-sub 9-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9-6-1-9 TRUNK LINE2 (D-sub 9-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 9-6-1-10 INCOM REMOTE (D-sub 25-pin, Female). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 9-6-1-11 RCP/CNU (8-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table of Contents BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 5
9-6-1-12 Front panel INTERCOM (5-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 9-6-2 Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-7. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-7-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-7-1-1 BNC connector 75 Ohms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-7-1-2 RS232C-1/2/3 *1 (9P, FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-7-1-3 REMOTE (8P, FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-7-2 Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-7-3 Connection Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9-8. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-8-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-8-1-1 BNC connector 75 Ohms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-8-1-2 RS232C (9P, FEMALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-8-1-3 REMOTE (8P, FEMALE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-8-2 Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-8-3 Connection Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-9. VCS-700, Video Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-9-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9-9-1-1 WF Mode (4P, female). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 9-9-1-2 Remote (8P, female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 9-9-1-3 I/O Port (D-SUB 37P, female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 9-10. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 9-10-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 9-10-1-1 REMOTE (8-pin, Female). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 9-10-1-2 I/O PORT (50-pin, Female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 9-10-2 Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 9-10-3 Connection Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 9-11. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 9-11-1 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 9-12. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 9-12-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 9-12-1-1 AUX REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 9-12-1-2 EXT I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9-12-2 Connection Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9-13. CA-905K/F/L, Large Lens Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9-13-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9-13-1-1 REMOTE (8P, male) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9-13-1-2 LENS (12P, male) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9-13-1-3 LENS (36P, female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 9-13-1-4 VF (20P, male) (BKP-9057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 9-13-1-5 VF (25P, female) (BKP-9057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Chapter 10 Glossary - Terms and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 10-1. Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 10-2. Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 10-3. Camera characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Chapter 11 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 11-1. BVP-E10, Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 11-2. CA-570/ 570P, Camera Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 11-3. CA-950/ 950P, Camera Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
11-4. CCU-550D/ 550DP, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5. CCU-700A/ 700AP, Camera Control Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6. CCU-900/ 900P, Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9. VCS-700, Video selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12. RCP-700/701, Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14. RM-B150 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15. RM-B750 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16. BVF-10/10CE/20W/20WCE Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17. BVF-55/ 55CE, 5-inch B/W Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18. BVF-77/ 77CE, 7-inch B/W Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19. CA-905F/905K, Large Lens Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174 177 179 180 181 181 182 183 184 185 186 186 187 187 188 189
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Table of Contents BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings
BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Introduction
1-1. Overview
The Sony BVP-900/950 camera family has gained a worldwide reputation as the flagship system for highend Standard DefinitionTV (SDTV) programme origination in the studio and for outside broadcasts. As digital television agendas expand globally, Sony is responding to the increasingly diverse needs in programme creation. The new BVP-E10 Series*1 of digital portable cameras is specifically intended to broaden its studio/ OB system portfolio to meet those needs. New advances in CCD imager and DSP technologies have facilitated the development of a highly cost-effective and high-performance portable system that addresses the creative aspirations of the digital era. At the heart of the outstanding picture performance delivered by the BVP-E10 Series is the newly developed Sony Power HADTM EX CCD sensor, specifically designed to support switchable progressive*2 and interlace scanning modes while also ensuring excellent sensitivity, noise and smear performance. The use of new digital techniques has reduced the power consumption thus lowering the camera's internal operating temperature while increasing the stability of the signal processing circuitry, and improving operator comfort when the camera is shoulder mounted. The BVP-E10*3 has been designed for 4:3 aspect ratio while the BVP-E10WS*3 is switchable between 4:3 and 16:9/ When combined with the Sony CA-570 Camera Adaptor and CCU-550A/700A Camera Control Unit, both models seamless integrate into current Sony camera systems from the very basic to the largest scale. These models can also be used with the Sony CA-950/950P Camera Adaptor and CCU900/900P Camera Control Unit for fibre optic operations. The BVP-E10 Series cameras are a highly sophisticated, yet cost effective solution for all acquisition requirements, and offer a wide choice of peripherals and accessories for operational flexibility
*1: Note: throughout this document,: "BVP-E10 Series" refers to the BVP-E10, BVP-E10WS, BVP-E10P, and BVPE10WSP cameras: "BVP-E10" refers to both the BVP-E10 (NTSC model) and BVPE10P (PAL model) while BVP-E10WS refers to the BVPE10WS (NTSC model) and BVP-E10WSP (PAL model) *2: 25 PsF for E10P/E10WSP and 29.97 PsF for E10/E10WS *3: BVP-E10 refers to the both the BVP-E10 (NTSC model) and the BVP-E10P (PAL model); BVP-E10WS refers to both the BVP-E10WS (NTSC model) and the BVP-E10WSP (PAL model)
10
Chapter 1 Introduction BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
1-2. Features and Benefits

Two Versions - the BVP-E10 and BVP-E10WS The BVP-E10 Series consists of two versions - the BVPE10 and BVP-E10WS. The BVP-E10 is designed for high quality 4:3 acquisition, while the BVP-E10WS has the added capability of 16:9 and 4:3 switchable operations. Both cameras are engineered around the same core technology, which results in the high picture performance and sophisticated features that only the BVP-E10 Series can provide. New Power HAD EX CCD The newly developed Sony Power HAD EX CCD provides FIT standards of performance at the price level of IT cameras, with a remarkably low smear level of -140 dB (typical). an incredible pixel count of one million picture elements for NTSC and 1.2 million for PAL. At the same time, this CCD imager achieves a high sensitivity of f11, and an excellent S/N ratio of 65 dB (NTSC)/63 dB (PAL). These factors allow the BVPE10 Series to make spectacular pictures even in the most difficult of shooting environments. On Photo 1-2-1: Newly Developed CCD and an Innovative LSI seen on a picture monitor fed from a composite video signal.
* three line for PAL in PsF mode
Photo 1-2-2: Cross Colour Suppression On
Off
12-bit A/D and Advanced Digital Signal Processing 12-bit A/D resolution ensures that images created by the new Power HAD EX CCD are processed with great precision. This, in combination with the use of Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) and allnew LSI technology, provides comprehensive and precise control to make superb SDTV images. 3-D White Shading The BVP-E10 Series system replaces the traditional use of vertical and horizontal sawtooth and parabola waveforms for White Shading Correction. A digital 3-D multi-zone system, using numerous data points over the raster, creates a smooth correction topography that can far better handle the variations over many lens types and lens zooming ranges. Cross Colour Suppression function Separating the luminance and chrominance components of a composite signal can be a difficult task, even with the most advanced comb filtering techniques. In order to keep cross colour and cross luminance to a minimum, the BVP-E10 Series virtually eliminates frequency components that may result in such artifacts being generated prior to the signal output. These frequency components are eliminated from the Y/R-Y/B-Y signals within the camera head by using sophisticated digital three line (NTSC)/five line (PAL)* comb filtering. This results in more greatly reduced cross colour and dot crawl than normally Chapter 1 Introduction BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 11
1-3. Creative Control

Low Key Saturation With conventional cameras, low light areas can be subject to a reduction in saturation. This can result in colour in these areas being "washed out". The Low Key Saturation function on the BVP-E10 Series eliminates this problem by optimizing the amplification of colour saturation at low light levels, providing more natural colour reproduction. Photo 1-3-1: Low Key Saturation On Knee Saturation Control Traditionally, shooting very bright portions of an object (such as key light reflections off a forehead) can reduce colour saturation and change hue in highlight areas. The BVP-E10 Series adopts a new generation of the proven Knee Saturation Control function in which this 'wash out' effect on saturation and hue change is reduced to a minimum and far more natural colour reproduction in highlight areas is provided. Photo 1-3-2: Knee Saturation On Figure 1-3-1: Knee Curve Image
White clip Input signal level
Auto slope Knee point n Knee point 3 Knee point 2 Knee point 1 Knee point 0
Output signal level
On
On
Off Adaptive Highlight Control (Auto Knee Mode) In traditional cameras, only a single knee-point/slope is available for control over highlights. In the BVP-E10 Series cameras, multiple knee-points/slopes are provided for superior overexposure control. These cameras monitor the highlight areas of a scene and automatically set and optimize multiple knee points/ slopes accordingly. This allows the reproduction of extremely difficult images (such as an interior scene which includes a brightly sunlit window) with much more overexposure latitude. This function applies only to input video levels in excess of the knee point, the middle and low luminance parts of the video signal are unaffected by this control. 12 Chapter 1 Introduction BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Off
Multi-matrix Function Unlike conventional colour correction or matrix control, the Multi-matrix function allows colour adjustments to be applied over a colour range specified by the operator. The colour spectrum is divided into 16 areas
of adjustment, where the hue and/or saturation of each area can be modified. This function is especially useful when only the hue of certain colours needs to be adjusted for special effects work. Photo 1-3-3: Multi-matrix On
Photo 1-3-4: Enhanced Vertical Detail (Non-Additive Mix) On
On
On
Off Electronic Soft Focus The Electronic Soft Focus included in these cameras applies an effect similar to using an optical soft-focus filter - but in a much more convenient way. Electronic Soft Focus uses the detail signal to reduce, rather than increase, the sharpness of the picture. By subtracting the detail signal from the original signal (as opposed to adding it as in conventional image enhancement), Electronic Soft Focus is able to provide a picture that is "softer" than that achieved when detail is switched off completely. Electronic Soft Focus is very effective when used in conjunction with Skin Tone Detail to only change the sharpness within a specific colour or hue range. Adaptive Detail Control The Adaptive Detail Control automatically optimizes the amplitude of the detail signal for high-contrast picture edges and eliminating digital aliasing effects. The Adaptive Detail Control is able to achieve a very "natural" image enhancement during severe changes in contrast in a scene.
Off Enhanced Vertical Detail (Non-Additive Mix) In conventional cameras, vertical detail signals are created using the Y-channel, G-channel or, more commonly, the R/G channels combined. Each method has its limitations, such as when the colour channel selected to create the detail signal is at a low level. The BVP-E10 Series uses an adaptive image enhancement method. This creates detail signals from each of the R/G/B components of the video signal, compares them and then automatically selects the channel with the highest contrast level for use as the detail signal (Non-Additive Mix). This avoids the conventional restrictions of image enhancement observed above. Enhanced Vertical Detail is a process that automatically takes place within a BVP-E10 Series camera but, if required, operators may manually select from the Y, G, or R/G image enhancement modes.
13
Photo 1-3-5: Adaptive Detail Control On
On
Off Triple Skin Tone Detail Control Skin Tone Detail allows control of image enhancement within user-specified colour tones. The BVP-E10 Series allows enhancement to be set independently for up to three distinct colour and/or hue ranges. The conventional use of Skin Tone Detail correction is to reduce the amount of detail control in areas of skin tone. With the BVP-E10 Series, correction is not restricted to areas of skin tones and can be set to apply to any colour areas. Image enhancement within the three areas can be increased or decreased relative to the overall image enhancement of a given scene.
14
1-4. Operational Versatility

System Compatibility The BVP-E10 Series is fully compatible with current Sony Camera Control Units. It seamlessly integrates with the Sony BVP-900 Series, BVP-700 Series and BVP-500 Series of camera systems and can be controlled using existing Sony MSUs, CNUs and RCPs. This allows systems from the very simplest to the most complex to be built around BVP-E10 Series cameras. Photo 1-4-1: MSU-700A Photo 1-4-3: Triax system
Photo 1-4-2: CCU-550A with BKP-5973
Wide Band Triax Transmission System The BVP-E10 Series is intended for optimal picture performance in outside broadcast applications as well as in the production studio. Major sporting and entertainment events regularly call for extended runs of the triax cable connecting the camera head unit to the remote CCU. In order to maintain the high picture performance of the BVP-E10 Series, the Sony wideband triax system has been incorporated. This triax system offers cable runs of up to 2,000 m (with return video and remote power) depending on the CCU and triax cable type.
Fibre Optic Transmission System In the event that even longer cable runs are required, the BVP-E10 Series is capable of fully digital transmission when used with a Sony CA-950 Fibre Optic Camera Adaptor and a CCU-900 Fibre Optic Camera Control Unit. The optical cables transmit the video signal in the digital domain, while extending the transmission distance up to 3,000 m* with power and return V/F, and up to 10,000 m* when utilizing local power. Adaptors are also available to provide interface between this system an standard telecoms fibre cables.
* The transmission distance may vary depending on the cable characteristics and number of connections made in the entire cable run
15
1 2
A Total System
2-1. System Configuration

The Sony BVP-E10 Series is particularly designed to expand its studio and outside broadcast applications to meet the ongoing global demand for high costperformance digital television acquisition with highpicture quality and operational flexibility. The following Figure 2-1-1 is a connection example for the applications in studio/OB van systems. As you can see in addition to the newly developed RCP-750/ 751Remote Control Panels, a variety of field-proven system components like the CNU-700/ 500 Camera Command Network Units, the MSU-700A / 750 Master Setup Units, CCU-900/ 900P / 700A/ 700AP/ 550D/ 550DP Camera Control Units, and the VCS-700 Video Selector help users to easily expand/upgrade their Figure 2-1-1: Studio/OB van system
BVF-55/55CE
systems. Both the wideband triax transmission system and fibre-optic transmission system are applicable in combination use with proper system component. On the lower left side of the figure, there is the CA-905, Large Lens Adaptor and 7-inch type viewfinder saddle, dedicated for the area where a larger studio or outside broadcast lens is needed. The Figure 2-1-2 shows its interface flexibility with various devices in a stand-alone system, where remote control can be provided by a standard RCP-700 series remote control panel, or the RM-B150 or RM-B750 hand held controllers. Figure 2-1-3 helps you understand all the optional accessories for the BVP-E10 Series.
BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP +CA-950/950P
CCU-900/900P
MSU-700A/750 VCS-700
BVF-55/55CE
BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP +CA-570/570P
CCU-700A/700AP CNU-700/500
BVF-10/10CE BVF-20W/20WCE
CCU-550D/550DP BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP +CA-570/570P with BKP-5973
RCP-750/751
BVP-E10 Series Configured with Studio Lens
Studio Lens
BVP-E10/E10P+CA*+CA-905**
BVF-55 or BVF-77 with BKP-9057
Fibre Optic Cable Triax Cable Command Coaxial Cable
* Ether the CA-570 or CA-950 cam be used in this configuration
** CA-905L - Fibre CA-905K/F - Triax
* Minor modification of camera head is required in combination use with the CA-553.
Figure 2-1-2: Stand-alone system

BVF-10/10CE BVF-20W/20WCE
DVW-250/250P BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP CA-553* BVV-5/5P CA-570/570P
BVW-50/50P RM-B150/750 RCP-700/701/750/751
SDI CCZ AC-550/550CE DNV-5 Command
18
Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Figure 2-1-3: Optional accessories for BVP-E10

Microphone
CAC-12 Microphone Holder
Water-proof case
Carryng case
2-inch VF(BVF-20W/20WCE) 1.5-inch VF(BVF-10/10CE)
ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER BVF-55/55CE DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER DVW-250/250P
CAMERA ADAPTOR CA-570/570P CA-950/950P CA-530 ZOOM LENS COLOR VIDEO CAMERA BVP-E10 Series CCZ CABLE
Memory Stick
REMOTE CABLE (max. 100 m)
AC ADAPTOR AC-550/550CE
REMOTE MASTER CONTROL SETUP PANEL UNIT RCP-700 RCP-701 RCP-720 RCP-721 RCP-750 RCP-751 MSU-700A MSU-750
PANEL STANDARD ACTIVE MEMORY STICK
TEST
BARS
CLOSE
VTR START/STOP
AWB
ABB
WHITE
MONITOR
FUNCTION VF DISP MAINTENANCE VF MENU SCENE CANCEL PAINT ENTER
BLACK
CCA-5 CABLE (max. 50m)
AUTO IRIS/MB IRIS ACTIVE MASTER BLACK EXT
ALARM MENU SELECT
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-B750
RM-B750 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT( ) RM-B150
VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor
RETURN VIDEO SELECTOR CAC-6
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BVV-5/5PS Tripod BETACAM ADAPTOR CA-553
CCZ CABLE
CAMERA ADAPTOR CA-3A
VTR
RECORDER UNIT DNV-5
19
2-2. Camera Head

The BVP-E10 is an outstanding colour video camera that incorporates Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) and 12-bit A/D conversion. Using the new Power HAD EX CCD with its excellent highlight handling, the BVP-E10 provides a 900 TV line resolution (4:3), or 700TVL (16:9) and achieves the remarkably low smear level of 140dB. Just some of the state-of-the-art features are: Triple skin tone detail Adaptive detail control Fine detail Electronic soft focus Adaptive highlight control Knee saturation Low key saturation control 3-D white shading Multi matrix control Skin tone auto iris These improvements contribute to an unsurpassed image quality, making the BVP-E10 ideal for a wide range of applications from field acquisition to studio/ OB camera system. The BVP-E10 can be controlled either at the camera head or by remote control through studio system peripherals such as the CCU-900/ 900P/ 700A/ 700AP/ 550A/ 550AP Camera Control Unit, MSU-700A/ 750 Master Set-up Unit and CNU-700/ CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units. The flexible interfacing of the BVP-E10 means that it is not only a high-end broadcasting camera with the latest technology, but it can also be easily integrated into the familiar studio/ OB vehicle systems that use earlier models of Sony cameras. Advanced intercom system Individual ENG/PROD lines (except with CCU-550D/ DP) Dual Programme Microphone system Proagramme audio system Compact size and easy maintenance Highly sophisticated mechanical design Approx. 2.5 kg (5 lb 8 oz) (not including viewfinder) All boards plug-in for easy maintenance Convenient return video select Up to four return video signals can be selected for operational convenience. Return video switches and intercom switch are fitted on the carrying handle of the BVP-E10 to suit various shooting styles. Comfortable operation The shoulder pad of the BVP-E10 with a new soft material comfortably molds to the operator's shoulder. It also incorporates a pivoting chest pad and does not require forward/ backward adjustment.
Main Features of Camera Heads

Excellent Picture Quality - Sensitivity: - S/N (Typical): - Smear level: F11 at 2000 lx 65 dB (NTSC), 63 dB (PAL) -140 dB
BVP-E10 Resolution 900 TVL, Modulation depth 80% at 5 MHz BVP-E10WS Resolution 700 TVL , (16:9 and 4:3 modes) Modulation depth 80% (16:9 mode), 60% (4:3 mode) Total absence of lag and highlight artifacts Wide band triax transmission 10 MHz for luminance channel 6MHz chrominance channel Up to 2,000 m cable length with return video and remote power (when using o14.5 mm cable and CCU-700A/700AP) Up to 1,000 m cable length with return video and remote power (when using o8.5 mm cable andCCU700A/700AP) please add 11 mm triax specification, since this is the most common Fibre optic transmission Up to 3,000 m cable length with return video and remote power (when used with CA-950 Fibre Optic Camera Adaptor and CCU-900 Fibre Optic Camera Control Unit) Enhanced Camera Operator functions Up to four (with CA-570/570P) selectable return video feeds 20 Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
2-3. Viewfinders
For hand held or on-the-shoulder applications, there are two types of monocular black and white CRT viewfinders. The BVF-20W (NTSC)/ 20WCE (PAL) is a true wide screen 2-inch (16:9 aspect ratio) viewfinder, while the BVF-10 (NTSC)/ 10CE (PAL) is a 1.5-inch 4:3 standard viewfinder. Both provide high resolution of 600 TV lines at centre. For studio and OB applications, the BVF-55/ 55CE, a 5-inch monochrome viewfinder, is available. If the camera is used with the CA-905K/F/L large lens adaptor and BKP-5097 viewfinder cradle, a larger 7" viewfinder can be used. The BVF-77/77CE is a high performance 7-inch monochrome viewfinder with extremely high horizontal resolution. All of these models are very compact in size, light in weight and economical in power consumption.
2-4. Camera Control Unit

The CCU-700A/700AP is a camera control unit for use with BVP-E10 Series cameras. By incorporating wideband Triax transmission , three optional SDI outputs, and a digital control system, as well as, the CCU-700A/700AP offers maximum camera performance combined with flexible operation. It has been designed to achieve the highest reliability, afford easy maintenance and allow flexible system configuration. The compact Camera Control Unit, CCU-550D/ 550DP, is also available for use with BVP-E10 Series. A compact body, two SDI outputs and optional 12 V DC operation (BKP-5974) make this unit ideal for field use. The CCU-900/900P Fibre Optic Camera Control Unit is for applications where even longer cable runs are required. Used together with the CA-950/950P fibre adaptor, the CCU-900/900P provides full digital transmission using hybrid copper/fibre cables. Transmission distances of up to 3,000 metres are possible without degradation, including camera power and return viewfinder signals. Even longer distance transmission up to 10,000 metres is possible if power is supplied locally to the camera. Character display Self diagnostics and other information may be displayed on a monitor or superimposed on the picture monitoring output Characters, such as the camera number, can be superimposed on the internal colour bar signal Component SDI output (option) Three component SDI outputs are optionally available for interfacing to the ever increasing range of component digital equipment and facilities Built-in contrast and saturation functions Contrast, saturation and chroma on/off controls provided Flexible intercom system Individual channels for production and engineering talkback 4W, 2W or RTS selectable by internal switch Remotely controllable MIC input gain (camera head) The gain of the two camera head programme microphone inputs is remotely controllable from the CCU in 10 dB steps (-60 dB ~ -20 dB). Control is also available via a connector on the rear of the CCU Flicker-less sequential mode (RGB) standard for WFM output RGB sequential monitoring without flicker Compact size and easy maintenance 19-inch wide and 3U high, including camera power supply unit Plug-in boards and plug-in power supply unit for easy maintenance
2-4-1 The CCU-700A/700AP has the following features:

Wideband triax transmission 10 MHz luminance channel for high performance transmission; 6 MHz for each colour difference signals Up to 2000 m cable length (with 14.5 mm cable) Up to 1200 m cable length (with 11.0 mm cable) Up to 1,000 m cable length (with 8.5 mm cable) Return video (up to 2000 m with 14.5 mm cable, 1200 m with 11.0 mm cable, and 1,000 m with 8.5 mm cable) Prompter video (up to 1000 m with 14.5 mm cable, 625 m with 11.0 mm cable, and 500 m with 8.5 mm cable) Easy-to-operate command system Immediate response Wide range of remote controls Mono colour function Mono colour video is available to VBS and Y, R-Y and B-Y outputs All colour information in the picture is replaced by a single colour, for which the hue (360 degrees) and saturation can be controllable from an MSU-700A/ 750A/750 Master Set-up Unit
2-4-2 The CCU-550D/550DP has the following features:

Wide variety of system configurations Two SDI signal outputs (digital component video each with two channels of embedded audio) may be used. When equipped with the optional BKP-5973 CCU Control Panel, the BKP-5973 can be used to control the video camera directly, without the use of a RCP700 Series Remote Control Panel or the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit. Note: The BKP-5973 does not work when the CCU-550D/ 550DP is connected to the CNU-700/500 Camera Network Unit. When the optional BKP-5974 DC Power Unit is attached, a DC power source may be used. The CCU-550D/550DP supports communications between the video camera and the CCU-550D/550DP over Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 21
either a triax cable or coaxial cable. (Power, however, is not supplied to the video camera in the case of coaxial cable.) 10-MHz, wideband triax transmission Prompter signal transmission. Wideband triax transmission with Y signal at 10 MHz, R-Y and B-Y signals at 6 MHz is used for inputting video signals from the video camera. Maximum length of triax cable is 700 meters (with diameter of 8.5 mm), 875 meters (with diameter of 11.0 mm), 1,050 meters (BELDEN 9232 with diameter of 13.2 mm), or 1,400 meters (with diameter of 14.5 mm). Rack mountable Two CCU-550D/550DPs can be mounted side by side in a standard 19- inch EIA rack when using an optional RMM-301 Rack Mount Adaptor.
Remote control The levels and phases of CCU-900/900P output signals can be controlled remotely using an MSU700A/750 Master Setup Unit. Microphone volume control The camera's microphone volume can be controlled via the MIC REMOTE or INCOM REMOTE connector. Red and green tally output Red tally and green tally signals can be output from the MIC REMOTE connector. Character signal output The results of the CCU-900/900P self-diagnosis can be output as text display. Rack mountable The CCU-900/900P can be installed in a standard EIA 19-inch rack (3U rack height) Plug-in unit configuration Internal printed circuit boards are designed for easy plug-in and removal. The power supply is also a plugin type unit, for easy inspection and maintenance. Dual camera system configurable Mutually connecting SDI AUX inputs and outputs of two cameras enables establishing a dual camera system with an optical-fibre cable.
2-4-3 The CCU-900/900P has the following features.

Multiple video inputs and outputs The CCU-900/900P has three SDI (Serial Digital Interface) signal outputs, an SDI picture monitor output, and four component SDI signal inputs. The CCU-900/900P also has two analogue waveform monitor outputs, two picture monitor outputs, and four return video inputs. It also has SDI AUX signal input and output, and analogue video input and output for teleprompter. The input signal must be synchronous with the CCU-900/ 900P. Adding a BKP-9330 board (optional) enables SDI super slow output when used with the BVP-9500WS/WSP Super Motion camera. External reference signals The CCU-900/900P can be locked with an external reference signal. Either a analogueue sync signal or an SDI signal input to the SERIAL RET INPUT 1 connector may be used as the reference signal. Optical digital transmission The CCU-900/900P can be connected to a camera using an optical-fibre cable (two single-mode opticalfibre lines, two power lines, and two control lines) for transmission of digitized video, audio, and control signals. Signals may be transmitted up to 3,000 meters (1.86 miles). The maximum cable length for supplying power to the camera varies with the camera system configuration and with the type of optical-fibre cable. Safety-oriented power supply The CCU-900/900P is designed for safety. When the power is turned on, a low voltage is supplied at first. Only after it has been verified that an appropriated camera is attached, the normal 240 V power supply is activated. The power is not supplied unless a camera is connected via an optoelectric cable. Also, the CCU900/900P is equipped with an alarm indicator to warn of open or short circuits in the cable. Wide range of audio functions The CCU-900/900P has connectors for two-channel microphone output, a digital audio output, and a programme audio input. Further, the CCU-900/900P can use an intercom system with two independent channels. An SDI embedded audio signal can be used for the microphone output connectors, and for the programme audio input connector. For information on support for RTS and CLEARCOM systems, contact a Sony service representative. 22 Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
2-5. Control System

A A wide choice of control panels are available, including MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Units, RCP700 series remote control panels, and CNU-700/500 Command Network Units. These allow each user to configure the most suitable system to meet a specific operational need. The following are the key peripherals. (For detailed information, please refer to chapter 4) 700/701 features the basic control items required for daily operation of acquisition camera systems, and is very compact, permitting a large number of cameras to be controlled in a limited space. The RCP-700/701 can also be used as a sub-control panel to support an MSU-700A or RCP-750/751. The panel is connected to the CCU-Series Camera Control Unit (or the CNU-Series Camera Command Network Unit, which is connected to the CCU-Series) by a cable of up to 200 m (656 feet) in length.
2-5-1 Master Set-up Unit (MSU-700A and MSU-750)

The MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit can be used for remote control of the BVP-E10 Series Color Video Camera via the respective Camera Control Unit (CCU). Up to 6 cameras can be controlled in combination with the CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit (up to 12 cameras by using an expansion board). The master setup unit is connected to CCU via a Camera Command Network Unit (CNU) using a dedicated cable of up to 200 m (656 feet) in length. The adoption of an Electro Luminescent (EL) Touch Panel in the MSU-700A/750 helps to simplify the operation of its sophisticated control system. In addition data such as scene files can be stored in a Memory Stick (PC card).
2-5-2 Camera Command Network Units (CNU-700 and CNU-500)

The Camera Command Network Units are designed to be the nerve centre of the Sony camera control system for the HDC and BVP Series of cameras including the BVP-E10 Series. They work as 'Command Selector', 'Command Distributor' and 'Command Arbitrator'. These two types of camera command network units give a cost/performance choice. The CNU-500 is suitable for applications with up to six cameras, while the standard six cameras capability of the CNU-700 can be expanded to 12 cameras with use of the BKP7930 optional expansion board. The carefully designed software and the high-speed CPU of both the CNU-700 and CNU-500 give them a fast response time whatever the system configuration.
2-5-3 Video Selector (VCS-700)

The VCS-700 Video Selector is used to switch composite video monitoring signals from a BVP-E10 Series multi-camera system to a picture monitor and waveform monitor. The VCS-700 accepts the video monitoring signal from up to six CCU-700A/ 700AP/ 550A/ 500AP/ 900/ 900P Camera Control Units and switches these signals to two picture monitor outputs and two waveform monitor outputs. The selection of monitoring signals can be controlled by the camera selection buttons on the MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit, or by external control equipment through the Dsub 37-pin I/O port on the VCS-700. For SDI monitoring, the optional BKP-7933 S-Bus Interface Board provides connection to a Sony digital routing system.
2-5-4 Remote Control Panels (RCP-700 Series)

There are two types of Remote Control Panel for the BVP-E10 Series. Each type has a choice of two models offering eitherjoystick control or dial control of the iris and master black adjustments. The RCP-750/751 is the top of the range for sophisticated operational use, and can be used as an alternative to the MSU-700A/ 750 Master Set-up Unit in some applications. The RCPChapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 23
2-6. System Setup Examples

2-6-1 Connection Example Using CCU550D/ 550DP
Figure 2-6-1-1: Video-signal connections with CCU-550D/ 550DP
CA-570/570P
Triax cable
BVP-E10/E10P/E 10WS/E 10WSP
When a large lens is used

BVF-77/77CE CA-570/570P BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/ E10WSP
CCU-500D/500DP
BKP-9057
CA-905K/F
To an AC power source
Notes The maximum power output from the CAMERA connector of the CCU-550D/ 550DP is 110 watts (including a maximum cable loss of 10 watts). Do not connect any equipment, which consumes more than 110 watts of power. The BVF-7700/7700P Color Viewfinder cannot be used because of the power output rating mentioned above. When the BKP-5974 DC Power Unit is connected to the CCU- 550A/ 550AP, the CA-905K/F large-lens adaptor cannot be used.
Notes on connections Triax cable The triax cable should never be connected to or disconnected from the CCU-550D/ 550DP when the power is turned on. Always turn the unit off first. Video camera Some switches or controls on the video camera may not work when the camera is connected to the CCU550D/550DP.
24
2-6-2 Connection Example Using CCU900/ 900P

Figure 2-6-2-1: Digital Video Signal connections with CCU-900/ 900P
BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/E 10WSP +CA-950/950P+CA-905L [1] SERIAL RET INPUT 1~4 PROMPTER IN REFERENCE IN 75-ohm termination SERIAL OUTPUT 1~3 SERIAL OUTPUT MONI SYNC OUT Return video signals Reference signal Prompter signal Component SDI signals Reference signal CCU-900/900P 1
CCU Optical-fibre cable CAMERA
-AC IN AC power cord (supplied) PROMPTER IN CHARACTER OUTPUT

BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/E10WSP +CA-950/950P+CA-905L [2]
AC power supply
Analog video signal
SERIAL RET INPUT 1~4

REFERENCE IN
Return video signals Reference signal
75-ohm termination 75-ohm termination CCU Optical-fibre cable

CAMERA
SERIAL OUTPUT 1~3 SERIAL OUTPUT MONI
Component SDI signals Reference signal CCU-900/900P 2
PROMPTER IN
SYNC OUT
-AC IN AC power cord (supplied) RCP/CNU Component SDI signals

75-ohm termination
AC power supply
CHARACTER OUTPUT
Analog video signal Analog video Camera Command Network signal CHARACTER 2 CCU Unit CNU-700
INPUT
Digital video Routing Switcher DVS-V1201
OUTPUT REF IN
Component SDI signals Reference signal REFERENCE 75-ohm termination SD reference signal
Note Other than the optical-fibre cables and AC power cords, all cables are 75-ohm coaxial cables with BNC connectors.
25
Figure 2-6-2-2: Video Signal Connections with CCU-900/900P

BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/E10WSP +CA-950/950P+CA-905L SERIAL RET INPUT 1~4 Component/compo SDI-RET signals Reference signal
REFERENCE IN CCU Optical-fibre cable

SYNC OUT
75-ohms termination SERIAL OUTPUT
Component/compo SDI signals Reference signal CCU-900/900P
CAMERA
RET INPUT 1~4
MONITOR OUT PIX 1/PIX 2 MONITOR OUT WF 1/WF 2
Picture monitor out
Waveform monitor
Analog return video
Notes Other than the optical-fibre cables and AC power cords, all cables are 75-ohm coaxial cables with BNC connectors. The input signal must be synchronized with the clock of the CCU-900/ 900P.
Figure 2-6-2-3: Connections for the Dual Camera with CCU-900/ 900P
Primary camera BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/E10WSP or BVP-9500WS/9500WSP [1]
CCA-950/950P
Secondary CCU CCU-900/900P 2
Optical-fibre cable Serial OUT Serial IN Return video signal (Coaxial cable with BNC connector) Serial OUT
CCA-950/950P
SDI AUX OUT
SDI AUX IN
REFERENCE IN
Video signal Serial IN
Video signal
Return video signal (Coaxial cable with BNC connector)
RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel
SDI AUX IN
SDI AUX OUT
Secondary camera BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/ E10WSP or BVP-9500WS/ 9500WSP [2] External power supply
Secondary CCU CCU-900/900P 2
REFERENCE IN
Reference signal RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel
Notes Other than the optical-fibre cables, all cables are 75ohm coaxial cables with BNC connectors. The primary system and the secondary system must be gen-locked. 26 Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
If the BVP-9500WS/9500WSP is operated at triple speed, dual camera operation is released, and the secondary system cannot be used.
2-6-3 Connection Example Using CCU700A/ 700AP

Figure 2-6-3-1: Video-signal connections with CCU-700A/ 700AP
BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/E10WSP+ CA-570/570P+CA905K/F+ BVF-77/77CE [1]
RET1/RET2/RET3/RET4
Return video signal

REFERENCE
Reference signal (BB)

PROMPTER REFERENCE
OUTPUT
R Y WF1 VBS1 WF MODE
CAMERA
Prompter signal 75-ohm terminator
CCU-700A/700AP
CAMERA
CH-1
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1
INPUT
REFERENCE
RET2
R-Y
PIX1
VBS2
REMOTE RTS
RET3 B B-Y WF2 VBS3 RCP/CNU
RET4
CHARACTER PIX2
SYNC
AUX ~ AC IN
REMOTE
MIX
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
COAX
INTERCOM
RET1/RET2/ RET3/RET4 RET1/RET2/RET3/RET4
PROMPTER
R/G/B Y/R-Y/B-Y WF2/PIX2
BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/E10WSP+ CA-570/570P+CA905K/F+ BVF-77/77CE [2]
VBS1/VBS2/VBS3
Switcher, monitor VTR
REFERENCE
Chroma keyer Reference signal (BB)

PROMPTER
OUTPUT
R Y WF1 VBS1 WF MODE REFERENCE
CAMERA
CCU-700A/700AP
CAMERA
CH-1
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1
INPUT
RET2
R-Y
PIX1
VBS2
REMOTE RTS
RET4
CHARACTER PIX2
SYNC
AUX ~ AC IN
REMOTE
MIX
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
COAX
INTERCOM
REFERENCE/ PROMPTER
R/G/B Y/R-Y/B-Y WF2/PIX2
RET1/RET2/RET3/RET4
VBS1/VBS2/VBS3
Switcher, monitor VTR Chroma keyer
75-ohm terminators
WF1/PIX1 WF2/PIX2 CHARACTER
75-ohm terminator
VCS-700
CHARACTER PIX A/SYNC WF A/WF MODE
Picture monitor Waveform monito Character monitor
CHARACTER
CHARACTER
3 RCP 4 5 6 MSU VCS AUX1 AUX2
CNU-700
CCU
CCU
10
11
12
10
11
12
MSC
VCS
AUX3
AUX4 ~AC IN
REFERENCE
75-ohm terminator Reference signal (BB or BS)
Note When mixing the character signal with the output signal of the VCS-700, set the SYNC ON/OFF switch (S7) on the internal board of the CNU-700 to OFF
27
Figure 2-6-3-2: Connection of control, intercom, tally and audio signals with CCU-700A/ 700AP
Microphone signal output
MIC OUTPUT
CAMERA
CH-1
CCU-700A/700AP 1
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1
INPUT
REFERENCE R Y WF1
OUTPUT
VBS1 WF MODE
RET2
R-Y
PIX1
VBS2
REMOTE RTS
RET4
CHARACTER PIX2
SYNC
AUX ~ AC IN
REMOTE
MIX
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
COAX
INTERCOM
Microphone control and tally Intercom control and tally Intercom and tally Microphone signal output
MIC REMOTE INTERCOM REMOTE INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
RTS
RCP/CNU
MIC OUTPUT
CAMERA
CH-1
RTS
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1
CCU-700A/700AP 2
OUTPUT
R Y WF1 VBS1 WF MODE REFERENCE
INPUT
RET2
R-Y
PIX1
VBS2
REMOTE RTS
RET4
CHARACTER PIX2
SYNC
AUX ~ AC IN
REMOTE
MIX
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
COAX
INTERCOM
Microphone control and tally Intercom control and tally RTS intercom Intercom and tally
MIC REMOTE INTERCOM REMOTE RTS INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
RCP/CNU
VCS-700
I/O PORT REMOTE
Selection of input signals
CCU 1
1 2
CCU 2
3 CCU 4 5 6 1 2 3 RCP 4 5 6 MSU VCS
VCS
AUX1 AUX2
CNU-700
CCU
10
11
12
10
11
12
MSC
VCS
AUX3
AUX4 ~AC IN
RCP 1
RCP 2
MSU CCU/CNU
REMOTE CCU/CNU
POWER FUSE ~AC IN
AUX
I/O PORT
MSU-700
CCU/CNU CCU/CNU
RCP-700 series unit 1

PREVIEW REMOTE CCU/CNU PREVIEW AUX REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX
RCP-700 series unit 2
Switcher
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
28
2-7. Rack Mounting of System Equipment

19-inch size equipment The CCU-700A/ 700AP/ 900/ 900P Camera Control Unit, CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units, and VCS- 700 Video Selector can be mounted in a 19-inch standard EIA rack. These units either mount directly into the rack or with optional slide rails. These slide rails allow the unit to be easily pulled out from the rack and are recommended if you intended to pull out the unit frequently.
Warning for Safety Purpose: It takes two or more people to mount a unit into a rack. Mounting the unit into a rack by yourself can cause back or other injuries.
57.2 mm
B5 screw (6 mm or longer)
Mounting the unit directly to the rack Fix the unit to the rack using the rack mount bracket of the unit. Daily maintenance is easy with the unit mounted with this method.
Universal-type rack
12.7 15.9 15.9 12.7
RMM-301 B5 screw (6 mm or longer)
2. Secure the unit with the supplied four screws (B4 x

6) and the four washers.
Wide-type rack
12.7 31.75 12.7
W4
In addition units should be supported with L-brackets mounted at each side of the rack
B4 x 6
W4
B4 x 6
CCU-550D/ 550DP The two CCU-550D/ 550DP can be mounted in parallel in a 19-inch EIA standard rack by using the rack mount adapter RMM-301 (optional). (Three-unit height) Installation
1. Secure the RMM-301 in the 19-inch EIA standard

rack with the four B5 screws (6 mm or longer).
Warning If the rack falls due to the weight of the equipment, it may cause death or major injury. To prevent the rack from falling or moving, be sure to fix the rack to the floor. If the rack falls, death or serious injury may result. When attaching the unit, be sure to fix the rack to the floor and be careful not to attach at a height of 1.2 m or higher from the floor.
Caution Use the specified rack mount adapter. If not, injury could occur by drop of the unit because strength of the shelf board is not enough. Mount the unit with more than two persons. A one man job may cause injury. Be careful not to catch your finger or hand in the rack mount rail. Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 29
Mount in the rack in a stable position. Injury could occur by drop of the unit in unbalance condition of installation or removal. Install in a posture of stability and carefully.
Required Parts Rack mount adapter RMM-301 1 set Screw (B4 x 6) (supplied with the RMM-301) 4 pcs Sony part No.: 7-682-560-04 Washer (W4, SMALL) (supplied with the RMM-301) 4 pcs Sony part No.: 7-688-004-03 B5 screw (6 mm or longer) 4 pcs
RCP-700 Series and MSU-700 Series The RCP-750/751/700/701 and the MSU-700A/750 can be mounted into a 19-inch rack using an optional drawer. Each type of equipment requires different parts to mount it into the drawer.
Cover
Drawer RCP-700 Series
30
1 3
Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing)
3-1. Full DSP Camera Processing

The BVP-E10 Series uses 12-bit A/D conversion together with Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) based on the latest generation of digital LSI technology to deliver superb SDTV images. ADSP provides a number of innovative and powerful control functions, increasing the creative tools available to camera users. ADSP also takes advantage of several techniques to maximize the performance of the digital processing, in order to exploit the wide dynamic range given by the Power HAD EX CCD sensor
3-2. Maximum Dynamic Range

(1) Optimized bit assignment In the BVP-E10, video signals up to 260% of white level is processed linearly. Highlights over 260% are compressed by a pre-knee circuit before A/D conversion, providing the most efficient utilization of the 12-bit A/D conversion process. (2) Auto Knee Figure 3-2-1: Auto Knee curve image
Input signal level
The BVP-E10 Series uses a digital knee circuit to increase the dynamic range which can be captured by the camera. When the Auto Knee button on the MSU or RCP panel is pressed, the ADSP circuitry automatically optimizes both the knee point and knee slope for best reproduction of the high lights. Auto Knee can also be used in conjunction with The Adaptive Highlight control function described later .
white clip auto slope
Output signal level

point limit auto knee circuit
(3) Adaptive highlight control (Auto Knee mode) Conventional cameras only have a single knee point/ slope characteristic. In contrast, the Sony ADSP system has multiple knee point/slope characteristics. The camera monitors the brightness of all areas of the picture and adapts the knee point/slope for optimum reproduction. A typical example is shooting an interior scene which includes a sunlit exterior seen through a window. This new function applies only to video levels in excess of the knee point, the middle and low luminance parts remaining unchanged, ensuring camera matching is not impaired.
Figure 3-2-2: Knee curve image

Intput signal level
white clip
auto slope
Output signal level knee point 0 knee point 1 knee point 2 knee point 3 knee point n
........
32
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Photo 3-2-1: Adaptive highlight control ON and OFF
Normal
ON
3-3. Other ADSP Functions

(1) Knee Saturation Conventional cameras can reduce colour saturation in highlight areas, resulting in a 'washed out' effect and hue changes in overexposed areas of a picture. The Sony ADSP system maintains colour in highlight areas, , providing more natural colour reproduction. A Knee Saturation control allows manual adjustment of highlight saturation. Photo 3-3-1: Knee Saturation ON and OFF washed out this problem by optimizing the amplification of colour saturation at low light levels, providing more natural colour reproduction. In addition, the Low Key Saturation Range control offers a choice of 4 ranges defining the range of the Low Key Saturation control Photo 3-3-2: Low Key Saturation ON and OFF
Normal
Normal
ON
Colorimetry in dark areas are improved.
(3) Gamma New 12-bit A/D conversion more precisely defines the required gamma characteristic by using a gamma curve created from 48 segments. This is in comparison with the 32 segments in the previous camera range. (4) Black Gamma Black Gamma allows control of the linear part of the gamma characteristic, providing adjustment of the shadow areas of the picture during shooting . As with Low Key Saturation, a Black Gamma Range control sets the range over which Black Gamma operates. In the lowest setting, Black Gamma only influences the lowest level parts of the video signal, while in the highest setting, control extends to 50% video.
ON (2) Low key saturation With conventional cameras, low light areas can be subject to a reduction in saturation. This can result in colour in these areas being "washed out". The Low Key Saturation function on the BVP-E10 Series eliminates
33
(5) Multi Matrix Multi Matrix is a function that electronically adjusts the basic RGB colour 'taking characteristics' of the camera to achieve optimum colorimetry. It makes it easy to match the colour of cameras under multicamera operations, or to reproduce the characteristics of another type of camera. It can also be used to manipulate colour for a particular special effect. A conventional linear matrix function provides only six adjustable parameters, with considerable interaction between their effects on a specific colour. Multi Matrix divides the spectrum into 16 segments, each of 22.5 degrees, for each of which there is an independent hue and saturation parameter. Multi Matrix allows the selection of each of these segments, with separate adjustment of hue and saturation parameters. Operation flow is as follows:
Photo 3-3-3: Multi Matrix ON and OFF
1. Select Multi Matrix on the paint menu of the MSU700A/750 Master Set-up Unit.
Normal
2. Turn the Matrix and the Multi switches to ON. 3. The MSU-700A/750 EL display now shows a
representation of the Multi Matrix as it would appear on a vectorscope. You can select the desired colour phase that you want to adjust. (note for simplicity, the representation is based on the NTSC vector display)
4. After selection of the colour phase, its hue and

saturation can be adjusted. Figure 3-3-1: Multi Matrix
R-Y
On Photo 3-3-4: Multi Matrix (Vectorscope)

saturation hue B-Y
Normar
ON 34 Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
(6) Triple Skin Tone Detail Correction Skin Tone Detail Correction controls the detail level of those objects which have specific colour tones. The BVP-E10 Series allows detail to be set independently for each of three separate colour ranges. Colours are not limited to skin tones, but can be set for any colour. Detail may be increased or decreased relative to the normal level. Phase : Sets the colour phase for which Skin Tone Detail Correction is activated. Width : Sets the colour width for which Skin Tone Detail Correction is activated. Saturation : Sets the saturation for which Skin Tone Detail Correction is activated. Figure 3-3-2: Figure 3-3-2: Skin Tone Detail Correction
Width R-Y
CH-2 On
Sharper
Softer
Phase B-Y
Saturation
Photo 3-3-5: Triple Skin Tone Detail Correction ON and OFF
Normal
CH-1 On
Softer
35
(7) Adaptive Detail Control The Adaptive Detail Control provides natural detail enhancement on extreme highlights by automatically altering the amplitude of the edge signal for high contrast signals. Photo 3-3-6: Adaptive Detail Control ON and OFF
Normal
Magnified
On
The black edges are removed.
36
(8) Electronic Soft Focus This function is similar to an optical soft filter. By subtracting the edge enhancement signal from the original video signal, slightly 'defocused' pictures are created electronically. This is an important new creative feature, and - especially when used in conjunction with Skin Tone detail - can be used when more of a 'film look' is sought for close-ups, etc. Figure 3-3-3: Electronic Soft Focus signal image
Original Enhancer Soft Focus
Photo 3-3-7: Electronic Soft Focus ON and OFF
Detail off (9) Skin Tone Auto Iris A problem with a conventional auto iris is that movement of bright objects in a scene adversely affects facial exposure - a news studio is a typical example. Skin Tone Auto Iris is a function that controls the auto iris system to ensure a constant video level for a defined skin area within the scene. In the news studio example, when the colour phase is adjusted to match the facial tones of the newscaster, the iris now maintains the same video level even if the newscaster turns a page of their report, or people enter or exit the scene. It is effective for the other colours in addition to human skin tone.
Normal
Electronic Soft Focus On (Softer than with Detail Off)
37
(10)3-D White Shading Correction The camera picture area is divided into up to 1000 separate zones, each of which may have different shading value. The correction is automatically interpolated across adjacent zones. This technique provides precise white shading correction over the whole picture area. The 3D shading mode can be enabled through the camera maintenance menu, and operates automatically each time white shading is performed. Because the camera 'learns' and interpolates the data the accuracy may be improved still further on subsequent auto shading operations. White shading data should be stored in the camera OHB file or will otherwise be lost when the camera power is turned off. Photo 3-3-4: Correction curve image
Conventional Correction
3D Shading Correction
(11)Fine Detail The Fine Detail function allows the width of the detail edge to be adjusted without changing the peak level.*
*Effective for H details only.
Figure 3-3-5: Signal curve image
fine DTL off

(12)Cross Colour Suppression Separating the luminance and chrominance components of a composite signal can be a difficult task, even with the most advanced comb filtering techniques. In order to keep cross colour and cross luminance to a minimum, the BVP-E10 Series virtually eliminates frequency components that may result in such artifacts being generated prior to the signal output. These frequency components are eliminated 38 Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
fine DTL on
from the Y/R-Y/B-Y signals within the camera head by using sophisticated digital three line (NTSC)/five line (PAL)* comb filtering. This results in more greatly reduced cross colour and dot crawl than normally seen on a picture monitor fed from a composite video signal.
* three line for PAL on PsF mode
3-4. Outstanding reliability and easy maintenance

One of the most important concerns for broadcasters is the reliability of equipment. This is considerably improved with Sony digital processing. In Sony ADSP cameras, all the processing parameters are completely and precisely defined at the design stage, and almost all the potentiometers are replaced by semiconductor memories. Consequently, Sony ADSP cameras show extremely stable performance, regardless of environmental conditions such as temperature, humidity, shock and vibration. This high stability, together with the advantages of the selfcontained menu system, enables easy and accurate set-up of camera systems for regular realignment. Finally, a great benefit of Sony ADSP cameras is their advanced self-diagnostic system. BVP-E10 Series cameras detect problems in their digital processing and provide a viewfinder warning indication. Detailed information, such as identifying the faulty board, is also shown on the Master Set-up Unit screen and the Camera Command Network Unit character display to provide easy and rapid fault location.
3-5. Low power consumption

The BVP-E10 Series uses new digital techniques to significantly reduce the power consumption of the camera to just 13 Watts. This has the additional benefit of lowering the internal operating temperature of the camera, which further increases the stability of the signal processing circuitry, and provides increased operator comfort.
39
1 4
Control System
4-1. Sony Camera Control System

Several decades of TV operations have led to the development of many alternative operational and engineering philosophies relating to the deployment of video and technical control and to the monitoring and routine maintenance of multi-camera studio and OB truck installations. Sony has re-examined the entire studio camera architecture with the goal of structuring a far higher degree of system flexibility. For many applications, the RCP-750/751 (see Figure 4-1-1) provides comprehensive control of all required parameters. For more complex installations, the system offers several important features High-speed communication of digital control commands A considerably augmented Master Set-up Unit, the MSU-700A/750 The introduction of a powerful technical 'nerve centre' concept - the camera Command Network Units, CNU-700 and CNU-500 Electronically assignable camera remote control panels for use with these camera command network units
4-2. Master Set-up Unit - MSU-700A/750

The Master Set-up Unit (MSU) is the centralized technical control position for multi-camera systems. The MSU-700A/750 has been designed to provide comprehensive and wide ranging technical supervision and alignment of a complex camera system from a single centralized panel. If it is desirable in a large programme origination complex to extend this supervision to more than one control location (for example, separate operational and engineering/ maintenance control centres) then a number of MSU700A/750 units can access the entire camera system. To exercise maximum flexibility in controlling a multicamera system, the MSU-700A/750 is designed to work in conjunction with the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Command Network Units. However, if a simplified system is desired, the MSU-700A/750 can also operate as a stand-alone unit. It provides rapid, fingertip access to all controls relating to the smooth functioning of an operational system, including: Technical alignment controls for the entire camera chain Picture and waveform monitor switching System configuration Control data filing Extended Technical Access to Camera Video Processing A traditional high-end studio/OB camera chain entails a multiplicity of technical adjustments. In combination they optimize of the technical alignment of the RGB video processing channels and allow a broad degree of control over certain critical video subsystems (such as image enhancement, colour reproduction, dynamic range, etc.). Typically, these technical controls are segregated into those requiring regular operational access - and are provided as remote adjustments on video operational panels or technical control panels and others, perhaps requiring less frequent access, which are relegated to screwdriver adjustments on various circuit boards within the camera head and CCU. This separation often entailed a degree of protracted (and frustrating) re-alignment when subtle creative readjustments are desired for a particular picture composition. In the BVP-E10 Series camera system, Sony has adopted the philosophy that all technical controls are important and that remote access to virtually all controls on a single control panel would bring higher operational efficiency. This led to the introduction of the MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit. To avoid undue complication of the ergonomics of the panel layout that would result from such extensive access, a novel Electro Luminescent (EL) sub-panel forms an integral part of the overall MSU-700A/750 control panel - photo 42 Chapter 4 Control System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 4-1. This menu-driven touch screen allows remote preprogrammed and logical access to dozens of technical adjustments. The main features of the MSU700A/750 are given below. (1) Easy operation The following modes can be easily accessed by using the new EL touch panel display for maintenance and daily operation. Paint mode: Various paint items such as White, Black and Flare are adjustable File mode: Storing, retrieving and transferring reference files, lens files and scene files between camera heads on a PC memory card Maintenance mode: System phase control, CCU video level alignment, selection of character display from a CNU-700 and CNU-500, etc. Configuration mode: Entire control system configuration, RCP assignment, etc. Card mode: PC memory card initialize, store to PC memory card/recall from PC memory card, etc. Multi-mode: Setting of multi-camera operation such as 'All', 'Control Priority', 'Parallel Mode', etc. Function mode: On the MSU-750, this provides quick access to frequently used switch functions such as detail on/off, knee on/off etc. The MSU-700A includes dedicated front-panel switches for these functions (2) Multi-MSU operation In a conventional system, a single MSU controls a single studio or multiple studios. However, in this new control system, multiple MSUs can be used to remotely control/supervise a single studio from different operational engineering and control rooms. (3) Standard switch The user's standard operational setting is easily recalled by pressing the 'standard' switch. Photo 4-2-1: MSU-700A/750A Master Set-up Unit
4-3. Camera Command Network Units - CNU-500/ 700

The CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units are designed as the technical 'nerve centre' of a Star Shape Network System where all commands such as 'All', 'Control Priority', 'Parallel/ Mode', etc. are centralized and distributed to the respective CCUs of the studio system. They are furnished with an RS-232C port to provide interface capability to external systems such as ISR (Interactive Status Reporting), external PC or modem and robotics control systems. They can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack (3U height for the CNU-700, and 1U height for the CNU-500). By employing a RISC-based microprocessor in the CNU-700 and CNU-500, the communication speed has been greatly improved. Consequently, real-time control and instant response to the MSU-700A/750 or RCP-700 Series commands have been made possible. Through a CNU-700 or CNU-500, one RCP can control one CCU while one MSU is able to control multiple CCUs. All units connected to the CNU can easily communicate with each other. Because of this useful new -function, simultaneous control of multi cameras, file transfers between multiple cameras and control from an external device are now possible. As a convenient tool for system set-up and maintenance, MSU control routing ,CNU control assignment, and other system information can be displayed on a conventional picture monitor. Since the CNU is the nerve centre of a system, it has a bypass facility to maintain communication between the CCUs and RCPs in the event of a CNU malfunction or power loss. Therefore, even when the power unit or AT board of the CNU-700 or CNU-500 has failed, camera heads and HDCUs can be directly controlled from the RCPs to let programme production continue. As mentioned in Section 2, Total System, the cost versus performance balance between the two types of Camera Command Network Units allows users to build up systems that meet their application needs. The CNU-500 is suitable for applications with up to six Table 4-3-1:A comparison between the CNU-700 and CNU-500 CNU-700 Number of Cameras connectable Up to 6 cameras Up to 12 cameras with BKP-7930 fitted Up to 96 cameras with multi CNU connected Up to 6 RCPs Up to 12 RCPs with BKP-7930 fitted Up to 96 RCPs with multi CNU connected Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes One Two when BKP-7930 fitted Yes 2 Free Yes (RCP power is maintained when CCU is switched off) Yes, when BKP-7932 installed 3U Yes CNU-500 Up to 6 cameras No No Up to 6 RCPs No No No No Available with optional AUX connector No Yes No No Yes 1 Fixed No (But RCP is powered from CCU) No 1U Yes Chapter 4 Control System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 43 cameras, while the CNU-700 can be expanded to handle up to 12 cameras with use of the BKP-7930 optional expansion board. By adding additional CNU700s and BKP-7930 expansion boards, a large system of up to 96 cameras can be controlled. (1) High-speed data transmission rates CNU to MSU/RCP/ CCU: More than 500 Kbps (Approximately 50 times faster than earlier camera command systems) Camera Head to CCU: 35 Kbps (Approximately 15 times the speed of earlier analogue camera systems) (2) System configuration Basic system: Up to six cameras with one CNU-700 or CNU-500 Expanded system: Up to 12 cameras with one CNU700 with one BKP-7930 optional board installed Maximum system: Up to 96 cameras with eight CNU700 units (each with a BKP-7930 optional board installed) via I/O port on the rear panel (four MSU700A/750 Master Set-up Units required). (3) Character display Information concerning the camera heads and CCUs connected to the CNU-700 and CNU-500 can be displayed on a monitor via the CHARACTER connector. This includes: Camera settings System connection information Results of Auto set-up Self-diagnostics information (4) Emergency feature In the event of a problem with the CNU-700 and CNU500, turning their internal OPERATION switch to the EMERGENCY position allows control signals from the remote control panel to be directly connected to the camera head. In this way, programme production can continue by bypassing the CNU.
Number of RCPs connectable Multi MSU connectable Multi VCS connectable Other controller connectable Programable with remote control RS-232C connector for ISR RS-232C connector for switcher etc. REF. video in Character out Assignment between RCP and CHU/CCU Power supply to RCP Connect to previous generation's command system such as CCU-370 Height 19-inch standard rack mauntable
Figure 4-3-1: CNU-700/500 Basic System Configurations (Up to six cameras with one CNU-700 or CNU-500)
Command Video Character
BVP-E10/P/WS/WSP+ CA-950/P+CA-905+BVF-77 CCU-900/P 1
Monitor Waveform Monitor Vector Scope
CCU-700/P 2 VCS-700
B/W monitor for character display CNU-700/500 NTSC or PAL
BVP-E10/P/WS/WSP+ CA-570/P 4
CCU-550A/AP W/BKP-5973
MSU-700A 5
RCP-700 Series
4-4. Remote Control Panels - RCP-700/ 701/ 750/ 751

RCP-700/701 The RCP-700 (joystick type) and RCP-701 (dial control type) provide basic control of Iris, Master Black, and R/ B black and white balance. They can be used in combination with the MSU-700A/750 where space is at a premium, or they can be used as a sub-control panel with other types of RCPs. RCP-750/751 The RCP-750/751 Remote Control Panel provides enhanced control of the Sony BVP-E10 Series Color Video Camera via the CCU-500/700/900Series Camera Control Unit. The panel is connected either directly to the CCU-500/700/900 Series Camera Control Unit or via the CNU-500/700 Camera Command Network Unit, by a special cable of up to 200 m (656 feet) in length. 44 Chapter 4 Control System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual The RCP-750 and RCP-751 are identical in their functions except with respect to the iris and master black adjustments, for which the RCP-750 uses a joystick type control while the RCP-751 uses rotary knobs. The RCP-750/751 has the following features: Optimal control -arrangement for basic camera operation This remote control panel is provided with all the essential control functions for normal operation of a BVP-E10 Series camera. The panel layout has been designed for efficient operation, and combines dedicated control switches and indicators for frequently used functions, together with a unique colour LCD touchscreen to provide rapid access to secondary operational and setup items.
Controlling the scene file function Camera adjustment and control data such as paint data for a particular scene can be stored in the camera in the form of a scene file. The stored data can easily be retrieved at any time to automatically set the camera to the shooting conditions for that particular scene. This panel enables up to five scene files to be created and handled. Signal transmission via a digital line Between this remote control panel and the camera control unit, signals are digitally transmitted via a single connection cable (CCA-5), ensuring a reliable signal. Operating power is also supplied via the cable. Memory Stick media card slot Scene files, reference files, and other data can be stored on a Memory Stick media card and reproduced at any time. Figure 4-4-1: Operation Panel of the RCP-750/751
RCP-750 1Control select block 2STANDARD button 3Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
PARA MASTER SLAVE CAM PW TEST BARS
Touch panel with 31/2-inch Colour LCD for various operations The control panel has a touch panel that permits various items to be selected and adjusted on the LCD in menu format. Four units mountable on a 19-inch rack Up to four units of this control panel can be mounted across the width of a 19-inch EIA standard rack. Preview The RCP-750 includes a joystick override (preview) function, activated by pressing down the joystick control knob. A connector on the RCP can be linked to an external router to provide camera preview selection. Alternatively, a menu setting in the RCP allows the preview function to control the camera selection of an MSU-700A/750, without requiring any external connecting cables.
CLOSE
q;Power and output signal select block qaAUTO SETUP block
AUTO SETUP
CHAR SKIN DTL LEVEL START/ STANDARD ACTER AUTO HUE BREAK WHITE BLACK
5600K
AUTO KNEE
SKIN DETAIL
DTL GATE
BLACK GAMMA FUNCTION
PAINT 1 PAINT 2 PAINT 3 SCENE MAINTE NANCE
qsMenu operation block
4RGB WHITE controls

WHITE DETAIL
qfDETAIL knob qgMEMORY STICK slot and access lamp
5RGB BLACK/FLARE controls and indicator 6Camera number/tally indication window

MASTER BLACK
BLACK/FLARE a
EXT
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
AUTO
SENS
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
7ALARM indicator 8CALL button 9PANEL ACTIVE button
CLOSE
OPEN
Iris/master black control block
COARSE
ALARM
CALL
PANEL ACTIVE IRIS

REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
RCP-751
BLACK/FLARE a
6Camera number/tally indication window

MASTER BLACK
RELATIVE
EXT
SENS
CLOSE
OPEN
COARSE
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
AUTO
7ALARM indicator 8CALL button 9PANEL ACTIVE button
ALARM
CALL
PANEL ACTIVE
IRIS
Chapter 4 Control System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
45
4-5. Flexible System Configuration.

In most camera systems, the physical cable connections determine which camera can be controlled from a given control panel. The Sony MSU/ CNU/RCP system includes the facility to define the Figure 4-5-1: Flexible Configuration camera selection by a control menu in the MSU. The configuration can also be graphically displayed on a monitor connected to the Character Display output from the CNU.
Extremely Flexible Configuration

- When ex-factory The assignments between CCUs and RCPs are set as below.
BVP-E10/P/WS/WSP+ CA-950/P+CA-905+BVF-77
1 2 3 4 5 6
BVP-E10/P/WS/WSP+ CA-570/P
CCU-900/P
CNU-700
CCU 1
CCU 2
VCS-700
CCU 3
CCU-700/P
CCU 4
MSU-700A
MSU 1
CCU 5
CCU 6
RCP 1
RCP 2
RCP 3
RCP 4
RCP 5
RCP 6 RCP-700 Series
- For flexibility, assignments can be easily changed e,g CAM 1 controlles from RCP 1&2, CAM 2 controlled from RCP 3&4, CAM 3 controlles from RCP5, and CAM 5 controlled from RCP 6
BVP-E10/P/WS/WSP+ CA-950/P+CA-905+BVF-77
CNU-700
CCU 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
BVP-E10/P/WS/WSP+ CA-570/P
CCU-900/P
CCU 2
VCS-700
CCU 3
CCU-700/P
CCU 4
MSU-700A
MSU 1
CCU 5
CCU 6
RCP 1
RCP 2
RCP 3
RCP 4
RCP 5
RCP 6 RCP-700 Series
46
4-6. File Structure

The BVP-E10 Series camera system is able to store adjustment data in memory in the form of files. There are six types of files, for different purposes: (1) Operator File Used to store viewfinder display preferences for the camera operator. There are many types of warning and information displays which can be superimposed on the viewfinder picture. These can be customized to suit individual preferences, and stored as an Operator File on a Memory Stick media card at the camera head. Video (painting) data is not stored in the Operator File (2) Preset Operator File Stores the preset operator file items. This file is stored in the camera. (3) Scene File Used for storing settings for frequently used operating environments. The scene file stores paint data for each scene, and up to five scene files can be stored in the BVP-E10 system. Scene files can also be stored in the Memory Stick media card (4) Reference File Used for storing the standard operating settings for a user. The reference file stores reference data used in the auto set-up mode plus the standard settings of those switch functions that are not executed with the auto set-up mode. A reference file is usually created when the camera is installed, and then left unchanged This file is stored in the camera and Memory Stick media card. (5) Lens File The lens file contains data to compensate for various errors induced by the lens, including the Range Extender setting. In the case of the latest generation of digital lenses, the lens type is automatically selected, while for earlier generation lenses, the lens type can be selected by the user using the camera head. Lens files usually contain factory data, but can be modified by users if required.
Table 4-6-1:Structure of Paint Related Files

Scene File Refer to "File Items". Lens File When lens extender setting is OFF, Flare R/G/B and V Modulation Shading R/G/B/Master can be stored. When lens extender setting is ON, White R/B, Flare R/G/B and V Modulation Shading R/G/B/Master can be stored. Reference File Refer to "File Items". OHB File R/G/B for each White Shading H SAW, H PARA, V SAW, VPARA can be stored. R/G/B for each Black Shading H SAW, H PARA, V SAW, and V PARA can be stored. And OHB matrix and the ND offset can be stored. Output to hardware*
When STANDARD is executed.
Factory-set value 0
* The additional data of each file is sent to each circit on the unit.
File Storage and transfer Reference, Scene and Lens file information is stored in the camera head, but can be accessed through the camera control system. The MSU-700A and MSU-750 include a PC Card slot, which accepts a small PCMCIA-standard PC memory card The complete setting of a camera, including reference file and scene files, can be stored in this card for security. Memorized parameters can be accurately retrieved at any time and from any camera. The MSU-700A/750 also include a file transfer function, which allows reference file and scene file
data to be transferred between cameras,. In a multicamera operation system, optimum picture matching is simply and easily achieved by transferring the appropriate camera setting data from the master camera to other slave cameras via the CNU-700 or CNU-500. Thus, any camera can be set to a uniform condition once a master camera is specifically adjusted. In simpler systems without MSU or CNU, the RCP750/751 allows scene file and reference file data to be stored on a Memory Stick. File transfer between cameras can be carried out by manually transferring the Memory Stick to each RCP in turn.
4-7. Auto Set-up

The BVP-E10 Series cameras incorporate a sophisticated Auto Setup system to adjust the video processing circuitry parameters for optimum colour matching. In addition to auto white balance, auto black balance and auto level set-up, the following parameters can also be adjusted according to a reference file. Auto white shading (The shading compensation is achieved with horizontal and vertical saw tooth and parabolic waveform as well as with a digitally synthesized waveform for almost 1000 individual correction zones created by DSP.) Skin detail auto hue (automatic hue detection for specified colour range, with full skin detail function.)
47
4-8. Control Priority and Parallel Mode

Control Priority When a camera system is configured using the CNU700 or CNU-500, each camera can be connected in parallel to both an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel and the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit, and is controlled from whichever unit has control priority. Priority for iris/master black adjustments only can be obtained when the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button on the panel on which the PANEL ACTIVE button is not lit. When the MSU-700A/750 is in the panel active status, only the iris and master black controls are inoperative on the MSU-700A/750 and can be set by pressing the illuminated IRIS/MB ACTIVE button. Parallel Mode The MSU-700A/750 and RCP-700 Series panels have a PARA button to select Parallel Mode. When the PARA button of the unit is pressed and illuminated, Parallel Mode is activated and all the control functions, other than the iris/master black controls, become operative from both units. The Parallel Mode can be canceled by pressing the PARA button of the MSU-700A/750 or RCP-700 Series control panel.
4-9. S-BUS Control

The S-Bus Concept A further advantage of the Sony camera control system is the 'S-Bus control' technique, which is based on an original Sony concept. Studio installations and OB units use digital routers as the nerve centre for a complete audio/video system. With Sony system integration, all the equipment is connected to the Sony digital router via a LAN, called the 'S-BUS'. With the SBus system, control and tally signals are interlocked so that they, along with video and audio signals, can be simultaneously switched from a central terminal. Each input/output source can be given a name, which can then be displayed on the source name display panel of a DVS-9000 Series or MVS-8000 Series Video Switcher Figure 4-9-1: Router control from MSU
NTSC or PAL
or on the BKSR3280/ R3281 Status Character Display. One example of the operational advantages of the SBus system is that the routing of input signals to the primary inputs - of a DVS-9000/MVS-8000 Series Video Switcher can be changed at any time without having to re-connect cables. Even the source name display, tally signal and tally display are interlocked and changed automatically. Sony camera command system with S-Bus Controlling the router from an MSU panel The digital router's cross point can switched from the MSU-700A/750 by pressing its camera select button. SDI video monitoring is enabled.
PIX CNU with BKP-7933
CNU character MSU-700A
CCU-900/P with A/D board
SDI
IN1 CCU-700/P with A/D board IN2

PIX WFM
SDI Monitor from MSU camera select IN5 Router (DVS-V3232 etc.) Primary Station OUT25
S-BUS BNC CCA-5 Video BNC
Interlocking the RCP Assignment and WFM/PIX Assignment When the assignment of any RCP is changed from the MSU-700A/750, the picture and waveform monitoring is also automatically changed to follow the new arrangement.
48
Figure 4-9-2: Interlocking RCP and monitor assignment
1CAM monitor
2CAM monitor
3CAM monitor
4CAM monitor
5CAM monitor
5CAM monitor PIX WFM
Control 1CAM
Control 2CAM
Control 3CAM
Control 4CAM
Control 5CAM
Control 5CAM
Control 4CAM
Control 3CAM
Control 2CAM
Control 1CAM
When the RCP assignment is canged, PIX/WFM video is also changed automatically.
Controlling the router from an RCP Pressing the preview switch on an RCP-750/751 control panel switches the appropriate digital router Figure 4-9-3: Router control from an RCP
NTSC or PAL
cross point. SDI video monitoring is enabled.(software preview function mustr be enabled in the RCP-750/751 menu)
PIX CNU character

MSU-700A
CNU with BKP-7933
SDI
IN1 CCU-700/P with A/D board IN2 OUT1 OUT2 IN5 CCU-700/P with A/D board OUT5
SDI Monitor for RCP

PIX WFM
Router (DVS-V3232 etc.) Primary Station
PIX
WFM
S-BUS BNC CCA-5 Video BNC

PIX WFM
Controlling the RCP assignment from other S-BUS equipment All S-BUS equipment detects the connection configurations between camera heads, CCUs and RCPs by communicating with each other. This means that other S-BUS equipment can change the assignment of RCPs in a system that does not include an MSU-700A/750
49
Figure 4-9-4: Remote control of the RCP assignment without an MSU-700A/750

(IN1 to 5) PIX1 video in (IN13 to 17)WF1 video in (OUT1 to 5)PIX1 video out (OUT13 to 17)WF1 video out
NTSC or PAL PIX CNU with BKP-7933
CNU character
CCU
PIX1
WF1 IN1 IN2 OUT1 OUT2
CCU
WF1 PIX1 CCU WF1
PIX1 IN5 IN13 IN14 IN17 Router (DVS-V3232 etc.) Primary Station
OUT5 OUT13 OUT14 OUT17
PIX/WF Monitor for RCP S-BUS BNC CCA-5

PIX WFM PIX WFM PIX WFM
RCP Remote Assign Panel
Video BNC
Camera name display onto CNU Sony uses a PC as the primary control station of a digital router. Each camera can be given a name with this primary PC, and these names are then automatically shown on the CNU character display. Figure 4-9-5: Current tally and S-BUS tally
Serial Tally Transfer Decodes S-BUS serial tally signal and forward to CCU. A CNU-700 requires a BKP-7933 option for S-BUS functionality.
S-BUS Tally
TOP MENU
KEY KEY WIPE DME CHR BKGD TRANS PATERN WIDTH KEY PAD
Current Tally
TOP MENU
KEY KEY WIPE DME CHR BKGD TRANS PATERN WIDTH KEY PAD
M/E-1
KEY KEY WIPE DME CHR BKGD TRANS
1
MODIFY 1 LUM
M/E-1
KEY KEY WIPE DME CHR BKGD TRANS
1
MODIFY 1 LUM
M/E-2
2
MODIFY 2 SAT
M/E-2
KEY PAD
2
MODIFY 2 SAT
KEY PAD
AUX DELEGATION
DSK 1
DSK 2 DSK
WIPE
DME
CHR
BKGD TRANS
AUX DELEGATION
DSK 1
DSK 2 DSK
WIPE
DME
CHR
BKGD TRANS
3
DIRECT POSIT HUE KEY PAD
3
DIRECT POSIT HUE KEY PAD
PGM/PST
P/P P/P DSK DME FRAME MEN 1 FRAME MEN 2 STATS
PGM/PST
DSK P/P P/P DSK DME FRAME MEN 1 FRAME MEN 2 STATS
4
USER WIPE
DSK
4
USER WIPE KEY
KEY
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
EDIT
FRAME MEM 1
FRAME MEM 2
PROG
DISK
STILL
CHR
SETUP
DLAG
M/E1
M/E2
P/P UTIL
BKGD FREZE PIC
AUX
KEY PAD
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
EDIT
FRAME MEM 1
FRAME MEM 2
PROG
DISK
STILL
CHR
SETUP
DLAG
M/E1
M/E2
P/P UTIL
BKGD FREZE PIC
KEY PAD
SYSTEM
VIDEO IN
SYSTEM
VIDEO IN
SHIFT SHIFT
NONGRAPH LIGHT DME DME NONGRAPH LIGHT DME DME
UTILITY UTILITY
SHIFT SHIFT F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 EXIT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
AUX
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
M/E 2
AUX
PGM
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
M/E 2
PGM
M/E-1 K1 K2
M/E
ON OVER KEY
ON OVER KEY 2 KEY XPT KEY KEY KEY 2
KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4
M/E-1 K1 K2
M/E
ON OVER KEY
ON OVER KEY 2 KEY XPT KEY KEY KEY 2
KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4
BKGD
M/E
BKGD
M/E
NEXT TRANSITION MIX NAM SUPER WIPE
SHIFT
9
MATTE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT
SHIFT
9
MATTE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT
DME DME
6
LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC
6
LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2
AUX BUS
WIPE
2
EFF DISS
3
AUTO TRANS
TRANSITION TYPE
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 2
AUTO
CUT
SNAP SHOT
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY1
KEY2
M/E-2 K1 K2
M/E
ON XPT KEY OVER KEY
ON OVER KEY 2 KEY KEY KEY 2
KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4
BKGD
M/E
SHIFT
9
MIX
NEXT TRANSITION NAM SUPER MATTE WIPE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT
DME
6
DME 1 FRAMES DME 2 LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
WIPE
2
EFF DISS
3
AUTO TRANS
TRANSITION TYPE KEY KEY KEY KEY
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
SNAP SHOT
AUTO
CUT
KEY1
KEY2
AUX BUS
MASTER E-FILE CONTROL PANEL SNAP EFF ALL DME M/E
WIPE
2
EFF DISS
3
AUTO TRANS
TRANSITION TYPE
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 2
AUTO
CUT
SNAP SHOT
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY1
KEY2
M/E-2 K1 K2
M/E
ON XPT KEY OVER KEY
ON OVER KEY 2 KEY KEY KEY 2
KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4
BKGD
M/E
SHIFT
9
MIX
NEXT TRANSITION NAM SUPER MATTE WIPE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT
DME
6
DME 1 FRAMES DME 2 LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
WIPE
2
EFF DISS
3
AUTO TRANS
TRANSITION TYPE KEY KEY KEY KEY
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
SNAP SHOT
AUTO
CUT
KEY1
KEY2
PGM/PST DSK1 DSK2

M/E M/E
ON OVER DSK
ON OVER DSK 2 KEY DSK
DOWN STREAM KEYER

1 2
DSK 2
PGM/PST DSK1
M/E M/E
ON OVER DSK
ON OVER
DOWN STREAM KEYER

EFF SNAP ALL
MASTER E-FILE CONTROL PANEL
BKGD
DSK 2
KEY
DSK
DSK 2
DME M/E
BKGD
M/E M/E
TRANS RATE 7 8 9
EFF DIS CLR
TRANS RATE 7 8 9
EFF DIS CLR
DSK2
M/E
M/E
3
DSK1
MATTE
AUTO
SPLIT
BORD
DROP
SHDW
OUT
3
DSK1
MATTE
AUTO
SPLIT
BORD
DROP
SHDW
OUT
DME
M/E
LASTX
DME
M/E
LASTX
PGM
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2
LUM
LIN
CLEAN
PTN
KEY
PROC
AUTO TRANS TRIM
PGM
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2
LUM
LIN
CLEAN
PTN
KEY
PROC
AUTO TRANS TRIM
2
DME P/P DSK 3
STORE LEARN 1 2 3
2
DME P/P DSK 3
STORE LEARN 1 2 3
TRANSITION TYPE
XPT DSBL
TRANSITION TYPE
XPT DSBL
PST
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
M/E 2
AUTO
3
CUT
4
DSK2
DSK
DSK
DSK
DSK
FADE TO BLACK
PST
DME 4 DME USER
BLACK
COLOR BKGD
SHIFT
M/E 1
M/E 2
AUTO
3
CUT
4
DSK2
DSK
DSK
DSK
DSK
RCALL
ENTER
FADE TO BLACK
DME 4
DME
USER
RCALL
ENTER
DSK1
DSK2
DSK1
DSK2
DVS-7250system
DVS-7250system
CNU
S-BUS
RS-422A CNU
S-BUS
RS-422A
Tally Decoder
Tally Decoder
CCA-5 cable
CCU CCU CCU CCU
50
1 5
Optical Fibre Transmission System
5-1. Optical Fibre Overview

The wide band triax system provided by the CA-570/P and CCU-550D/DP and CCU-700A/P ensures robust, accurate video and audio transmission from camera head to CCU. However, the alternative Fibre ttansmission system employed in the CA-950/P and CCU-900/P provides several important benefits. Long distance transmission. Video and audsio signals can be transmited up to 3 km (1.86 miles)* including power. If power is supplied locally at the camera head, maximum distance is extended to 10 km (6.24miles) Fully digital transmission. 4:2:2 component video signals are transmitted between camera head and CCU, ensuring very high quality. No performance degradation even at long cable lengths. Unlike conventional triax systems, video quality is not affected by cable length. Full facilities, including teleprompter and return viewfinder video are maintained up to maximum cable length. To provide the high-quality signal transmission between the CCU-900/P and BVP-E10 Series, the SMPTE standard optical fibre connector and cable have been adopted. The connecting cable uses two single-mode optical fibre lines, two control lines, and two power lines to carry digitized video, audio, control signals and power to the camera.
* When supplying power to the camera via the optical fibre cable, the maximum cable length varies with the camera system configuration and lens type, the size of the optical fibre cable and the number of cable connectors.
5-2. Cleaning of the Connector and Cable

The optical contacts of the fibre interface are vulnerable to dust and dirt, so care should be exercised to avoid unnecessary exposure to any contamination. In particular, the dust covers supplied should always be ued when the cable is disconnected. Regular cleaning of the optical contact of the units mentioned below is strongly recomended CCU connector of CA-905/P Camera connector of the CCU-900/P Optical/Electrical cable When using the BVP-E10 Series with the large lens adaptor CA-905L, it is recommended to also clean the following optical items. CA cable CCU connector Follow the procedures below for cleaning. Tools Required Alignment sleeve remover HC-001 (for female connector) Sony P/N: J-6480-010-A Note Insert the shorter nose end when removing/installing the alignment sleeve. Grasp the handle, not the shock absorber.
Shock absorber portion Handle
Cleaning Male connector Clean the tip of the white optical contacts with a cotton swab moistened with alcohol.
Optical contacts (white)
Female connector The optical contacts for the female connector are in an unexposed area. When cleaning, it is necessary to expose the contacts by first removing the alignment sleeve. Proceed as follows.
1. Insert the alignment sleeve remover into the

alignment sleeve in a straight line and turn it clockwise.
Insert the shorter nose end
Cotton swabs (commercially available) Note Use the cotton swab with a diameter of around 4 mm. The cotton swab with a diameter more than 5 mm does not reach far enough in to the inner part of the cable, to clean the tip of the optical contact.
2. When the turning stops, forcedly pull out the

remover in the straight line. Note The alignment sleeve can be removed/reinstalled with the sleeve itself attached to the tip of the remover.
52
Chapter 5 Optical Fibre Transmission System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Great care should be taken so as not to lose or damage the alignment sleeve. (Alignment sleeve: Sony P/N 9-980-074-01)
Alignment sleeve
3. Clean the tip of the white optical contacts with a

cotton swab moistened with alcohol.
Optical contacts (white)
4. Insert the remover with the alignment sleeve

attached to its tip, and push it until it clicks.
5. Rotate the remover counterclockwise to install the

alignment sleeve, and extract the remover.
Chapter 5 Optical Fibre Transmission System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
53
1 6
A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings
6-1. Camera Settings

Although accurate alignment and matching of cameras generally requires skilled and experienced operators, for day-to-day operation the automatic functions included in the BVP-E10 series cameras, and the stability provided by the digital processing allow excellent picture quality to be maintained without skilled operators The following information may be used as a guide for such operation. (2) Accurate alignment can only be made if the waveform monitor and picture monitor used are themselves accurately maintained. (3) CCU and system check Switch on Colour bars, and ensure the colour bar level and black balance of each camera is the same level. Any discrepancies point to errors in the monitoring system, or in the alignment of the CCU, and should be eliminated before attempting camera adjustments. (4) Gray scale check View the grey scale chart, and monitor using picture and waveform monitors. Use the iris control to adjust the white level to 100%. Execute Auto White or adjust RGB WHT to make the R/G/B levels match. This can be done using the RGB selection from the waveform monitoring, or by viewing the composite output from the camera and checking that there is no chroma present (5) The grey scale should be uniform, with negligible chroma on any of the steps. Precise adjustments of Flare, Black Level and Gamma can all be made in this way, but require skill and experience, and are outside the scope of this document.
1. One-touch power on Use the main switch of the power supply to turn on/off the whole system rather than using the power on/off switches on the individual devices for operating convenience. 2. Warm-up time A camera system can be used to start shooting within a few seconds after power is turned on. If the camera is connected in a large system environment, it may require a little more time especially for System Locking after the power is turned on. It is recommended that system components that need continual system stability, such as a sync-generator, should remain powered on at all times. 3. Camera head connection
(1) When the camera head connection needs to be changed, turn off the HEAD POWER using the switches on the CCU or RCP. (2) Check the cable indicator on the CCU. If the Cable "Open" LED is illuminated, ensure that the cable is correctly connected at both ends. If the cable "Short" LED is illuminated, the cable may be faulty. Do not use until the problem has been rectified. (3) When changing the accessories such as a lens or viewfinder, it is possible to turn the camera power off using the POWER SW on the camera adaptor. Ensure this is switched back on when the change is completed
8. Colour matching between the cameras Even after making the above camera adjustments, there still might be a very small difference between the cameras. This difference is usually so slight that it can be ignored. However, if it is desired to make a closer match, then this should be achieved by Choosing one camera as a reference and adjusting the levels of black, gamma and flare of the other cameras to match those of the chosen reference camera.
Notes Be sure to situate each camera as close as possible to each other because the reflected light from the test chart changes depending on the angle of reflection even when shooting the same chart.
4. Installation When cameras are first installed, the standard operating conditions (knee, matrix, gamma etc) should be stored in the camera reference file. These settings can then be quickly recalled just by pressing the Standard button. This clears any adjustments which may have been made by another operator. 5. Scene files For settings which will be used frequently (different studio lighting settings, for example), scene files should be created. These settings can then be quickly recreated by a single button press. 6. Camera adjustment
(1) Press the STANDARD button to clear the data from the last shooting, or execute Auto Setup. (2) Perform an Auto Black balance (3) Perform an auto white balance using a gray scale or standard white chart. in the same lighting conditions that will be used for programme shooting. Ensure the chart is uniformly illuminated.
9. End When shooting is finished, just turn off the main switch of the CCU power supply. When powered up next time, the camera will return to exactly the same condition as before switch off
7. Precise camera adjustment

(1) For more precise adjustment of the camera, a grey scale chart is recommended- Check the gray scale for any stains, spots, cracks, or imperfections. Old, damaged or discoloured chart should not be used. (Keep the chart at normal room temperature in a dark area to prolong its useful life). 56 Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
1 7
Location and Function of Parts and Controls
7-1. BVP-E10 Series, Color Video Camera

7-1-1 Side Panels
1Handle buttons
INCAM RET1
2Viewfinder lock lever
3Assignable button 4ND filter selector 5CC filter (BVPE10WS/ E10WSP only) 6WHITE BAL switch 7OUTPUT/DCC switch 8GAIN switch 9VTR switch
OUTPUT WHITE BAL GAIN VTR
4ND filter selector
q;STATUS/CANCEL switch qaDISPLAY switch
ON STATUS OFF CANCEL MENU MENU DISPLAY GENLOCK
qdCA lock screw qsMemory Stick slot
qfLOCK knob
qgViewfinder lock ring
TESTOUT
MIC
qhTEST OUT connector
a Handle buttons The function of each of these buttons is assignable in the menu operation. At the factory, the frontbutton is set to RET 1, and the rear button is set to INCOM. RET 1 (return video 1): A return video 1 signal from the Camera Control Unit (CCU) is displayed on the viewfinder screen while this button is pressed. INCOM (intercom): The intercom microphone is ON while this button is pressed.
b Viewfinder lock lever Locks the viewfinder after adjusting the position in the front-to-rear direction together with the LOCK knob. c Assignable button This switch can be assigned by the user to different functions as required. The setting can be changed with the OPERATION Menu. On the BVP-E10/E10P, a electronic colour temperature correction of 5,600K is the default factory setting for this button. On the BVPE10WS/E10WSP, the default setting is unassigned. Set the function with the OPERATION Menu as required.
58
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
d ND filter selector Selects the desired ND filter. Filter No. 1 2 3 4 Filter Clear 1/4ND 1/16ND 1/64ND
j STATUS/CANCEL switch STATUS: Displays the setting status of the camera on the viewfinder screen when the switch is set to this position after setting the DISPLAY switch to ON. CANCEL: Cancels the selection made by the MENU SELECT knob and restores the previously selected menu item. k DISPLAY switch Used for displaying the current status of the camera, settings of format and assignable buttons, and menu on the viewfinder screen. ON: Display function activated OFF: Display function not activated MENU: A screen for setting the displaying items and functions appears. l Memory Stick slot Insert a Memory Stick to store file data. m CA lock screw Tighten the screw to secure the CA-530/ 570/5 70P/ 950/ 950P Camera Adaptor to the camera. n LOCK knob Locks the viewfinder after adjusting the position in the front-to-rear direction together with the viewfinder lock lever. o Viewfinder lock ring Locks the viewfinder after adjusting the position side to side. p TEST OUT connector (BNC type) Supplies the signal selected with the menu operation or the remote control panel.
e CC (colour temperature conversion) filter (BVPE10WS/ E10WSP only) Selects the desired CC filter suitable for the lighting conditions. Note that in the BVP-E10/E10P cameras, electronic colour temperature correction is used instead of an optical filter.
Filter No. A B C D
Filter Cross filter 3,200K (Clear) 4,300K 6,300K
f WHITE BAL (white balance memory select) switch Selects the white balance adjustment method and memory cell to store the adjusted value. PRESET: White balance is automatically adjusted to the preset value for the colour temperature of 3,200K. A or B: Memory cell A or B is selected. g OUTPUT/DCC (output signal select/auto knee) switch Selects an output signal supplied to a VTR, viewfinder, and video monitor (colour-bar signals or camera picture). When a camera picture is selected, the auto knee function can be activated. BARS/OFF: Colour-bar signals are output, and the autoknee circuit does not function. CAM/OFF: A camera picture is output, but the autoknee circuit does not function. CAM/ON: A camera picture is output, and the autoknee circuit functions. h GAIN switch Selects the appropriate video gain (Low, Medium, High) according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. The actual gain values for positions L, M, and H, are set with the OPERATION Menu. i VTR switch When a portable VTR is connected to the camera via the CA-530/570/570P/950/950P Camera Adaptor, the VTR starts recording as follows: SAVE: Power-save position for recording. Recording starts a few seconds after the VTR START button is pressed. A newly recorded picture may not smoothly be connected to the previously recorded part. STBY (standby): Recording starts immediately upon pressing the VTR START button. Note: The WHITE BAL, OUTPUT/DCC, GAIN, and VTR switches do not function when the camera is connected to a Camera Control Unit (CCU), RCP or Remote Control Unit (RM).
59
7-1-2 Front Panel
f MIC LEVEL (microphone level) control When a portable VTR is connected using the CCZ cable of the CA-570/570P Camera Adaptor, the microphone level can be adjusted by turning this control. When the CA-570/570P Camera Adaptor is used and the LEVEL/ MIC switch on the rear panel of the camera adaptor is set to FRONT/OFF, the sound volume of the intercom can be adjusted using this control. g SHUTTER switch OFF: Electronic shutter does not function. ON: Electronic shutter is activated. SEL: The shutter speed and shutter mode change each time the switch is set to this position. h VTR START button When a Camera Control Unit (CCU) is connected, the audio signal of the intercom is sent to the CCU while this button is held pressed. When a VTR is connected using the CCZ cable of the CA-570/570P, pressing this button starts recording, and pressing it again stops recording. It is the same function as with the VTR button on the lens. i LENS connector (12-pin) Connect a lens cable. j MIC (microphone) connector (3-pin) Connect a microphone cable. Normally, connect the microphone supplied with the BVF-10/ 10CE/ 20W/ 20WCE Viewfinder. Phantom powering is turned off with the appropriate internal switch setting.
VF
1VF connector 2Cable clamp
3Lens mount lever
NS
SHUTTER OFF ON SEL
AUTO W/B BAL WHT
4AUTO W/B BAL switch

BLK MIC LEVEL
VTR START
LE
5MENU SELECT knob 6MIC LEVEL control 7SHUTTER switch 8VTR START button 9LENS connector q;MIC connector
a VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin) Connect the 20-pin viewfinder cable of the BVF-10/ 10CE/ 20W/ 20WCE viewfinder. b Cable clamp Secures a microphone cable and lens cable. c Lens mount lever Secures the lens to the lens mount. d AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white balance/ black balance adjustment) switch Adjusts the white balance and black balance automatically. WHT: The white balance is automatically adjusted. When the WHITE BAL switch on the side of the camera is set to A or B, the adjusted value is stored in memory cell A or B. BLK: The black balance is automatically adjusted. The black set is simultaneously adjusted. Note: The SHUTTER and AUTO W/B BAL switches do not function when the camera is connected to a CCU, RCP, or RM. e MENU SELECT knob When the DISPLAY switch on the side panel is set to MENU and the menu is displayed, turn this control to select a menu item and press it to register the selection.
60
7-2. CA-570/ 570P, Camera Adaptor

1RET1 button/RET button and RET 2/3/4 switch qlPGM level control w;ENG level control 2TALLY lamp and TALLY switch
CA-570
3PGM level controls and PROD/ENG switches waMIC LINE switch 4INCOM level controls, PROD/ENGswitches, and LEVEL MIC switches 5Triax connector wsPROD level control wdTRACKER level control wfLEVEL/MIC switch 7VTR connector qgEARPHONE jack 8REMOTE connector qfTRACKER connector qdRET CONT connector qsTEST OUT connector 9DC IN connector q;PROMPTER/GEN LOCK 6INCOM 1/2 connectors
qhCALL button
qaAUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2 connectors and LINE/MIC switch and external power supply mode switch mode switch for the microphone
qjPOWER switch
qkDC OUT connector
a RET1 (return video 1) button/RET (return video) button and RET 2/3/4 switch RET1 (return video 1) button Press this button to monitor the return video1 signal from the CCU in the viewfinder or on a monitor using the TEST OUT signal . RET (return video) button Press this button to monitor the return video signal from the CCU in the viewfinder. Select the monitored signal with the RET 2/3/4 switch.
RET 2/3/4 switch Selects the return video signal displayed in the viewfinder while the RET button is pressed. b TALLY lamp and TALLY switch If the TALLY switch is ON, the TALLY lamp illuminates when a red tally signal or call signal is input to the CCU. Turning S200-1 on the AU-251 board to ON mixes and outputs the battery alarm signal to the TALLY lamp.
61
c PGM (programme) level controls (for the CA-570) Adjusts the audio volume of the programme. Note PGM level controls are provided for both intercom 1 and 2. d INCOM (intercom) level controls, PROD/ENG (producer/ engineer) switches, and LEVEL MIC (intercom level/microphone) switches (for the CA-570 . For CA-950P, see later section) INCOM (intercom) level controls Adjusts the audio volume of the intercom. PROD/ENG (producer/engineer) switches Switches the intercom line. PROD: Selects the producers line ENG: Selects the engineers line LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/microphone) switches The LEVEL and MIC switch settings specify the following functions: REAR/ON: Turns on the intercom microphone. Adjust the intercom reception level with the INCOM control. REAR/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on the external equipment connected to the RET CONT connector. Adjust the intercom reception level with the INCOM control. FRONT/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on the external equipment connected to the RET CONT connector. Use the control on the camcorder to adjust the intercom reception level. Note INCOM level controls and LEVEL/MIC switches and PROD/ENG switches are provided for both intercom 1 and 2. e Triax connector Connects a CCU-700A/700AP or CCU-550/550P Series Camera Control Unit through a triax cable. f INCOM (intercom) 1/2 connectors Connects headphones to enable the reception of programme/intercom audio and transmission of intercom audio. Set the MIC switch on the AU-237 board to "CM" when using a headset with carbon-type microphone, and set it to "DYN" when using a dynamic microphone. The INCOM 1 connector can be used for communications even though the power to the camera is turned off on the CCU-700A/700AP or CCU-550/ 550P. g VTR connector (26-pin) Provides inputs and outputs of video signals, audio signals, control signals, and the power supply. Connects with the CAMERA connector on a VTR or AC adaptor. Note The VTR connector cannot be used when a CCU is connected. h REMOTE connector (8-pin) Allows connection of an RCP-700 Series or RM-B150/ 750 Remote Control Unit. The length of the connecting cable should not exceed 150 feet (50 metres). Note The REMOTE connector cannot be used when a CCU is connected. When connecting the RM-B150/750, use the cable supplied with the panel. i DC IN (direct current input) connector (4-pin) Connects 12 volts DC supply from an AC adapter or battery case. Supplies power to the CA-570/570P when the POWER switch is set to EXT.
j PROMPTER/GEN LOCK (prompter signal and external sync signal input) connector (BNC type) Multi purpose connector. Provides an external sync signal input or prompter video signal output, or a reverse prompter input. Select the respective function with the PROMPTER/GENLOCK switch on the internal MD-119 board. The connector is factory set for PROMPT. k AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2 (audio input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin) and LINE/MIC (line input/ microphone) switch Accepts external audio signals. Set the LINE/MIC switch according to the input signal level. The following phantom power supply settings can be specified for the external microphone: +12V phantom power is supplied to the external microphone (when the S800 switch on the AU-251 board is set to ON). OFF: No power is supplied to the external microphone. +48V: +48V phantom power is supplied to the external microphone. (when the S700 switch on the AU-251 board is set to ON). Note: care should be taken that phantom power should only be used with suitable microphones. Incorrect settings could result in damage to the microphone l TEST OUT (test video output) connector (BNC type) Outputs return video signals, playback video signals, VBS signal, or monitor output signals. Normally outputs return video signals when a CCU is connected, and playback video signals when a VTR is connected. Note Select the output signal with switch S100 on the AU251 board. m RET CONT (return control) connector (6-pin) Accepts the control signal for selecting the return video and for remotely turning the intercom microphone on and off. n TRACKER connector (10-pin) Use for communications with a tracker, crane operator or other external location. Provdes a private communications channel as well as intercom 1 and 2 communications. Also outputs12 volts DC, Red and Green tally and programme audio signals. The maximam output current output from this connector is 500 mA. o EARPHONE jack (mini-jack) Connects an earphone for monitoring the audio from the VTR, the intercom, or the programme. Select the audio source with the switch S1 on the MB-783 board. p CALL button Use this button to call the CCU or MSU operator. When this button is pressed, the red tally lamps in the viewfinder and on the camera control unit (CCU) or master setup unit (MSU) light up. q POWER switch Selects the power supply. 1 CCU: Power is supplied from the CCU. a (standby): Standby mode \EXT: Power is supplied from the VTR or EXT DC IN connector.
62
r DC OUT (direct current output) connector (4-pin) Outputs a direct DC voltage of 10.5 V to 17 V at a maximum rated current output of 500 mA, for use with radio microphone receivers and similar equipment. Connecting equipment with a power consumption greater than the maximum rating will activate the protection circuit, cutting off the current flow. s PGM (programme) level control (for the CA570P) Adjusts the volume of the programme audio. t ENG (engineer) level control (for the CA-570P)* Adjusts the volume of the engineering talkback.
*Only when used with CCU-700AP. The CCU-550DP has simplified intercom facilities, and provides only a single switched intercom channel. The volume is controlled by the PROD volume control, and selection of Production or Engineering talkbsck is made using the Mic Line Switch (21)
u MIC LINE switch (for the CA-570P) PROD: Enables intercom microphone and routes talkback to Production. OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. ENG: Enables intercom microphone and routes talkback to Engineering. v PROD (engineer) level control (for the CA-570P)* Adjusts the volume of the production talkback. w RACKER (engineer) level control (for the CA-570P) Adjusts the audio volume of the tracker. x LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/microphone) switch (for the CA-570P) The LEVEL and MIC switch settings specify the following functions: REAR/ON: Turns on the intercom microphone. Adjust the intercom reception level with the PGM level control, ENG level control, PROD level control, or TRACKER level control. REAR/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on the external equipment connected to the RET CONT connector. Adjust the intercom reception level with the PGM level control, ENG level control, PROD level control, or TRAKER level control. FRONT/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on the external equipment connected to the RET CONT connector. Use the control on the camcorder to adjust the intercom reception level.
63

CA-950P 1 PGM 1/PGM 2 switch 2 RET 1 button/RET button and RET 2/3/4 switch CA-950 1 PGM 1/PGM 2 switch 2 RET 1 button/RET button and RET 2/3/4 switch 3 TALLY lamp and TALLY switch wa ENG level control ws PGM level control 4 PGM level controls
wd MIC LINE switch wf PROD level control wg TRACKER level control wh LEVEL switch
5 NCOM level controls, PROD/ENG switches, and LEVEL/MIC switches 6 CCU connector 7 INCOM 1/INCOM 2 connectors
qg EARPHONE jack qf TRACKER connector qd RET CONT connector qs TEST OUT connector 8 REMOTE connector
9 DC IN connector
q; PROMPTER/GEN LOCK onnector
qa AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2 connectors and LINE/MIC switch/ External Mic/Power Supply mode switch
qh CALL button
qk SERIAL IN connector ql SERIAL OUT connector
qj POWER switch
w; DC OUT connector
a PGM 1 (programme 1)/PGM 2 (programme 2) switch Switches programme audio 1 and 2.
b RET 1 (return video 1) button/RET (return video) button and RET 2/3/4 switch RET 1 (return video 1) button Press this button to monitor the return video 1 signal from the CCU in the viewfinder or on a monitor using the TEST OUT signal.
64
RET (return video) button Press this button to monitor the return video signal from the CCU in the viewfinder. Select the monitored signal with the RET 2/3/4 switch. RET 2/3/4 switch Selects the return video signal monitored in the viewfinder while the RET button is pressed. c TALLY lamp and TALLY switch If the TALLY switch is ON, the TALLY lamp illuminates when a red tally signal or call signal is input to the CCU. Turning S1 on the IF-633 board to ON mixes and outputs the battery alarm signal to the TALLY lamp. d PGM (programme) level controls (for the CA-950) Adjusts the audio volume of the programme. Note PGM level controls are provided for both intercom 1 and 2. e INCOM (intercom) level controls, PROD/ENG (producer/ engineer) switches, and LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/ microphone) switches (for the CA-950. For CA-950P, see later section) INCOM (intercom) level controls Adjusts the audio volume of the intercom. PROD/ENG (producer/engineer) switches Switches the intercom line. PROD: Selects the producer's line ENG: Selects the engineer's line LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/microphone) switches The LEVEL and MIC switch settings specify the following functions: REAR/ON: Turns on the intercom microphone. Adjust the intercom reception level with the INCOM control. REAR/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on the external equipment connected to the RET CONT connector. Adjust the intercom reception level with the INCOM control. FRONT/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on the external equipment connected to the RET CONT connector. The intercom reception level is adjusted with the control on the camcorder. Note INCOM level controls and LEVEL/MIC switches and PROD/ENG switches are provided for both intercom 1 and 2. f CCU connector Connect a CCU-900/900P-series Camera Control Unit through an optical fibre cable. Note A dual camera system or a stand-alone operation is not activated when an optical fibre is connected to this connector. g INCOM 1 (intercom 1)/INCOM 2 (intercom 2) connectors Connect a headset to enable the reception of programme/ intercom audio and transmission of intercom audio. Set the INCOM 1, INCOM 2 switches on the AU-237 board to "CM" when using a headset with carbon-type microphone, and set it to "DYM" when using a dynamic-type microphone. The INCOM 1 connector can be used for communications even though the power to the camera is turned off on the CCU-900/900P. h REMOTE connector (8-pin) Allows connection of an RCP-700 Series or RM-B150/ B750 Remote Control Unit for stand-alone operation.
The length of the connecting cable should not exceed 150 feet (50 metres). Also used for connecting the remote cable of a CA-905L/F. Note Do not connect an RCP-700 Series panel or an RMB150/70 when a CCU is connected. When connecting the RM-B150/750, use the cable supplied with the panel. i DC IN (direct current input) connector (4-pin) Connects 12 volts DC supply from an AC adapter or battery case. Supplies power to the CA-950/950P when the POWER switch is set to EXT j PROMPTER/GEN LOCK (prompter signal and external sync signal input) connector (BNC type) Multi purpose connector provides an external sync signal input, or prompter video signal output, or a reverse prompter input. Select the respective function with the PROMPTER/GENLOCK switch on the internal DPR board. The connector is factory set for prompter video signal output. k AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2 (audio input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin) and LINE/MIC (line input/microphone) switch Accepts external audio signals. Set the LINE/MIC switch according to the input signal level. The following phantom power settings can be specified for the external microphone: OFF: No power is supplied to the external microphone. +48V: +48V phantom power is supplied to the external microphone. l TEST OUT (test video output) connector (BNC type) Outputs return video signals, playback video signals, VBS signal, or monitor output signals. Normally outputs monitor output signals when a CCU is connected. Note Select the output signal with switch S1 on the IFF-633 board.
m RET CONT (return control) connector (6-pin) Inputs the control signal for selecting the return video and for remotely turning the intercom microphone on and off. n TRACKER connector (10-pin) Use for communications with a tracker, crane operator or other external location. Provides a private communications channel as well as intercom 1 and 2 communications. Also outputs 12 volts DC, the red and green tally signals and programme audio signals. The maximum output current output from this connector is 1 A. RS-232C input and output signals are also available to provide bi-directional data transmission between camera and CCU at up to 9600 bps with the CCU- 900/900P Camera Control Unit. o EARPHONE jack (mini-jack) Connects an earphone for monitoring the audio from the programme. p CALL button Use this button to call the CCU or MSU operator. When this button is pressed, the red tally lamps on the camera control unit (CCU) or master setup unit (MSU) light up.
65
q POWER switch Selects the power supply. 1CCU: Power is supplied from the CCU. The indicator illuminates green. a(standby): Standby mode. The indicator illuminates red. \EXT: Power is supplied from EXT DC IN connector. The indicator illuminates green. The indicator blinks red when the internal temperature of this unit becomes abnormally high. The indicator blinks slowly green when the optical signal that reaches the cable adapter through the optical fibre cable is low (-17 to -20 dBm), and blinks rapidly green when the optical signal is very low (less than -20 dBm). r SERIAL IN (serial digital video signal input) connector (BNC type) Accepts a component serial digital signal synchronized with the camera system, this signal is transmitted to the AUX OUT connector of the CCU through the optical fibre cable. In the case of dual camera link system, connect this connector with the SERIAL OUT connector of the secondary CA-950/ 950P.
For setting of dual camera link, refer to the installation manual supplied with the CCU-900/900P.
When using the camera stand alone, leave this connector unconnected. s SERIAL OUT (serial digital video signal output) connector (BNC type) Outputs a component serial digital signal input to the AUX IN connector of the CCU. In the case of dual camera link, connect to the SERIAL IN connector of the secondary CA-950/950P. When using the camera as stand alone, camera image signal is output from this connector. t DC OUT (direct current output) connector (4-pin) Output DC voltage of 10.5 V to 17 V at a maximum rated current output of 500 mA, for use with radio microphone receivers and similar equipment. Connecting equipment with a power consumption greater than the maximum rating will activate the protection circuit, cutting off the current flow. u PGM (programme) level control (for the CA-950P) Adjusts the audio volume of the programme audio. v ENG (engineer) level control (for the CA-950P) Adjusts the audio volume of the engineering talkback. w MIC LINE switch (for the CA-950P) PRODEnables intercom microphone and routes talkback to Production OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. ENG: Enables intercom microphone and routes talkback to Engineering. x PROD (producer) level control (for the CA-950P) Adjusts the volume of the production talkback. y RACKER level control (for the CA-950P) Adjusts the volume of the tracker. z LEVEL (intercom level) switch (for the CA-950P) REAR: Adjust the intercom reception level with the PGM level control, ENG level control, PROD level control, or TRACKER level control. FRONT: Use the control on the camera to adjust the intercom reception level.
66
7-4. CCU-550D/ 550DP, Camera Control Unit

7-4-1 Front Panel
1Camera number/tally indicator 2POWER switch/CAM and MAIN indicators 3CABLE ALARM indicators
POWER
CAM MAIN ?
CABLE ALARM
OPEN SHORT
INCOM
MIC ON OFF PGM
PROD PREV PGM
4INCOM input/output/setting section
a Camera number /tally indicator Illuminates red when the red tally signal is input (e.g. when the video signal from the video camera connected to the CCU-550D/550DPCCU-550D/550DP goes on air). When the CALL button on the video camera, MSU-700A/750, RCP-700 Series remote control panel, or an optional BKP-5973 is pressed, he indicator lights if it is not lit, and goes off if it is lit. the indicator lights green when the green tally signal is input. Attach the appropriate number from the supplied number sheet here to indicate the camera number. b POWER switch/CAM (camera) and MAIN indicators The POWER switch turns on or off the power supply to the entire camera system, including the CCU-550D/ 550DPCCU-550D/550DP, the video camera, and the remote control unit connected to the REMOTE connector on the CCU-550D/550DPCCU-550D/ 550DP. The MAIN and CAM indicators light when the POWER switch is turned on. The CAM indicator goes off when the power is turned off by the CAM PW button on the remote control panel or the master setup unit, or CAM POWER switch on the internal AT board. Note If the fan in the CCU-550D/550DP stops, the MAIN and the CAM indicators will flash simultaneously to warn you of the abnormal condition. If this occurs, turn the POWER switch off immediately and contact Sony service personnel. c CABLE ALARM indicators OPEN: Illuminates when no triax cable is connected to the CAMERA connector on the rear panel of the CCU-550D/550DP, or when the load current is extremely low even when a camera cable is connected. SHORT: Illuminates when there is a current overflow in the triax cable.
d INCOM (intercom) input/output/setting section INCOM (intercom) connector (XLR, 5-pin) Connects a headset. When you wish to use a headset with a plug other than XLR 5-pin type, consult Sony service personnel. INCOM level control Adjusts the volume level of the intercom. MIC/PGM (programme audio) switch ON: Turns on the headset microphone. OFF: Turns off the headset microphone. PGM: Outputs the programme audio. When this position is selected, the INCOM level control adjusts input level of the programme audio. INCOM selector Selects the pathway of intercom signals output/input through the INCOM/TALLY/PGM connector. PROD: Producer line. PRIV: Producer line and engineer line are cut off and communication is possible only between the CCU-550D/550DP and the camera connected to the rear panel of the CCU-550D/550DP. ENG: Engineer line.
67
7-4-2 Rear Panel

1CAMERA connector 2MIC OUTPUT connectors 4OUTPUT connectors 3INPUT connectors 5SERIAL OUTPUT connectors
INPUT CAMERA
REFERENCE Y/G
OUTPUT
VBS3 VBS1
SERIAL OUTPUT
RET 1 R-Y/R WF VBS2
MIC OUTPUT
CH-1 CH-2
RET 2
B-Y/B
WF MODE
PROMPTER/RET 3
PIX
COAX
RCP/CNU
q;AC IN connecto
MIC REMOTE
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
REMOTE
9COAX connector 8RCP/CNU REMOTE connector 7INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector 6MIC REMOTE connector
a CAMERA connector (triax connector) Connects to the CA-570/ 570P/ 905K/ 905F Camera Adaptor attached to the BVP-E10 Series Color Video Camera using a triax cable. Note Do NOT use a defective triax cable. The inner sheath of a triax cable is used for power supply and the outer sheath for safety ground. For your safety, do NOT use a triax cable whose inner and outer sheaths are shortcircuited. Use of such a cable may cause electric shock. b MIC (microphone) OUTPUT connectors (XLR, 3pin) Supply the microphone signals from the video camera. c INPUT connectors REFERENCE INPUT connectors (BNC type) Accept reference signals (black burst signal) for external synchronization. RET 1/RET 2 (return video signal 1/2) connectors (BNC type) Accept return video signals from two different sources. PROMPTER/RET 3 (return video signal 3) connectors (BNC type) Accept a teleprompter signal or a return video signal. Use the switch on the internal DM board to select PROMPTER or RET 3. d OUTPUT connectors Y/G, Cr/R, Cb/B (component video signal /RGB output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the analogue component signals or the R, G, and B signals for a video switcher, VTR or chroma keyer from each connector. Use the switch on the internal VA board to select the signals to be output. VBS1/2/3 (composite video signal 1/2/3 output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the signal from the video camera in composite format. Use the switch on the internal VA board to select the composite video signal or sync signal. When 68 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
the sync signal (0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms) is selected, connect the VBS 3 connector to the sync signal input connector on a waveform or picture monitor. WF (waveform monitor output) connector (BNC type) Supplies a video signal to a waveform monitor. The WAVEFORM MONITOR button on the optional MSU700A/ 750 Master Setup Unit, MONITOR SELECT function on the RCP-750/751 Remote Control Panel, or MONITOR SELECT control on the BKP- 5973 CCU Control Panel selects the signal output from the WF connector. WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (4-pin) Connects to the corresponding connector on a waveform monitor to allow the sequential monitoring of signals. PIX (picture monitor output) connector (BNC type) Supplies a video signal or video and character signals together to a picture monitor. Use the PICTURE MONITOR button on the MSU-700A/ 750, MONITOR SELECT function on the RCP-750/751, or MONITOR SELECT control on the BKP-5973 to select the signal output from the PIX connector. e SERIAL OUTPUT (serial digital video/audio output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the video/microphone signals from the video camera in serial digital format. CCU-550D/ 550DPConnect to a digital video switcher or component digital VTR. f MIC REMOTE (microphone remote control) connector (D-sub, 15-pin) Connects to an external control unit such as an audio mixer. With the connected unit, you can set the microphone input level of the video camera to -60, -50, -40, -30, or -20 dB. You can also set the microphone input level with a switch on the internal AT board.
g INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (programme audio) connector (D-sub, 25-pin) Inputs/outputs intercom, tally, and programme audio signals. Connects to an intercom, tally, or programme audio connector of an intercom system. h RCP/CNU REMOTE (remote control panel/ camera command network remote) connector (8-pin) Connects to the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit, CNU-700/500 Camera Command Network Unit, RCP700 Series Remote Control Panel or RM-B150/750 Remote Control Unit with an optional CCA-5 connecting cable to transmit/receive control signals. When the remote control panel or the remote control unit is connected, power is supplied to the remote control panel or the remote control unit through this connector. i COAX (coaxial) connector (BNC type) Accepts camera connection through a conventional coax cable instead of triax according to the setting of a switch on the internal DM board. Power is not supplied to the camera through this connector. j AC IN (AC power input) connector Connects to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. Secure the power cord to the CCU550D/550DP using the supplied plug holder.
69
7-5. CCU-700A/ 700AP, Camera Control Unit

7-5-1 Front Panel
2Green tally lamp 1Red tally lamp 3MIC switch 4INTERCOM control
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
1
MAIN POWER I I
1
MIC
DYNAMIC OFF CARBON
CABLE ALARM SHORT OPEN
CAMERA POWER
INTERCOM
8CABLE ALARM indicator 7MAIN POWER switch and indicator
5INTERCOM connector 6CAMERA POWER switch and indicator
a Red tally lamp Illuminates when the unit receives a red tally signal. When the CALL button on the video camera, MSU700A Master Setup Unit, or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is pressed, the lamp lights if it is not lit, or goes dark if it is lit. Attach a supplied number plate here. b Green tally lamp Illuminates when the unit receives a green tally signal. Attach a supplied number plate here. c MIC (microphone select) switch Set to the appropriate position according to the type of the headset microphone. DYNAMIC: To use a dynamic microphone OFF: To cut off a microphone signal CARBON: To use a carbon (or carbon equivalent) microphone. The intercom line can be switched with the corresponding switch on the internal AT board. d INTERCOM (intercom volume) control Adjusts the receiving level of the intercom. The volume of the sound mixed with programme audio is set with the control on the internal AT board. e INTERCOM connector (XLR 5-pin) Connect a headset. When you wish to use a headset with a plug other than XLR 5-pin type, consult an authorized Sony representative. f CAMERA POWER switch and indicator This switch controls the power supply to the video camera when the MAIN POWER switch is set to the ON side (I position). The indicator illuminates when power is supplied to the video camera. If an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is connected to this unit, the CAM PW switch on the panel must be lit for control of the power supply to the camera with this switch to be enabled. g MAIN POWER switch and indicator This switch turns on and off the power supply to the entire camera system including this unit, a BVP-700/ 750/500/550-series Color Video Camera, and an RCP700 Series Remote Control Panel connected to the REMOTE connector. The indicator illuminates when power is supplied to the system. 70 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
h CABLE ALARM indicator SHORT: Illuminates when there is a current overload in the triax cable or when there is a shortcircuit in the unit. OPEN: Illuminates when no triax cable is connected to the CAMERA connector on the rear panel, when there is a faulty connection, or when load current is extremely low even if a camera cable is connected.
7-5-2 Rear Panel

ANALOG INPUT block 5PROMPTER connectors 4REFERENCE connectors 3RET1 through RET4 connectors 2MIC OUTPUT connectors 1CAMERA connector
CAMERA
CH-1
ANALOG OUTPUT block 6R, G, and B connectors 7Y, Cr, and Cb connectors 8CHARACTER connector 9WF1 and WF2 connectors q;PIX1 and PIX2 connectors qaVBS1, VBS2, and VBS3 connectors qsSYNC connector
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET 1
INPUT
REFERENCE R Y
OUTPUT
WF1 VBS1 WF MODE
CCU-700P
RET 2
PROMPTER
R-Y
PIX1
VBS2
RTS
RET 3 R B-Y WF2 VBS3
REMOTE
RCP/CNU
110-120V
RET 4 CHARACTER PIX2 SYNC AUX
220-240V
REMOTE
MIC
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM COAX DIGITAL VIDEO

RET 1 RET 2 1 2 3
AC IN
INTERCOM
110-120V
wgVoltage selector qdAC IN connector qfWF MODE connector qgRCP/CNU REMOTE connector qhAUX REMOTE connector
SERIAL INPUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
wfMIC REMOTE connector wdINTERCOM REMOTE connector wsRTS connectors waINTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector w;COAX connector qlSpare connectors
DIGITAL VIDEO block qjSERIAL OUTPUT 1, 2, and 3 connectors qkSERIAL INPUT RET 1 and RET 2 connectors
a CAMERA connector (triax connector) Connect a BVP-E10-series Color Video Camera using a triax cable. All of the signals of the BVP-E10-series, such as the power, control, video, and audio, can be connected using a single triax cable. Various triax connector types are supported; please contact your local Sony office for details
Do NOT use a defective triax cable. The inner sheath of a triax cable is used for power supply and the outer sheath for safety ground. For your safety, do NOT use a triax cable whose inner and outer sheaths are short-circuited. Use of such a cable may cause electric shock.
g Y, Cr, and Cb (component video signal output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the analogue Y, Cr, and Cb signals from each connector. Connect a VTR or a video switcher conforming to analogue component video signals. h CHARACTER (character signal output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the self-diagnostic results of this unit as a video signal. i WF1 and WF2 (waveform monitor 1 and 2 output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the video signals for a waveform monitor. The MONITOR SELECT function on an RCP-750/751unit select the signal output from the WF 1 connector, and the WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons on the MSU-700A/ 750 select the signal output from the WF 2 connector. j PIX1 and PIX2 (picture monitor 1 and 2 output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the video signals for a picture monitor. The MONITOR SELECT function on an RCP-750/751 unit select the signal output from the PIX 1 connector, and the PICTURE MONITOR buttons on the MSU-700A/750 select the signal output from the PIX 2 connector. k VBS1, VBS2, and VBS3 (composite video signal 1, 2, and 3 output) connectors (BNC type) Supply composite video signals (VBS) from the video camera. l SYNC (sync signal output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the sync signals (0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms) generated by the built-in sync signal generator. Connect to the sync signal input connector of a waveform monitor or picture monitor. m AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CCU700A/700AP using the supplied plug holder.
b MIC OUTPUT (microphone output) connectors (XLR 3-pin) Supply the microphone signals from the video camera. c RET1 through RET4 (return video 1 through 4 input) connectors (BNC type) Accept the analogue return video signals from four different sources. To select the appropriate return signals use the RET1/RET buttons and RET2/3/4 switch on the CA-570/P. Note When an optional BKP-7312 SDI input board is installed, nothing should be connected to the RET 1 and RET 2 connectors in the ANALOGUE INPUT block. d REFERENCE (reference signal input) connectors (BNC type) Accept a reference signal such as a black burst signal for external synchronization. e PROMPTER (prompter signal input) connectors (BNC type) Accept the signals for a teleprompter. f R, G, and B (R, G, and B signal output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the analogue R, G, and B signals for the video switcher, chroma keyer, or other destination from each connector.
71
n WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (4-pin) Connect to the corresponding connector of a waveform monitor to monitor signals in sequential mode. A sequential control signal is output from this connector when you press the SEQ button on an RCP700 Series unit, which enables simultaneous monitoring of the R, G, and B signals. o RCP/CNU REMOTE (remote control panel/ camera command network unit remote control) connector (8-pin) Connect an MSU-700A, MSU-750, CNU-700, or RCP700 Series unit using a CCA-5 cable. Control signals are then accepted. When an RCP-700 Series unit is connected, the power is also supplied to the unit. p AUX (auxiliary) REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connect an external system. For details on connections, refer to the authorized Sony representative. Note If you connect an RCP-700 Series unit to the RCP/ CNU REMOTE connector, this connector cannot supply power to the connected equipment. q SERIAL OUTPUT 1, 2, and 3 (serial digital video signal 1, 2, and 3 output) connectors (BNC type) Signals sent from the video camera are converted into serial digital video signals and are supplied from these connectors. These connectors function when an optional BKP-7311 SDI output board is installed in the CCU-700A/700AP. Connect these connectors to the input connectors of a digital video switcher, component digital VTR, etc. r SERIAL INPUT RET 1 and RET 2 (serial digital return video signal 1 and 2 input) connectors (BNC type) These connectors accept a 10-bit 4:2:2 component serial digital video signals as return video signals. They function when an optional BKP-7312 SDI input board is installed in the CCU-700A/ 700AP, and function as return video 1 and 2 input connectors. When the BKP-7312 is installed, nothing should be connected to the RET 1 and RET 2 connectors in the ANALOGUE INPUT block. s Spare connectors (BNC type) t COAX (coaxial) connector (BNC type) Accepts camera connection through a conventional coax cable instead of triax by setting a switch on the internal DM board. The unit cannot supply power to the video camera through this connector. When a return video function is used, the maximum cable length of a 5C-2V (RG-6A/U) coaxial cable is 800 m (2,624 feet). u INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (programme audio) connector (19-pin) Supplies and accepts intercom, tally, and programme audio signals. Connect to the corresponding connector on the intercom system. v RTS (RTS intercom) connectors (XLR 3-pin) Connect an RTS intercom system. w INTERCOM REMOTE connector (D-sub 25-pin) Connect an external controller to control intercom muting, producer-line interruption, and engineer line interruption. This connector outputs the red tally, green tally, tally and call signals, and camera number.
x MIC REMOTE (microphone remote control) connector (D-sub 15-pin) Connect an external control unit such as an audio mixer. You can set the microphone input level of the video camera to -60, -50, -40, -30, or -20 dB with the connected unit. Set the microphone volume to the level suitable for shooting conditions. You can also set the microphone input level with the switch on the internal board of this unit. This connector outputs the red tally, and green tally signals. y Voltage selector (only for the CCU-700AP) The operating voltage of the CCU-700AP is set to 220 to 240 V AC at the factory. If the voltage of your local power line is different, change the setting of the voltage selector.
72
7-6. CCU-900/ 900P, Camera Control Unit

7-6-1 Front Panel
1Red tally lamp 2Green tally lamp 3MIC switch 4INTERCOM control
8INTERCOM connector 7CAMERA POWER switch and indicator 6MAIN POWER switch and indicator 5CABLE ALARM indicator
a Red tally lamp Illuminates when a red tally signal is received. When the CALL button on the video camera, Master Setup Unit MSU-700A/750, RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel, etc. is pressed, this lamp will go out if previously lit, and light up if previously off. A supplied number plate can be mounted here. b Green tally lamp Illuminates when a green tally signal is received. A supplied number plate can be mounted here. c MIC (microphone selection) switch Used to select the type of headset microphone being used, or to turn microphone input off. DYNAMIC: for a dynamic microphone OFF: turns microphone input off CARBON: for a carbon or carbon equivalent microphone d INTERCOM (intercom volume adjustment) control Adjusts the intercom input level. e CABLE ALARM indicator SHORT: This indicator illuminates when there is a short circuit between a power supply line and the sheath of the optical-fibre cable, or when the two power supply lines are shorted. When this indicator illuminates, the power supply is shut off. (If the optical-fibre cable is long, this indicator may light for a few seconds after the main power is turned on until the short-circuit detection circuitry begins operating normally. This is not a malfunction.) OPEN: Illuminates when there is no camera connected via an optical-fibre cable to the CAMERA connector on the rear panel. The indicator blinks slowly when the optical signal level is in WARNING status, and blinks fast when it is in CARE status.
f MAIN POWER switch and indicator Turns the power on or off for the entire system, consisting of the CCU-900/900P, a video camera, an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel connected via the REMOTE connector, etc. Setting the switch to the position turns the power on, and setting it to turns it off. The indicator is lit when the power supply is on. g CAMERA POWER switch and indicator Turns on/off the power to the camera head when the MAIN POWER switch is on. Setting the switch to the position turns the power on, and setting it to turns it off. When a remote control panel is connected, the power supply can be turned off with the CAM PW button on the remote control panel, but only when the switch on the CCU is in the "on" position h INTERCOM connector (XLR 5-pin) For connecting a headset. To use a headset with a plug other than an XLR 5-pin plug, consult a Sony service representative.
73
7-6-2 Rear Panel

1CAMERA connector 2SDI signal input/output connectors
3Analogue signal input/output connectors BKP-9330(optional)
4AC IN connector
5Remote control connectors 6CHARACTER OUTPUT connector 7DIGITAL AUDIO connector 8AUDIO OUTPUT connectors 9INCOME REMOTE connector q;INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector
a CAMERA connector (optical-fibre connector) For connecting a video camera, using an optical-fibre cable such as the FC2-PD50/PD250. All video camera signals, including power supply, control, video, and audio, are sent and received with an optical-fibre cable. Note Dust on the connection surface of the optical-fibre cable may result in transmission errors. When not connected, always cover the end with the supplied cap. b SDI signal input/output connectors
1SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4 2AUX IN connector 3AUX OUT connector
1 2 3 4
IN
OUT
MONI
to use the AUX IN connector as an additional return viewfinder input AUX OUT (auxiliary output) connector (BNCtype) . For dual camera operation, the primary and secondary CCUs are connected using the AUX IN/OUT connectors mutually. REFERENCE IN (reference input) connectors (BNC-type) Used to input a reference signal (sync or VS signal) for an external sync operation. Terminate the unused connector with a 75-ohm terminator. SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3 connectors (BNC-type) The signal from the video camera is output as three SDI signals SERIAL OUTPUT MONI (SDI monitor output) connector (BNC-type) The signal from the video camera mixed with the character signal, skin-tone gate signal, and 4:3 marker signal is output as an SDI signal. Mixing is set to ON or OFF with the RCP-750/751 orMSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit.
Note
SERIAL RET INPUT AUX REFERENCE IN SERIAL OUTPUT
4REFERENCE IN connectors 5SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3 connectors 6SERIAL OUTPUT

MONI connector
c Analogue signal input/output connectors

1RET INPUT 1 to 4 connectors 2PROMPTER IN connectors 3PROMPTER OUT connector 4MONITOR OUT WF 1/ WF 2 connectors 5MONITOR OUT PIX 1/PIX 2 connectors 6SYNC OUT connector
1 2 3 4 IN OUT WF1 PIX1 WF2 PIX2
A SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4 (SDI return video 1, 2, 3, and 4 input) connectors (BNC-type) . Four independent SDI return video signals can be accepted. The selection of RET 1, 2, 3, or 4 is made using the return video switch on the camera. SDI and analogue return viewfinder inputs may be selected using the setup menu of the CCU-900/900P, or using the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit. SDI AUX and PROMPTER inputs may also be used as return viewfinder input signals B AUX IN (auxiliary input) connector (BNC-type) . For dual camera operation, the primary and secondary CCUs are connected using the AUX IN/OUT connectors mutually. It is also possible 74 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
RET INPUT
PROMPTER
MONITOR OUT
SYNC OUT
A RET INPUT 1 to 4 (return video 1, 2, 3, and 4 input) connectors (BNC-type) Four independent analogue return video signals can be accepted. The selection of RET 1, 2, 3, or 4 is made using the return video switch on the
camera. SDI and analogue return viewfinder inputs may be selected using the setup menu of the CCU-900/900P, or using the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit, SDI AUX and PROMPTER inputs may also be used as return viewfinder input signals PROMPTER IN connectors (BNC-type) Used for prompter signal input. Terminate the unused connector with a 75-ohm terminator. An analogue signal of 1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohms is output via the PROMPTER OUT connector of a video camera with a frequency bandwidth of 5 MHz, regardless of signal format. PROMPTER OUT connector (BNC-type) Outputs the signals that are input via the PROMPTER IN connectors of the CCU-900/ 900P. These are analogue signals of 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms. MONITOR OUT WF 1/WF 2 (waveform monitor output 1/2) connectors (BNC-type) Supplies an analogue video signal for the waveform monitor selected with the MONITOR SELECT function on the RCP-750/751 Remote Control Panel or the WF MONITOR button on the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit. MONITOR OUT PIX 1/PIX 2 (picture monitor output 1/2) connectors (BNC-type) Supplies an analogue video signal for a picture monitor selected with the MONITOR SELECT function on the RCP-750/751 Remote Control Panel, or the PICTURE MONITOR button on the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit. SYNC OUT (sync signal output) connector (BNC-type) Supplies a composite sync signal from the internal sync signal generator.
d AC IN (AC power supply input) connector Connect to an AC power supply using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord is fixed to the CCU-900/ 900P using the supplied plug holder. e Remote control connectors
1AUX 1/AUX 2 connectors 2MIC REMOTE connector 3WF MODE connector 4WF MODE connector 5RCP/CNU connector
audio conditions. Also outputs red and green tally signals. Note: The microphone input level can alternatively be set using switches on an internal board. WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (D-sub 15-pin) Used to connect a cable from the appropriate connector on a waveform monitor when operating the waveform monitor display using an MSU-700A/ 750 Master Setup Unit or RCP700 Series Remote Control Panel. When using a recall-type monitor, preset a display mode on the waveform monitor, and then recall the mode externally. WF MODE (waveform monitor mode output) connector (4-pin) Used to connect a cable from the appropriate connector on a waveform monitor when monitoring a signal in sequential mode. A sequence signal will be output when the SEQ button on the RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is pressed, allowing simultaneous monitoring of the R, G, and B signals in sequential mode. RCP/CNU connector (8-pin) Used to connect to an MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit, CNU-500/ 700 Camera Command Network Unit, or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel using a CCA-5 Connection Cable. Control signals are sent and received via this connector. When using an RCP-700 Series unit, power is also supplied. TRUNK LINE 1/TRUNK LINE 2 connectors (Dsub 9-pin, RS-232C) Used to connect the CCU-900/900P to the TRACKER connector (20-pin) on a CA-950/950P Camera Adaptor via an RS-232C interface. Allows bi-directional data communication with external equipment at the camera head. The RXD, TXD, RTS, and CTS signals can be transferred at up to 9600 bps using this connector. The TRUNK LINE 2 connector is provided for extension.
f CHARACTER OUTPUT (character signal output) connector (BNC-type) Used to output the results of the CCU-900/900P diagnostic self-test and menu display in black-and white analogue video format. g DIGITAL AUDIO (digital audio signal output) connector (BNC-type) Used to output a digital audio signal input to the camera, or for output of the microphone signal converted to an AES/EBU-format digital audio signal. h AUDIO OUTPUT (audio signal output) connectors (XLR 3-pin) Used to output the microphone signal or audio signal input to the video camera. i INCOME REMOTE (intercom remote) connector (D-sub 25-pin) Enables remote operation such as muting the intercom, break-in from the producer or from engineers by sending signals through this connector from external control equipments. Outputs red tally signal, green tally signal, tally call signal, and camera number signal.
AUX 1
WF MODE
TRUNK LINE 1
AUX 2
MIC REMOTE
RCP/CNU
TRUNK LINE 2
6TRUNK LINE 1/TRUNK LINE 2 connectors
A AUX 1/AUX 2 (auxiliary 1/auxiliary 2) connectors (D-sub 9-pin, RS-422) Used to connect the CCU-900/900P and external equipment via an RS-422 interface. B MIC REMOTE (microphone remote) connector (D-sub 15-pin) Using this connector, the video camera's microphone input level may be set from external equipment such as an audio mixer in five steps (-60, -50, -40, -30, and -20 dB). When recording, set the volume to an appropriate level for the
75
j INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (programme) connector (D-sub 25-pin) Used for input and output of intercom, tally, and programme audio signals. Connect the cable from the
intercom/tally/programme connector of the intercom system.
7-7. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit

7-7-1 Front and Rear Panels
1 POWER switch and indicator
CAMERACOMMAND NETWORK UNIT
POWER
Front panel
4 MSU connector 3 RCP 1 through 6 connectors 2 CCU 1 through 6 connectors

1 2 3 CCU 4 5 6 1 2 3 RCP 4 5 6 MSU VCS
5 VCS connector 6 AUX1 and AUX2 connectors

AUX1 AUX2
Rear panel
CCU
10
11
12
10
11
12
MSC
VCS
AUX3
AUX4 ~AC IN
qa Optional board insertion section q; -AC IN connector 9 RS-232C 1 through 3 connectors 8 REFERENCE connectors 7 CHARACTER 1 and 2 connectors
a POWER switch and indicator Press to turn the power ON or OFF. The indicator illuminates when power is switched on. b CCU (camera control unit) 1 through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU REMOTE connector on a CCU-700A/700AP/550D/550DP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5 cable. c RCP (remote control panel) 1 through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connectors on an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel using a CCA-5 cable. d MSU (Master Set-up Unit) connector (8-pin) Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connector on an MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable. e VCS (video selector) connector (8-pin) Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700 Video Selector using a CCA-5 cable.
f AUX1 and AUX2 (auxiliary 1 and 2) connectors (8-pin) Connect to the AUX1 or AUX2 connector of another CNU-700 using a CCA-5 cable when controlling multiple cameras with two or more CNU-700 units. You can connect up to eight CNU-700 units. g CHARACTER 1and 2 connectors (BNC type) Supply character data as a 525 or 625-line, black-andwhite video signal. The signal output is automatically selected according to the reference signal input to the REFERENCE connector. If no reference signal is input, the CNU-700 for the USA and Canada supplies a 525line video signal, the CNU-700 for other countries supplies a 625-line video signal. You can select whether to add a sync signal to the output signal with switch S7 (SYNC ON/OFF) on the AT board. Refer to the system manual for details on the board switch settings. h REFERENCE (reference signal input) loop connectors (BNC type) Accepts a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal output from the CHARACTER connector is synchronized with the input signal.
76
i RS-232C 1 through 3 connectors (D-sub 9-pin) Used for RS-232C interfaces. The function of these connectors depends on whether or not an optional BKP-7930 System Expansion Board is installed in the CNU-700 as shown below.
j ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CNU700 using the supplied plug holder. k Optional board insertion section Used for attaching the connector panel of an optional BKP-7930/7933. When you attach the BKP-7930 to the CNU-700, up to 12 cameras and remote control panels can be controlled. BKP-7933 enables the S-bus functionality.
Connector No. 1 2 3
No BKP-7930 installed
With BKP-7930 installed
Reserved for ISR system Reserved for RS-232C interface Not used Reserved for RS-232C system

Front panel 1 POWER switch and indicator 2 CNU number indicator
POWER
CAMERA COMMAND NETWORK UNIT
Rear panel 4 MSU connector 3 CCU 1 through 6 connectors

CCU1 CCU2 CCU3 CCU4 CCU5 CCU6 MSU CHARACTER RS232C ~AC IN
5 CHARACTER connector 6 RS-232C connector
qa RCP 1 through 6 connectors q; VCS connector 9 AUX connctor
7 -AC IN connector 8 REFERENCE connectors
a POWER switch and indicator Press to turn the power ON or OFF. The indicator illuminates when power is switched on. b CNU number indicator Attach the number plate. c CCU (camera control unit) 1 through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU/ REMOTE connector of a CCU-700A/700AP/550D/550DP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5 cable. d MSU (Master Set-up Unit) connector (8-pin) Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connector on an MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable. e CHARACTER connector (BNC type) Supplies character data as a 525 or 625-line, blackand-white video signal. The signal output is automatically selected according to the reference signal input to the REFERENCE connector. If no signal is input to the REFERENCE connector, the CNU-500 for the USA and Canada supplies a 525-line video signal, and the CNU-500 for other countries supplies a 625-line video signal.
f RS-232C connector (D-sub 9-pin) Used for the RS-232C interface. This connector is reserved for the ISR system. g ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CNU500 using the supplied plug holder. h REFERENCE (reference signal input) connector (BNC type) Accept a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal output from the CHARACTER connector is synchronized with the input signal. i AUX (auxiliary) connector (8-pin) Not used. j VCS (video selector) connector (8-pin) Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700 Video Selector using a CCA-5 cable. k RCP (remote control panel) 1through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the CNU/CCU REMOTE connector on RCP700 Series Remote Control Panels using a CCA-5 cable. Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 77
7-8-2 Internal Board

OPERATION +5
NORMAL EMERGENCY
MODE
CHARACTER
SYNC
OFF ON
UP DOWN SET CANCEL PHUSE
1 +5 V indicator 2 OPERATION switch
3 MODE switch 4 UP/DOWN switch 5 SET/CANCEL switch
6 SYNC ON/OFF switch 7 CHARACTER PHASE control
a +5 V indicator Illuminates when +5 V power is supplied to the board. b OPERATION switch NORMAL: Set to this position for normal operation. EMERGENCY: Set to this position when the CNU500 or MSU-700 cannot function normally, to bypass the CNU. The RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panels are directly connected to their respective camera control units. The switch is set to NORMAL at the factory. c MODE switch 0: Factory setting 1: When the switch is set to this position, the UP/ DOWN switch is activated, and the switch changes the character page displayed on a monitor connected to the CHARACTER connector. 2 through F: Not used. d UP/DOWN switch Changes the page displayed on the monitor screen. This switch functions only when the MODE switch is set to 1. The contents of each page are shown in the following table. Page Contents Nothing appears when power is turned on. Shows a warning if a problem is detected by the self-diagnosis of the camera. Connection status of Cameras 1 through 6. Not used. Not used. Shows the results of auto set-up of Camera 1 through 6. Cannot be used. DIAGNOSIS OF ALL CAMERAS displays, which shows the results of the self-diagnosis of all the cameras. Not used. DIAGNOSIS OF ONE CAMERA display, which shows the results of the self-diagnosis of the selected camera. DATA OF ALL CAMERAS display, which shows the setting status of each camera. DATA OF ONE CAMERA display, which shows the setting status of the selected camera.
e SET/CANCEL switch Selects the displayed item or camera (CAM) when display page 9, 10 or 11 appears on the monitor screen. f SYNC ON/OFF switch Selects whether the sync signal is to be added to the video signal output from the CHARACTER connector. At the factory, the switch is set to ON (added). g CHARACTER PHASE control Adjusts the horizontal phase of the signal output from the CHARACTER connector, referring to the reference signal. Adjust the phase by monitoring the signal on the monitor screen.
78
7-9. VCS-700, Video Selector

1 POWER switch and indicator Front panel
POWER
VIDEO SELECTOR
4 PIX A INPUT connector 5 PIX A OUTPUT connector 3 CHARACTER INPUT connectors 2 PIX 1 through PIX 6 INPUT connectors Rear Panel 6 PIX B OUTPUT connector 7 SYNC OUT connector
8 WF 1 through WF 6 INPUT connectors 9 WF A INPUT connector q; WF A OUTPUT connector qa WF B OUTPUT connector
qg -AC IN connector qf I/O PORT connector qd REMOTE connector qs WF MODE connector
a POWER switch and indicator This switch turns the power ON and OFF. The indicator illuminates when power is switched on. b PIX1 through PIX6 INPUT (picture monitor 1 through 6 inputs) connectors (BNC type) Accept video signals for a picture monitor. Connect each of these connectors to the PIX2 OUTPUT connector on the CCU-700A/700AP/550D/550DP Camera Control Unit. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about 30 metres (99 feet) long can be compensated for with the switch on the internal board. For details, refer to the system manual. c CHARACTER INPUT connectors (BNC type) Accept character signals. The input signal is mixed with the signal output from the PIX OUTPUT connector. Connect to the CHARACTER connector on the CNU700 Camera Command Network Unit. When using two VCS-700 units, connect either of these connectors to the CHARACTER INPUT connector on a second VCS700. When a loop connection is not made, be sure to terminate with 75 ohms. d PIX A INPUT (picture monitor A input) connector (BNC type) Connect to the PIX A OUTPUT connector on a second VCS-700 when using two or more VCS-700 selectors. e PIX A OUTPUT (picture monitor A output) connector (BNC type) Supplies a video signal for a picture monitor. Select the output signal with the camera select buttons on an MSU-700A/750 or by command from the I/O PORT connector on the VCS-700 Video Selector. When using two or more VCS-700 units, connect this connector to the PIX A INPUT connector on each subsequent VCS700, and a picture monitor to the PIX A OUTPUT connector on the final VCS-700 in the series connection.
f PIX B OUTPUT (picture monitor B output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the same video signal for a picture monitor as the PIX A OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about 100 metres (330 feet) long can be compensated for with the switch on the internal board. When you connect a picture monitor using a long connecting cable, connect it to this connector. When using two or more VCS-700 units connected in series, connect a picture monitor to the PIX B OUTPUT loop connector on the VCS-700 whose PIX A OUTPUT connector is not used for series connection.
79
Figure 7-9-1-1: System to control up to 24 BVP-E10 Series cameras using multiple CNU-700s and VCS-700s
BVP-E10/E10P+CA-905 1
CCU-900/900P/ 700A/700AP/500D-/500DP
VCS-700 1
VCS-700 2
MSU-700A/750
qs BVP-E10/E10P qd BKP-7930
CNU-700
BKP-7930
CNU-700 Picture monitor
qf

Waveform monitor
qk VCS-700 3 VCS-700 4
ql
w;

wf
Control signal Video signal RCP-700-series unit
g SYNC OUT (sync signal output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the sync signal for a picture monitor. h WF1 through WF6 INPUT (waveform monitor 1 through 6 input) connectors (BNC type) Accept video signals for a waveform monitor. Connect these connectors as required to the WF2 OUTPUT connector on CCU-700A/700AP/550D/550DP Camera Control Units. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about 30 metres (99 feet) long can be compensated for with the switch on the internal board. For details, refer to the system manual. i WF A INPUT (waveform monitor A input) connector (BNC type) Connect to the WF A OUTPUT connector on a second VCS-700 when using two of these units. j WF A OUTPUT (waveform monitor A output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the video signal for a waveform monitor. Select the output signal with the camera select buttons on an MSU-700 or by command from the I/O PORT connector on a VCS-700. When using two or more VCS-700 units, connect this connector to the WF A INPUT connector on each subsequent VCS-700, and a waveform monitor to the WF A OUTPUT loop connector on the VCS-700 which is the last unit in the series connection. 80 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
k WF B OUTPUT (waveform monitor B output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the same video signal for a waveform monitor as the WF A OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to 100 metres (330 feet) long can be compensated for with the switch on the internal board. When you connect a waveform monitor using a long connecting cable, connect it to this connector. When using two or more VCS-700 units connected in series, connect a waveform monitor to the PIX B OUTPUT connector on the VCS-700 whose WF A OUTPUT loop connector is not used for series connection. For details on cable compensation, refer to the system manual. l WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (4-pin) Connect to a corresponding connector on a waveform monitor to view the signals in sequential mode. This connector supplies a staircase signal and sequential ON/OFF control signal. m REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connect a CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit using a CCA-5 cable. n I/O PORT (remote control) connector (D-sub 37pin) Accepts and supplies external control signals. You can select the signals output to a picture monitor and a waveform monitor with an external video selector
connected to this connector. The selected input connector number is supplied from this connector.
o ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the VCS700 using the supplied plug holder.
7-10.MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit

7-10-1Operation Panel
5 CLOSE button 4 Signal output select buttons 3 VF PW button 2 CAM PW button 1 ALL button 6 STANDARD button 7 AUTO SETUP block 8 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons 9 Scene file control block q; Menu operation block
AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL LEVEL AUTO HUE START/ BREAK WHITE
MODE
ALL
CAM PW
VF PW
TEST1
TEST2
BARS
CLOSE
STANDARD
BLACK
KNEE OFF
DETAIL LVLDEP GAMMA CHROMA MATRIX OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
KNEE KNEE APARTURE SAT
MONO COLOR COLOR CORRECT
MULTI
5600K
AUTO KNEE
SKIN DETAIL SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK GAMMA DETAIL GATE
CHARACTER
CARD
3
SCENE FILES
5
STORE
CONFIGURATION
MAINTENANCE
ECS
FILE
ON
ACCESS ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA MASTER GAIN
ENC
FILTER CTRL
3
ND
PAINT
PICTURE MONITOR
MASTER BLACK
IRIS EXT
SEQ
ENC
C
CC
E
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
WAVEFORM MONITOR PARA
AUTO
MULTI TALLY
PANEL ACTIVE
CALL
1
EXPAND
10
11
12
qa IC card insertion block qs PICTURE MONITOR buttons qd WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons qf Camera select block qg Filter control block
wa Iris control block w; Camera number/ tally indication window ql CALL button qk MASTER BLACK control block qj IRIS/MB ACTIVE button qh ECS/Shutter control block (left) Gamma control block (center) Master gain control block (right)
a ALL button Press the button so it starts flashing to activate the 13 buttons located at the right (from CAM PW to AUTO SETUP) for all the connected cameras of the same group. b CAM PW (camera power) button Press and light up this button to turn the power supply to the video camera ON. (The button promptly flashes until the camera becomes ready for transmission.) When you press this button again, it starts flashing and the power supply to the camera is turned off. c VF PW (viewfinder power) button BVP-900/P cameras only: Press and light up this button to turn the power supply to the viewfinder ON. When you press the button again, it goes dark and the power supply is turned off. d Signal output select buttons Press and light up one of these buttons to activate the test signal generator of the video camera and send the respective signals.
TEST 1: To send a sawtooth signal to test the video circuits TEST 2: To send a staircase signal BARS: To send a colour bar signal Note: The BARS button takes priority to the other two buttons. If the BARS button is lit, press the button to turn it dark before pressing the TEST 1 or TEST 2 button. e CLOSE (iris close) button Press and light the button to close the iris. Press again to release the close mode.
f STANDARD button When you press this button, the video camera is initialized to its standard state and the button remains illuminated for several seconds. If you press the button during this time, the video camera returns to the state before the button was lit.
For details, refer to the System Manual.
81
g AUTO SETUP block For automatic adjustments of cameras.

1 2
AUTO SETUP
BLACK
A Auto adjustment item select buttons Press and light up these buttons to select the items to be automatically adjusted. SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc. B START/BREAK button Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press the button when lit, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. C WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when lit or the START/ BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. D BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when lit or the START/ BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. Notes: If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes. The leftmost button is for future use and has no function at present. h Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons Various functions of the video camera or the CCU can be turned on and off from this unit. The following switching functions are assigned to 18 of the buttons at the factory and the other nine buttons are reserved for future use.
MONO COLOUR: Mono colour function which replaces the colour in a picture with colour of a single hue. The chroma level is modulated according to the luminance signal. COLOUR CORRECT: Colour correction function for a certain hue range (with the BKP-7311 SD board installed in the CCU-700A/700AP). Lower row (ON when the button is lit) 5600K: 5600K electronic colour temperature conversion function AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is lit (ON), the knee point is automatically adjusted according to the light content of the picture. SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When this button is lit (ON), the adjustment range of the skin tone detail is displayed in white on the monitor screen. SATURATION: Saturation function CONTRAST: Contrast function BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function CHARACTER: System information display function. When this button is lit (ON), various information relating to the entire system is displayed on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER connector of the CNU-700/500. The display contents can be changed through a menu operation. i Scene file control block
1 2
5
STORE
SCENE FILES
KNEE OFF
A SCENE FILES buttons When the STORE button is dark: The stored data can be retrieved by pressing and lighting up the button of the desired number. Press the lit button to turn it dark and resume the previous status. While the STORE button is flashing: When you press one of these buttons, the current setting data is stored as a file of the corresponding number. B STORE button To store a scene file, first press this button so that the button starts flashing, then press the SCENE FILES button of the desired number. When file registration is completed, the STORE button goes dark. To cancel the registration, press the flashing button again before pressing the SCENE FILES button. The STORE button goes dark.
KNEE KNEE APERTURE SAT
5600K
AUTO KNEE
CHARACTER
Upper row (OFF when the button is lit) KNEE OFF: Knee compensation function DETAIL OFF: Detail compensation function LVL DEP OFF: Level dependent function that controls the details in the dark part of a picture GAMMA OFF: Gamma function CHROMA OFF: Chroma function MATRIX OFF: Linear matrix function to enhance colour fidelity Middle row (ON when the button is lit) KNEE APERTURE: Knee aperture function KNEE SAT: Knee saturation function 82 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
j Menu operation block
MODE
MULTI
CARD
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
PAINT
A MODE (mode select) buttons Select the menu mode. If you press and light one of these buttons, the menu for the selected mode appears on the EL display. When the lit button is pressed again, it goes dark and the menu on the display also disappears. MULTI: Selects Multi-Control menu to set the requirements for Master/Slave mode to set up multiple cameras in synchronization. CARD: Selects IC memory card menu to initialize IC cards. CONFIG: Selects Configuration menu to configure this unit and the entire camera system. MAINTENANCE: Maintenance mode to set various camera maintenance items and the H and SC phases of CCU, etc. FILE: Selects File operation menu to retrieve and transfer reference files, lens files and scene files in the video camera or on IC cards. PAINT: Selects Paint control menu to adjust various paint items, such as white, black and flare. B Control knobs (rotary encoders) Adjust the selected items on the touch panel. C EL display/touch panel Displays the menu selected with the MODE buttons and permits the displayed items to be adjusted. k IC card insertion block
To insert a card (1) Slide the cover to open the IC card insertion block. (2) Insert the card into the slot. When the card is correctly set, the ACCESS indicator illuminates green. Note The data in the memory card is maintained by the battery built into the card. If the battery is exhausted, the data in the card will be lost. You can check the battery condition by the ACCESS indicator. If the battery becomes weak, replace the battery with a new one as soon as possible. B Eject button Press to eject the inserted IC card. Note Do not eject a card when the ACCESS indicator is lit in red (it means that the data is being read from or written to the card). This may erase data stored in the card. C ACCESS indicator Shows the status of the IC memory card.
Indication Off Lit in green
Meaning of Measures
No card is inserted There is a card in the slot. (The battery condition is good.) Lit in orange The battery of the card in the slot begins losing its charge. Although the data are still maintained, replace the battery at the earliest opportunity. Flashes in The battery of the card in the slot is orange almost exhausted. While the card stays in the MSU-700A, the MSU-700A supplies the power to the card. However when the card is ejected, the data cannot be maintained. Replace the battery before using. Lit in red Data are being read/written. If you eject the disc in this condition, the data is not guaranteed. All the data may be lost.
For battery replacement, refer to the instructions for the PC card.
l PICTURE MONITOR buttons Press to select the output signal from the PIX2 OUTPUT connector of CCU-700A/AP or PIX OUTPUT connector of CCU-550D/550DP. The signal corresponding to the lit button is output. R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal, or B signal. The signals can be selected either independently or in combination. When any of these buttons is pressed, the ENC circuit is turned off. ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/ G/B circuits are turned off, and the ENC signal is output. m WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons Press to select the output signal from the WF2 OUTPUT connector of CCU-700A/AP or PIX OUTPUT connector of CCU-550D/550DP. The signal corresponding to the lit button is output. R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal, or B signal. The signals can be selected either independently or in combination. When any of these buttons is pressed, the SEQ and ENC circuits are turned off. SEQ (sequence): When this button is pressed, the R/G/B circuits are turned off, and the SEQ signal is output. You can monitor the waveforms of the three Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 83
2 1
ACCESS
A IC card slot Insert an IC card (which conforms to SRAM Card PCMCIA 1.0/ JAEIDA or higher) to store reference files, lens files and scene files of the video camera or CCU. It also permits the configuration of the CNU-700.
R, G, and B signals in sequence on a waveform monitor. ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/ G/B and SEQ circuits are turned off, and the ENC signal is output.
1 2
n Camera select block
PARA
MULTI TALLY
3 4 5
PANEL ACTIVE
1
EXPAND
10
11
12
A PANEL ACTIVE button Press and light up this button to permit the cameras selected with the camera select buttons to be controlled from this unit. The IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button also lights up. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and the operation panel of this unit is locked. B PARA (parallel mode) button Press and light up this button to activate Parallel mode, which enables concurrent operation with another control panel. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and Parallel mode is canceled. C MULTI indicators Show the Master/Slave status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is lit). The indicator for the camera that is specified as the master for Master/Slave mode lights green. The indicators for the slave cameras light orange. They light red during the auto setup of the corresponding cameras. If an error occurs during the auto setup and the operation is interrupted, they will flash red. D TALLY indicators Show the tally status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is lit). The corresponding indicator illuminates red when a red tally is sent to a camera, and it illuminates green when a green tally is sent. When both red and green tally are sent, it illuminates orange. When a call signal is sent to the camera, the indicator rapidly flashes in red. E Active indicators Show the control status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is lit). The indicators for the cameras under control of this unit light green and the indicators for the cameras under control of another control panel light orange. An indicator whose corresponding camera (or camera control unit) is not connected does not light. An indicator lights red when an error is detected and the self-diagnostic functions are activated in the corresponding camera or camera control unit. F Camera select buttons Select the cameras to be controlled from this unit. Press and light up the button corresponding to each desired camera. Cameras 1 through 12 are selected when the EXPAND button is not lit, and cameras 13 84 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
through 24 are selected when the EXPAND button is lit. G EXPAND button Press to select the group to be selected with the camera select buttons. Cameras 1 through 12 can be selected when this button is not lit, and cameras 13 through 24 can be selected when this button is lit. Note An appropriate camera command network unit (CNU- 700, etc.) is required to control multiple cameras using the camera select function.
o Filter control block

1 2
1
FILTER CTRL
3
ND
C
CC
A FILTER CTRL (filter control) button Press and light up the button to enable filter selection with the CC and ND filter select buttons of this unit.( Only applies to cameras with remote control of filter wheels, eg BVPE10WS/WSP) B ND (ND filter select) buttons While the FILTER CTRL button is lit, press and light up one of these buttons to select the corresponding ND filter. Actual filter depends on camera model. For BVP-E10 Series, the following filters are used [1] Clear [2] 1/4 ND [3] 1/16 ND [4] 1/64 ND [5] Not available When the FILTER CTRL button is not lit, the button corresponding to the filter selected at the video camera illuminates. C CC (colour temperature conversion filter select) buttons While the FILTER CTRL button is lit, press and light up one of these buttons to select the corresponding CC filter. Actual filter depends on camera model. For BVP-E10WS/WSP cameras, the following filters are used [1] Cross filter [2] 3200K (clear)
[3] 4300K [4] 6300K [5] not available When the FILTER CTRL button is not lit, the button corresponding to the filter selected at the video camera illuminates. p ECS/Shutter control block (left) Gamma control block (centre) Master gain control block (right)
1
ECS ON
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA MASTER GAIN
q IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and light up this button to enable the iris and master black adjustment functions of the unit. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button automatically illuminates. To disable only the iris/ master black control block of the panel, press this button so that it goes dark. r MASTER BLACK control block Turn the control to adjust the master black level. The adjustment value is displayed in the display window. s CALL button Press to send a call signal to the selected video camera. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU light (or go off if already lit.) When the CALL button on the video camera is pressed, the CALL button on this unit illuminates and a buzzer sounds. t Camera number/tally indication window The number of the camera being controlled from this unit is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in red. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in green. When both the red and green tally signals are simultaneously sent, the left half of the background illuminates in red and the right half illuminates in green. u Iris control block
A ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button Press and light up the button to set the video camera to ECS mode. Press again and turn off the button to set the video camera to Shutter mode. B ON button Turns on and off the ECS function (when the ECS button is lit) or the shutter function (when the ECS button is not lit). The function is ON when this button is lit. C ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons and display window In ECS mode (when the ECS button is lit): The selected ECS frequency is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired scan frequency. The frequency increases when the v (up) button is pressed and decreases when the V (down) button is pressed. It continuously changes when either button is kept pressed. In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not lit): The denominator of the selected step shutter speed is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired shutter speed. The speed increases when the v (up) button is pressed and decreases when the V (down) button is pressed. It continuously changes when either button is kept pressed. Note ECS mode is not available with BVP-E10 Series Cameras D GAMMA select buttons and display window Select the step gamma. The selected value is displayed in the window. The gamma value decreases when the v (up) button is pressed and increases when the V (down) button is pressed. It continuously changes when either button is kept pressed. Note The higher the gamma effect, the lower the numeric value. E MASTER GAIN selects buttons and display window Select the appropriate video gain according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. The selected value (dB) is displayed in the window. The gain value increases when the (up) button is pressed and decreases when the (down) button is pressed. It continuously changes when either button is kept pressed.
IRIS
EXT AUTO
A EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminates when the lens extender is used. B IRIS control and display window When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust the iris manually by turning the control. The adjustment value is displayed in f numbers on the display. When the AUTO button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of 2f stops with this control, to allow manual trimming of the automatic exposure. When the iris is closed, "CL" is displayed in the window. C AUTO button Press and light the button to automatically adjust the iris according to the brightness of the subject (Auto Iris). If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and manual iris adjustment is enabled. Note If the skin tone auto iris function is used and the subject being used as the reference for automatic adjustment is lost , the skin tone auto iris stops functioning, and the iris value at that time is maintained. The AUTO button then Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 85
flashes. In this condition, not only is the iris not automatically adjusted but also it cannot be changed manually. When you wish to change
the iris, turn Auto Iris off. If Auto Iris is kept ON, the skin tone auto iris will start functioning when the subject for reference is resumed.
7-10-2Connector Panel
1 POWER switch 2 AC IN connector 3 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector 4 AUX REMOTE connector
REMOTE AUX CCU/CNU POWER

I O
AC IN I/O PORT
5 I/O PORT connector
a POWER switch Turns on and off the power of this unit. b AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using an optional AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to this unit using an optional plug retainer. c CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/ camera command network unit remote) connector (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of CCU or the MSU connector of CNU. d AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8pin) For spare. e I/O PORT connector (50-pin) For spare.
86
7-11.MSU-750, Master Setup Unit

1 ALL button 2 CAM PW button 3 VF PW button 4 Signal output select buttons 5 CLOSE button 6 STANDARD button 7 AUTO SETUP block
AUTO SETUP
AUTO LEVEL START/ WHITE BLACK CLOSE STANDARD HUE BREAK
ALL
CAM PW VF PW
TEST
BARS
8 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons 9 Scene file control block q; Monitor output select buttons
5600K AUTO SKIN KNEE DETAIL
CHARACTER
qs Display window block

ECS/SHUTTER ACCESS GAMMA
MASTER GAIN ND CC FILTER
1 R
2 G
MODE
3 B
4
SCENE FILES SEQ MONITOR
5
STORE ENC WF PIX
IC MEMORY CARD
qd IC card insertion block
MULTI CARD CONFIG MAINTENANCE FILE
qf Menu operation block
PAINT FUNCTION
CALL PANEL PARA EXPAND ACTIVE

MULTI TALLY
qg CALL button qh IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
07
08
09
10
11
12
EXT
qa Camera select block

MULTI TALLY
AUTO
01
02
03
04
05
06
MASTER BLACK IRIS MASTER SETUP UNIT
qj Iris control block
ql Camera number/tally indication window qk MASTER BLACK control block
a (1) ALL button Press the button so it starts flashing to activate the 11 buttons located at the right (from CAM PW to AUTO SETUP) for all the connected cameras of the same group. b CAM PW (camera power) button Press and light up this button to turn the power supply to the video camera ON. (The button promptly flashes until the camera becomes ready for transmission.) When you press this button again, it starts flashing and the power supply to the camera is turned off. c VF PW (viewfinder power) button BVP-900/P cameras only: Press and light up this button to turn the power supply to the viewfinder ON. When you press the button again, it goes dark and the power supply is turned off.
d Signal output select buttons Press and light up one of these buttons to activate the test signal generator of the video camera and send the respective signals. TEST: To send a signal to test the video circuits BARS: To send a colour bar signal Note The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If the BARS button is lit, press the button to turn it dark before pressing the TEST button. e CLOSE (iris close) button Press and light the button to close the iris. Press again to release the close mode. f STANDARD button When you press this button, the video camera is initialized to its standard state and the button remains illuminated for several seconds. If you press the button Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 87
during this time, the video camera returns to the state before the button was lit. g AUTO SETUP block For automatic adjustments of cameras.
1 2 3 4
i Scene file control block

1 SCENE FILES button 2 STORE button
4
SCENE FILES
5
STORE
AUTO SETUP
AUTO LEVEL START/ WHITE BLACK HUE BREAK
A Auto adjustment item select buttons Press and light up these buttons to select the items to be automatically adjusted. AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc. B START/BREAK button Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press the button when lit, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. C WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when lit or the START/ BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. D BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when lit or the START/ BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. Note If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes. h Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons Various functions of the video camera or the CCU can be turned on and off from this unit (ON when the button is lit). The following switching functions are assigned to four of the buttons at the factory and the other three buttons are reserved for future use.
A SCENE FILES buttons When the STORE button is dark: The stored data can be retrieved by pressing and lighting up the button of the desired number. Press the lit button to turn it dark and resume the previous status. While the STORE button is flashing: When you press one of these buttons, the current setting data is stored as a file of the corresponding number. B STORE button To store a scene file, first press this button so that the button starts flashing, then press the SCENE FILES button of the desired number. When file registration is completed, the STORE button goes dark. To cancel the registration, press the flashing button again before pressing the SCENE FILES button. The STORE button goes dark. j Monitor output select buttons Press to select the output signal from the WF2 and PIX2 OUTPUT connectors of CCU-700A/AP or PIX OUTPUT connector of CCU-550D/550DP.
1 2
SEQ MONITOR
ENC WF PIX
CHARACTER
5600K: 5600K -electronic colour temperature conversion function AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is lit (ON), the knee point is automatically adjusted according to the light content of the picture. SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function CHARACTER: System information display function. Various information relating to the entire system is displayed on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER connector of the CNU-700. The display contents can be changed through a menu operation.
A Output signal select buttons After selecting the output connector of the CCU by pressing either the WF or PIX button, press to light the button for the signal to be output. The signal corresponding to the lit button is output. R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal, or B signal. The signals can be selected either independently or in combination. When any of these buttons is pressed, the SEQ (for WF only) and ENC circuits are turned off. SEQ (sequence): Effective only for the WF2 OUTPUT connector. When this button is pressed, the R/G/B circuits are turned off, and the SEQ signal is output. You can monitor the waveforms of the three R, G, and B signals in sequence on a waveform monitor. ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/G/B and SEQ circuits are turned off, and the ENC signal is output. B Output connector select buttons WF: Press to light the button when switching the output signal from the WF2 OUTPUT connector with the output signal select buttons. Press the button again to make it go dark. PIX: Press and light the button when switching the output signal from the PIX2 OUTPUT connector with the output signal select buttons. Press the button again to make it go dark. When one of these buttons is lit, pressing the output signal select buttons has effect only on
88
the connector that corresponds to the lit button. The output signal from the other connector does not change. By lighting both the buttons, you can simultaneously select the output signal. Note If you light both the WF and PIX buttons when different signals are selected for the WF2 OUTPUT and PIX2 OUTPUT connectors, the output select buttons corresponding to the k Camera select block
1 2 3
signals selected for either of the connectors flash. Press the button for the signal to be output to select it again. For example, when you light both the WF and PIX buttons with R + B selected for PIX2 OUTPUT and B + G selected for WF2 OUTPUT, the R and G buttons will start flashing, while the B button will remain lit. To output R and G, press the R and G buttons. Each pressed button stops flashing and illuminates.
PANEL PARA EXPAND ACTIVE

MULTI TALLY
4 5 6
07
08
09
10
11
12
7
MULTI TALLY
4 5 6
01
02
03
04
05
06
7
A PANEL ACTIVE button Press and light up this button to permit the cameras selected with the camera select buttons to be controlled from this unit. The IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button also lights up. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and the operation panel of this unit is locked. B PARA (parallel mode) button Press and light up this button to activate Parallel mode, which enables concurrent operation with another control panel. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and the Parallel mode is canceled. C EXPAND button Press to select the group to be selected with the camera select buttons. Cameras 1 through 12 can be selected when this button is not lit, and cameras 13 through 24 can be selected when this button is lit. Note An appropriate camera command network unit (CNU- 700, etc.) is required to control multiple cameras using the camera select function. D MULTI indicators Show the Master/Slave status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is lit). The indicator for the camera that is specified as the master for Master/Slave mode lights green. The indicators for the slave cameras light orange. They light red during the auto setup of the corresponding cameras. If an error occurs during the auto setup and the operation is interrupted, they will flash red.
E TALLY indicators Show the tally status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is lit). The corresponding indicator lights red when a red tally is sent to a camera, and it lights green when a green tally is sent. When both red and green tally are sent, it lights orange. When a call signal is sent to the camera, the indicator rapidly flashes red. F Active indicators Show the control status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is lit). The indicators for the cameras under control of this unit light green and the indicators for the cameras under control of another control panel light orange. An indicator whose corresponding camera (or camera control unit) is not connected does not light. An indicator lights red when an error is detected and the self-diagnostic functions are activated in the corresponding camera or camera control unit. G Camera select buttons and camera number indicators Select the cameras to be controlled from this unit. Press and light up the button corresponding to each desired camera. When the EXPAND button is not lit, numbers 1 through 12 are displayed and cameras 1 through 12 are selected. When the EXPAND button is lit, numbers 13 through 24 are displayed and cameras 13 through 24 are selected. Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
89
l Display window block

1 2 3 4
Indication Flashes in orange
Meaning of Measures The battery of the card in the slot is almost exhausted. While the card stays in the MSU-750, the MSU-750 supplies the power to the card. However when the card is ejected, the data cannot be maintained. Replace the battery before using. Data are being read/written. If you eject the disc in this condition, the data is not guaranteed. All the data may be lost.
ECS/SHUTTER
GAMMA
MASTER GAIN
ND CC FILTER
A ECS frequency/Shutter speed display window The currently selected ECS frequency or step shutter speed is displayed in the window. Selection between the ECS mode and shutter mode is made using the Function menu. When both ECS and Shutter are off, "OFF" is displayed. B GAMMA display window The currently selected step gamma value is displayed in the window. The setting is made using the Function menu. The higher the gamma effect, the lower the value. C MASTER GAIN display window The selected gain value (dB) of the camera is displayed in the window. The setting is made using the Function menu. D Filter display window The currently selected ND and CC filters are displayed. Filter selection is made using the Function menu. ND filter Actual filter depends on camera model. For BVP-E10 Series, the following filters are used [1] Clear [2] 1/4 ND [3] 1/16 ND [4] 1/64 ND [5] not available CC filter Actual filter depends on camera model. For BVP-E10WS/WSP cameras, the following filters are used [1] Cross filter [2] 3200K (clear) [3] 4300K [4] 6300K [5] not available m IC card insertion block
Lit in red
For battery replacement, refer to the instructions for the IC card.
B IC card slot Insert an IC card (which conforms to PCMCIA) to store reference files, lens files and scene files of the video camera or CCU. It also permits the configuration of the CNU-700 and software installation for version up. When the card is correctly set, the ACCESS indicator illuminates green. Note The data in the memory card is maintained by the battery built into the card. If the battery is exhausted, the data in the card will be lost. You can check the battery condition by the ACCESS indicator. If the battery becomes weak, replace the battery with a new one as soon as possible. C Eject button Press to eject the inserted IC card. Note Do not eject a card when the ACCESS indicator is lit in red (it means that the data is being read from or written to the card). This may erase data stored in the card.
ACCESS
IC MEMORY CARD
A ACCESS indicator Shows the status of the IC memory card.
Indication Off Lit in green
Meaning of Measures
No card is inserted. There is a card in the slot. (The battery condition is good.) Lit in orange The battery of the card in the slot begins losing its charge. Although the data are still maintained, replace the battery at the earliest opportunity.
90
n Menu operation block
MODE
MULTI CARD CONFIG MAINTENANCE FILE
PAINT FUNCTION
A MODE (mode select) buttons Select the menu mode. If you press and light one of these buttons, the menu for the selected mode appears on the EL display. When the lit button is pressed again, it goes dark and the menu on the display also disappears. MULTI: Selects Multi-Control menu to set the requirements for Master/Slave mode to set up multiple cameras in synchronization. CARD: Selects IC memory card menu to initialize IC cards. CONFIG: Selects Configuration menu to configure this unit and the entire camera system. MAINTENANCE: Maintenance mode to set various camera maintenance items and the H and SC phases of CCU, etc. FILE: Selects File operation menu to retrieve and transfer reference files, lens files and scene files in the video camera or on IC cards. PAINT: Selects Paint control menu to adjust various paint items, such as white, black and flare. FUNCTION: Selects Function menu to control various camera and CCU functions. B EL display/touch panel Displays the menu selected with the MODE buttons and permits the displayed items to be adjusted. C Control knobs (rotary encoders) Adjust the selected items on the touch panel. o CALL button Press to send a call signal to the selected video camera,. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU light(or go off if already lit). When the CALL button on the video camera is pressed, the CALL button on this unit illuminates and a buzzer sounds. p IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and light up this button to enable the iris and master black adjustment functions of the unit. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button automatically illuminates. To disable only the iris/
master black control block of the panel, press this button so that it goes dark. q Iris control block
1 2 3
EXT
AUTO
IRIS
4
A EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminates when the lens extender is used. B Iris display window The iris value is displayed in f numbers. When the iris is closed, "CL" is displayed in the window. C AUTO button Press and light the button to automatically adjust the iris according to the brightness of the subject (Auto Iris). When this button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of 2f with the iris control. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and manual iris adjustment is enabled. Note If the the skin tone auto iris function is used and the subject being used as the reference for automatic adjustment is lost , the skin tone auto iris stops functioning, and the iris value at that time is maintained. The AUTO button then flashes. In this condition, not only is the iris not automatically adjusted but also it cannot be changed manually. When you wish to change the iris, turn Auto Iris off. Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 91
If Auto Iris is kept ON, the skin tone auto iris will start functioning when the subject for reference is resumed. For the skin tone auto iris, refer to the system manual. D Iris control When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust the iris manually by turning the control. The adjustment value is displayed in f numbers on the display. When the AUTO button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of 2f stops with this control, to allow manual trimming of the automatic exposure. r MASTER BLACK control block Turn the control to adjust the master black level. The adjustment value is displayed in the display window. s Camera number/tally indication window The number of the camera being controlled from this unit is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in red. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in green. When both the red and green tally signals are simultaneously sent, the left half of the background illuminates in red and the right half illuminates in green.
92
7-12.RCP-700/701, Remote Control Panel

1 PANEL ACTIVE button 2 WHITE button 3 BLACK button RCP-700
PANEL ACTIVE WHITE BLACK CALL
4 CALL button 5 RGB white knobs
WHITE
BLACK
6 RGB black knobs

SLAVE
EXT
MASTER
7 EXT indicator 8 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
qs AUTO button
AUTO
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
qd Camera number/tally indication window
9 SENS control knob

SENS
q; COARSE control knob

CLOSE OPEN
COARSE
qf Master black control ring
qa ALARM indicator
ALARM
qg IRIS control lever/preview switch

IRIS
1 PANEL ACTIVE button 2 WHITE button 3 BLACK button RCP-701

PANEL ACTIVE WHITE BLACK CALL
4 CALL button 5 WHITE knobs
WHITE
BLACK
6 BLACK knobs
SLAVE
EXT
MASTER
7 EXT indicator 8 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
qs AUTO button
AUTO
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
qd Camera number/tally indication window 9 SENS control knob qf MASTER BLACK control
MASTER BLACK
CLOSE OPEN
SENS
q; COARSE control knob

COARSE
qa ALARM indicator
ALARM
qg IRIS control qh Iris gauge

IRIS PREVIEW
qj PREVIEW button
Parts common to the RCP-700/701 Items 1 through qd are common to the RCP-700 and RCP-701.
a PANEL ACTIVE button Press and illuminate the button to permit this panel to control the camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/MB ACTIVE button also illuminates. b WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual 93
illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. Note If an error occurs during adjustment, the selected button flashes. c BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. Note If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes. d CALL button Press to send a call signal to the camera,. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU-700/A700AP are illuminated(or are turned off if they were already illuminated). When the CALL button on the camera is pressed, the CALL button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds. e WHITE (white balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the white balance. Adjust the Red and Blue signals, respectively. f BLACK (black balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the black balance. Adjust the Red and Blue signals, respectively. g EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminates when the lens extender is in use. h IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris/ master black control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this block is automatically selected as active. i SENS (sensitivity) control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table 'Iris adjustment functions'. j COARSE control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table 'Iris adjustment functions'. k ALARM indicator Illuminates when the self-diagnostic function identifies a problem in the camera or CCU system l AUTO button Press and illuminate the button and the iris automatically adjusts according to the subject brightness. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled. m Camera number/tally indication window (incorporated with MASTER/SLAVE indications) The number of the camera being controlled from this panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, its number is displayed in black
against a red background. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black against a green background. When the red and green tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background is illuminated red and the right half illuminated green. In Master/Slave mode, to adjust the white balance of multiple cameras the upper-left (MASTER) corner is illuminated orange when the camera being controlled from this panel is designated as the master unit, and the upper-right (SLAVE) corner is illuminated orange when designated as a slave unit.
RCP-700-exclusive features n Master black control ring Turn to manually adjust the master black. o IRIS control lever/preview switch When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by moving this lever. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect the key signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the table "Iris adjustment functions."
Iris adjustment functions IRIS lever (RCP-700) Adjust the iris within the variaIRIS control (RCP-701) ble controls. COARSE control Sets the lower limit for CLOSED. SENS control Sets the upper limit for OPEN according to the CLOSED value set by the COARSE control.
RCP-701-exclusive features p MASTER BLACK control Turn to manually adjust the master black. q IRIS control When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by turning the control. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f stop with this control. See the table 'Iris adjustment functions'. r Iris marker The white line on the marker provides a click position for the IRIS control. Turn the gauge to set the line to the most frequently used iris position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris adjustment. The marker rotates infinitely in either direction. When no click position is required, set the line outside the rotation range of the IRIS control. s PREVIEW button Connects the preview signal to the PREVIEW connector to control an external monitor switcher.
94
Connector Panel
Connector Panel
PREVIEW
REMOTE
2 REMOTE connector 1 PREVIEW connector
A PREVIEW connector (6-pin) Sends Preview command to an external monitor switcher. The RCP-701 can also receive power from the external switcher to illuminate the PREVIEW button through this connector. B REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of a CCU700A/700AP, the RCP connector of a CNU-700 or the AUX connector of another RCP Series Remote Control Panel.
95

RCP-750
1 Control select block 2 STANDARD button 3 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
PARA MASTER SLAVE CAM PW TEST
BARS
CLOSE
q; Power and output signal select qa AUTO SETUP block
AUTO SETUP
5600K
AUTO KNEE
SKIN DETAIL
DTL GATE
qs Menu operation block
4 RGB white knobs

WHITE DETAIL
qd DETAIL knob
5 RGB BLACK/FLARE knobs and indicator
BLACK/FLARE a
EXT
qf MEMORY STICK slot and access lamp
6 Camera number/tally indication window
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
MASTER BLACK
AUTO
SENS

RELATIVE RELATIVE
CLOSE OPEN
7 ALARM indicator 8 CALL button 9 PANEL ACTIVE button

ALARM CALL
COARSE
PANEL ACTIVE IRIS

RCP-751
BLACK/FLARE a
6 Camera number/tally indication window

EXT
MASTER BLACK
RELATIVE
SENS
CLOSE
OPEN
COARSE

IRIS/MB ACTIVE AUTO
7 ALARM indicator 8 CALL button 9 PANEL ACTIVE button

ALARM CALL
PANEL ACTIVE
IRIS
a Control select block A PARA (parallel mode) button This button illuminates when Parallel mode is active, in which concurrent operation with another control panel is possible. When this button is lit, all the buttons and controls on this 96 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
panel except for the iris/master black control block are active, even if the PANEL ACTIVE button is not lit. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and Parallel mode is cancelled.
B MASTER and SLAVE buttons Designate the master camera or the slave cameras to adjust the white balance of multiple cameras in Master/Slave mode. Press and light up the MASTER button to specify the connected camera to become the master. Press and light up the SLAVE button to specify the connected camera(s) to become slave. The slave cameras follow the master camera settings. If you press a button when lit, it cancels the selection. b STANDARD button When you press this button, the video camera is initialized to its standard state and the button illuminates for several seconds. If you press the button while it illuminates, the video camera reverts to the original state before Standard was selected. c Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons Various functions of the video camera or the CCU/ HDCU-series can be turned on and off from this panel.
f Camera number/tally indication window The number of the camera being controlled from this panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in red. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in green. When both the red and green tally signals are simultaneously sent, the left half of the background illuminates in red and the right half illuminates in green. g ALARM indicator Illuminates when the self-diagnostic function identifies a problem in the camera or CCU system h CALL button Press to send a call signal to the video camera. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU/HDCU Series light, (or go off if already lit). When the CALL button on the video camera is pressed, the CALL button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds. i PANEL ACTIVE button Press and light up the button to permit this panel to control the camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/MB ACTIVE button also illuminates. If you press this button so that it goes dark, the panel will be locked, preventing accidental misoperation. j Power and output signal select block
1 2 3
CHAR ACTER
5600K
AUTO KNEE
SKIN DETAIL
DTL GATE
BLACK GAMMA
5600K: 5600K -electronic colour temperature conversion function AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is lit (ON), the knee point is automatically adjusted according to the highlight content of the picture. SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function DTL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When this button is lit (ON), the adjustment range of the skin tone detail is displayed in white on the PIX (picture) monitor screen. BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function CHARACTER: Self-diagnostic display function. When this button is lit (ON), the contents of the selfdiagnosis of the CCU/HDCU-series are displayed on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER OUTPUT connector of the CCU/HDCU-series. The contents are also mixed to the video signal to be output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector. Each time you press this button, the status changes as follows. OFF _ ON (page 1) _ ON (page 2) . . . _ ON (page n) _ OFF The contents of the self-diagnosis may be displayed when required even if this button is not lit. The right two buttons are for future use and do not function at present. d WHITE (white balance manual adjustment) controls Used to manually adjust the white balance. From the left, the controls are for R, G, and B signal adjustment. e BLACK/FLARE (black balance/flare balance manual adjustment) controls and indicator Used to manually adjust the black balance (when the indicator is not lit) or the flare balance (when the indicator is lit). From the left, the controls are for R, G, and B signal adjustment. Selection between black balance and flare balance is made using the Maintenance menu.
CAM PW TEST
BARS
CLOSE
A CAM PW (camera power) button Press and light up this button to turn the power supply to the video camera ON. (The button promptly flashes until the camera becomes ready for transmission.) When you press this button again, it starts flashing and the power supply is turned off. B Signal output select buttons Press and light up one of these buttons to activate the test signal generator of the video camera and send the respective signals. TEST: To send a signal to test the video circuits BARS: To send a colour bar signal Note The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If the BARS button is lit, press the button to turn it dark before pressing the TEST button. C CLOSE button Press and light the button to close the iris. To release the close mode, press the button again so that it goes dark. k AUTO SETUP block
1 2 3 4
AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL LEVEL START/ AUTO HUE BREAK
WHITE
BLACK
97
A Auto adjustment item select buttons Press and light up these buttons to select the items to be automatically adjusted. SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue. LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc. B START/BREAK button Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press the button when lit, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. C WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press
1
this button when lit or the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. D BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button lights during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when lit or the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. Note If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes. l Menu operation block
FUNCTION
A MODE (mode select) buttons Select the menu mode. If you press and light one of these buttons, the menu for the selected mode appears on the LCD. PAINT 1/2/3: Each selects the Paint menu to adjust various paint items, such as white, black, and flare. SCENE: Selects the File operation menu to register and retrieve scene files. MAINTENANCE: Selects the Maintenance menu to set the H and SC phases of CCU/ HDCU and operational conditions of this control panel. FUNCTION: Selects the Function menu to control various camera and CCU/HDCU functions. When none of the buttons are lit, the status display is obtained. B LCD/touch panel Normally displays the statuses When you press a MODE button, the corresponding menu is displayed to permit you to adjust the displayed items. C Control knobs (rotary encoders) Adjust the selected items on the touch panel. D DETAIL knob Used to adjust the detail level. You may select HD detail or SD detail using the Maintenance menu.
E MEMORY STICK media card slot and access lamp Insert a Memory Stick media card to store setting data, such as reference files and scene files of the video camera or CCU/HDCU. The access lamp shows the status of the Memory Stick media card. Off: No Memory Stick media card is inserted. Lit in green: There is a Memory Stick media card in the slot. In this condition, you can safely eject the Memory Stick media card. Lit in red: Data are being read/written. If you eject the Memory Stick media card in this condition, the data are not guaranteed. All the data may be lost.
98
7-13-2Iris/master black control block (RCP-750)

3 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button 4 AUTO button 5 f-number display 6 EXT indicator
EXT
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
1 MASTER BLACK display MASTER BLACK 2 MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button 7 SENS control knob
AUTO SENS
8 COARSE control knob

RELATIVE RELATIVE
CLOSE OPEN
COARSE
9 Master black control ring q; IRIS control lever
IRIS
qa IRIS RELATIVE button
a MASTER BLACK display Displays the current master black setting in the range from -99 to +99. b MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is lit, the master black adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and light up the button for Relative mode, or press and turn it off for Absolute mode. Use of Relative mode ensures that the Master Black level of the camera does not jump when changing between the RCP and another control panel, such as an MSU. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not lit, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative. c IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and light up this button to enable the iris/master black control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this function is automatically selected also . If you press this button so that it goes dark, the panel will be locked, preventing accidental misoperation. d AUTO button Press and light the button to automatically adjust the iris according to the brightness of the subject. When this button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of 2f stops with the iris control. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and manual iris adjustment is enabled. e f-number display Displays the f-number of the current iris setting. When the iris is closed, "CL" is displayed. f EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminates when the lens extender is used.
g SENS (sensitivity) control knob Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is not operative when Relative mode is selected. h COARSE control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. i Master black control ring Turn to manually adjust the master black level. j IRIS control lever When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust the iris manually by moving the lever. When the AUTO button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of s 2f with this lever. Pressing the IRIS control lever activates the RCP preview function. See the following table "Iris adjustment functions." k IRIS RELATIVE (iris relative) button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is lit, the iris adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and light up the button for Relative mode or press so that it goes dark for Absolute mode. Use of Relative mode ensures that the lens Iris setting does not jump when changing between the RCP and another control panel, such as an MSU. When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button is not lit, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative.
99
7
IRIS lever COARSE control SENS control
Iris adjustment functions Absolute mode (RELATIVE button not lit) Adjusts the iris with relative values Adjusts the iris within the variable within 1/4 of the total range from OPEN range set by the SENS and COARSE to CLOSED. Adjusts the total range from OPEN to Sets the lower limit for CLOSED. CLOSED in relative values. Does not function. Sets the upper limit for OPEN according to CLOSED value set by the COARSE control. Relative mode (RELATIVE button lit)
7-13-3Iris/master black control block (RCP-751)

4 IRIS RELATIVE button
1 MASTER BLACK display

EXT
5 f-number display 6 EXT indicator 7 SENS control knob MASTER BLACK 8 COARSE control knob
RELATIVE SENS CLOSE OPEN COARSE
2 MASTER BLACK control
3 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button

IRIS/MB ACTIVE AUTO
9 IRIS control
q; Iris gauge IRIS
qa AUTO button
a MASTER BLACK display Displays the current master black setting in the range from -99 to +99. b MASTER BLACK control Manually adjust the master black level. The setting is displayed in the MASTER BLACK display. c IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and light up this button to enable the iris/master black control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button also illuminates. If you press this button so that it goes dark, the panel will be locked, preventing accidental misoperation. d IRIS RELATIVE (iris relative) button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is lit, the iris adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and light up the button for Relative mode or press so that it goes dark for Absolute mode. Use of Relative mode ensures that the lens Iris setting does not jump when changing between the RCP and another control panel, such as an MSU. When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button is not lit, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative.
e f-number display Displays the f number of the current iris setting. When the iris is closed, "CL" is displayed. f EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminates when the lens extender is used. g SENS (sensitivity) control knob Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is not operative when Relative mode is selected. h COARSE control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. i IRIS control When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust the iris manually by turning the control. When the AUTO button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of 1f with this control. j Iris marker The white line on the marker provides a click position for the IRIS control. Turn the marker to set the line to the most frequently used iris position, to allow this known setting to be quickly repeated. The marker rotates infinitely in either direction. When no click position is
100 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
required, set the line outside the rotation range of the IRIS control. k AUTO button Press and light the button to automatically adjust the iris according to the amount of input light. When this button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of 2f with the iris control. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark and manual iris adjustment is enabled.
1 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector 2 AUX REMOTE connector 3 EXT I/O connector
REMOTE
CCU/CNU AUX
EXT I/O
a CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera command network unit remote) connector (8pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of a camera control unit or the RCP connector of a camera command network unit. b AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8pin) Connect to the RCP-700/701. c EXT I/O (external input/output) connector (9-pin) Provides preview function to control an external switcher for camera monitoring Caution When installing this panel, provide a gap of 7 cm (3 inches) or more behind the connector panel to prevent damage to cables.
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 101 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
7-14.RM-B150, Hand-held Remote Control Unite

VTR START/STOP
1 Shutter control block

SHUTTER ECS S-EVS 1 2 3 4 5 ABCDE CC
REW STOP CAM BARS TEST
F FWD PLAY REC REVIEW
9 VTR control block
q; OUTPUT selector
LOW MID HIGH
2 Filter control block

ND
qa GAIN selector
FILTER
OUTPUT
GAIN
3 Paint control block

AUTO KNEE
KNEE
M GAMMA
A B
DETAIL
AWB PRE
4 White balance control block

R
WHITE
5 Black balance control block

R
ABB
BLACK
B IRIS/MB ACTIVE AUTO EXT
6 ACTIVE button
ACTIVE STANDARD
7 STANDARD button
8 Iris/master black control block

MASTER BLACK
IRIS
MENU
SELECT DISPLAY ON OFF MENU CANCEL ENTER
qs MENU operation block
a Shutter control block

1 2 3
SHUTTER
ECS
S-EVS
A SHUTTER button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to Shutter mode. The current shutter speed is shown on the display of the menu operation block for a few seconds. In Shutter mode, the shutter speed is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotary encoder).
B ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to ECS mode. The current ECS frequency is shown on the display of the menu operation block for a few seconds. In ECS mode, the ECS frequency is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotary encoder). C S-EVS (Super EVS) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to S-EVS mode. The current S-EVS value is shown on the display of the menu operation block for a few seconds. In S-EVS mode, the S-EVS value is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotary encoder).
Notes: When you change the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value in the corresponding mode, the menu block display shows it for a few seconds. When this unit is in RM Configuration Menu mode, the shutter speed, ECS frequency and S-EVS value cannot be adjusted. b Filter control block
1 2 3 4 5 ND ABCDE CC
1 2
3 4
FILTER
A ND (ND filter) indicators The indicator corresponding to the currently selected ND filter illuminates. B ND (ND filter select) button Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit (Filter camera control mode) to enable filter selection from this unit. When this button is illuminated, the ND filter cyclically changes in the sequence of 1_2_3_4_5_1_... each time it is pressed. C CC (colour temperature conversion filter) indicators The indicator that corresponds to the currently selected CC filter is illuminated. D CC (colour temperature conversion filter select) button Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit (Filter camera control mode) to enable filter selection from this unit. When this button is illuminated, the CC filter cyclically changes in the sequence of A_B_C_D_E_A_... each time it is pressed. Notes: Once you press any of the filter select buttons, both buttons illuminate. The illumination is switched off when filter selection is made on the camera. The choice of filters that can be selected depends on the camera being used. For available filters, refer to the Operation Manual of the camera. For a camera with four filters, you can change the function of this button to skip 5 or E and switch from 4 to1 or from D to A using the RM Configuration menu. However, when the connected camera has an automatic filterdetection facility, setting with the RM Configuration menu is not required. c Paint control block
1 2 3 4
B KNEE control The control is specified at the factory to adjust the master knee point. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is adjusted with this control. C M GAMMA (master gamma) control The control is specified at the factory to adjust the master gamma. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is adjusted with this control. D DETAIL control The control is specified at the factory to adjust the detail level. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is adjusted with this control. Note The adjustment mode of the above three controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu. The centre click position of each control is the reference position in Relative mode. The adjustment range in Relative mode is also selected using the menu. d White balance control block
1 2 3 4 5
A B
AWB PRE
WHITE
AUTO KNEE
KNEE
M GAMMA
DETAIL
A AUTO KNEE button (amber illumination) This button is specified at the factory to turn the auto knee function on and off. Press and illuminate the button to turn the auto knee function on. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is turned on/off with this button
A WHITE (white balance) controls Adjusts the R/B white balance. The adjustment mode of these controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu. See 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'. B A (memory A) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to obtain the white balance setting stored in memory A of the camera (Memory A mode). When this button is illuminated, adjustments made to the white balance are stored in memory A. Press the button again to release Memory A mode. C B (memory B) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to obtain the white balance setting stored in memory B of the camera (Memory B mode). When this button is illuminated, adjustments made to the white balance are stored in memory B. Press the button again to release Memory B mode. D AWB (auto white balance) button (red illumination) Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button is illuminated during adjustment and this is turned off when adjustment is complete. If you press the button while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. E PRE (preset) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to fix the white balance to 3200K (Preset mode). Press the button again to release Preset mode. Note In Preset mode, manual adjustment with the WHITE controls and automatic adjustment with the AWB button are both disabled. When the adjustment mode of the WHITE controls is Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 103 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
specified as Absolute mode, the Memory A, B and AWB buttons are disabled. e Black balance control block
h Iris/master black control block

1 2 3
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
AUTO EXT
ABB
5
R
BLACK
A BLACK (black balance) controls These controls are specified at the factory to adjust the R/B black balance. Using the RM Configuration menu, you can change the function of these controls to adjust the R/B flare balance. The adjustment mode of these controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can also be changed to Absolute mode using the menu. See 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'. B ABB (auto black balance) button (red illumination) Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and this is turned off when the adjustment is completed. If you press this button when it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled, and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. Note When the adjustment mode of the BLACK controls is specified as Absolute mode, automatic black balance adjustment with the ABB button is disabled. f ACTIVE button (green illumination) Press to select the control mode for the connected camera system. Each time you press the button, the control mode cyclically switches between FULL, PART, and LOCK modes. FULL mode: All controls from this unit are enabled (panel active status). Both this button and the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control block are illuminated. PART mode: Controls only from the iris/master black control block are enabled (iris/master black active status). This button is not illuminated, but the IRIS/MB ACTIVE indicator stays lit. LOCK mode: All controls from this unit are disabled (lock status). Neither this button nor the IRIS/MB ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control are illuminated. Using the RM Configuration menu, the function of this button can be changed to switch only between FULL and LOCK modes. The RM Configuration menu operation is possible in any mode. See 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'. g STANDARD button (green illumination) When this button is pressed, it remains illuminated for several seconds while the camera is initialized to its standard state. If the button is pressed while illuminated, the camera reverts to the state before the button was originally pressed.
MASTER BLACK
IRIS
A MASTER BLACK control Manually adjusts the master black level. The adjustment mode of this control is specified at the factory as Absolute mode, which can be changed to Relative mode using the RM Configuration menu. See 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'. B EXT (lens extender) indicator (amber illumination) Illuminates when the lens extender is in use. C AUTO button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to automatically adjust the iris according to the subject brightness. If you press the button when it is illuminated, this is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled. D IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) indicator (green illumination) Illuminated when the control mode is set as FULL or PART mode with the ACTIVE button. When this indicator is illuminated, iris/master black controls from this unit are enabled. E IRIS control When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by turning this control. When the AUTO button is illuminated you can fine-adjust the reference value for the automatic iris adjustment in a range of +/-2 f stops with this control. The adjustment mode of this control is specified at the factory as Absolute mode, which can also be changed to Relative mode using the RM Configuration menu. See 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'. F Iris marker Turn the marker to set the white line to the most -frequently used iris position, and it can be used as the reference for the manual iris adjustment. i VTR control block Controls VTR operations. (Note these functions are designed for operation with camcorders. They can only be used with the BVP-E10 series when docked with a DNV-5 recorder
l MENU operation block

1 2 3 1 2
VTR START/STOP
REW STOP
4
F FWD PLAY REC REVIEW

5 6
MENU
SELECT DISPLAY ON OFF MENU CANCEL ENTER
A mREW (rewind) button (amber illumination): Press this button to start a rewind operation. The button is illuminated. B MF FWD (fast forward) button (amber illumination): Press this button to start a fastforward operation. The button is illuminated. C START/STOP button (red illumination): Press this button to start a recording operation. The button is illuminated. Pressing this button when it is illuminated stops the VTR recording. D xSTOP button: Press to stop a rewind, fastforward or playback operation. E bPLAY button (amber illumination): Press this button to start a playback operation. The button is illuminated. F 3REC REVIEW (recording review) button (amber illumination): Press this button to execute a recording review operation. The button is illuminated. Notes: When the START/STOP button is illuminated, the other buttons in the VTR control block are deactivated. To activate the other buttons, first press the START/STOP button to cancel the Recording mode. Some of the VTR control functions of this unit may be disabled depending on the combination of camera and VTR. For details, ask your official Sony representative. j OUTPUT selector Selects the output signal from the connected camera. CAM: Picture output BARS: Colour bar signal TEST: Test signals for a video circuit check (the signal is selected using the RM Configuration Menu). See 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'. k GAIN (master gain) selector Selects the video gain from three values (LOW, MID, HIGH) according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. Normally, these three gain settings are those chosen in the camera set-up. Alternative gain settings may be defined by using the configuration menu of the RM-B150 Operation Panel. See 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'.
A Menu display (8 columns) In normal operation mode, the display illuminates to show the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value only when the shutter control block is operated. When you select the RM Configuration menu, the display shows menu items, set values, or other information depending on operations. B RM Configuration switch Selects the RM Configuration menu. When this switch is pushed in the V direction, the 'Basic menu' is selected. When this switch is pushed in the V direction, while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch at ENTER, the 'Detail menu' is selected. The RM Configuration menu is switched off by pushing this switch in the v direction. C DISPLAY switch For control of the camera's menu. ON: Shows the character display function of the camera. OFF: Shows the character display function of the camera. MENU: Sets the camera into the camera menu mode. D CANCEL/ENTER switch To register or cancel a menu item or value selection. E Menu select knob (rotary encoder) In normal operation, the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value can be adjusted with this knob. In the camera's menu mode the knob is used for camera menu operations. On the RM Configuration menu, turn the knob to select menu categories, subcategories, set items, set values and other information on the menu display. For operations on the RM Configuration menu, see 'Settings on the RM Configuration Menu'. For operations on the camera's menu, refer to the Operation Manual of the camera or the System Manual.
1 CAMERA connector 2 MONITOR connector
To select the Detail menu Push the RM Configuration switch in the V direction while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER. The menu display shows 'Mode Set' (the first category of the Detail menu). Note The RM Diag category of the Detail menu is used to display various information, to check operations and reset the menu. For items for which the operation procedure differs, the procedure is discussed in the corresponding 'Contents' column of the following table. To make settings on the menu
1. Turn the menu select knob until the required

category appears on the display. Example: Mode Set t ... t VR Setup
CAMERA MONITOR
2. Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to

register your selection made in step 1. The first subcategory of the selected category appears. Example: Knee If there is no subcategory belonging to the selected category, the first setting (or display) item of that category appears on the display (proceed to step 5).
3. Turn the menu select knob until the desired

subcategory appears on the display. Example: Knee t ... t Iris

register your selection made in step 3. (Pushing toward CANCEL reverses the operation.) The first setting item of the selected subcategory and its current setting appear. Example: Ctrl: Abs
a CAMERA connector (8-pin) Connect to the camera using the supplied remote cable. b MONITOR connector (BNC) Connect to a colour monitor to observe the signal from the camera. Settings on the RM Configuration Menu The RM-B150 is provided with an RM Configuration Menu mode. This enables you to select and adjust the function of the buttons and controls on the panel and to check various information. At the beginning of an RM Configuration menu operation, select 'Basic menu' or 'Detail menu' and proceed with operations as desired. Operation For menu operations, use the menu operation block of the unit to start the menu operation To select the Basic menu Push the RM Configuration switch in the V direction. The menu display shows 'Cbl Comp' (the first category of the Basic menu).
5. Turn the menu select knob until the desired setting

(or display) item appears on the display. Example: Ctrl: Abs t ... t Min : Cls For a setting item, make your setting.

register your setting made in step 5.
7. Turn the menu select knob until the desired

category appears on the display. Example: Min : Cls t ... t Min : 22

register your setting made in step 7. (Pushing toward CANCEL cancels the setting in step 7.) To continue setting items, repeat steps 5 to 8. To end the menu operation Push the RM Configuration switch in the v direction. Notes: If an operation has not been made in Menu mode after one minute, the menu automatically exits. Values set on the RM Configuration menu are stored in memory when you exit the menu operation. Be sure to exit the operation before turning the power off.
Basic Menu (An underlined item under 'Setting' indicates the factory setting.) Category Cbl Comp Bright Subcategory Item Len LED Disp Lvl Out Setting 10m, 50m, 100m 10 to 99 (50) 10 to 99 (50) 10 to 99 (50) On, Off Contents Sets the cable length for the cable compensation circuit Sets the brightness of the LEDs on the control panel Sets the brightness of the menu display Sets the sound volume of the buzzer Turns buzzer output on and off
Buzzer
7-15.RM-B750, Hand-held Remote Control Unite

3 PANEL ACTIVE button 4 STANDARD button 5 Spare button 6 Test signal output select buttons 2 MEMORY STICK lamp 1 Memory Stick slot Rubber cap 7 CLOSE button 8 VTR START/STOP button 9 VTR playback control buttons
PANEL STANDARD ACTIVE MEMORY STICK
TEST
BARS
CLOSE
VTR START/STOP
AWB
ABB
WHITE
MONITOR
BLACK
ALARM MENU SELECT
IRIS
qa Menu operation block q; ALARM indicator
qd White balance/black balance control block qs Iris/master black control block
a Memory Stick slot Insert a Memory Stick media card to store setup data, such as reference files and scene files of the video camera or camera control unit. b MEMORY STICK (Memory Stick access) lamp The lamp shows the status of the Memory Stick media card. Off: No Memory Stick is inserted. Lit green: There is a Memory Stick in the slot. In this condition, you can safely eject the Memory Stick. Lit red: Data is being read/written. If you eject the Memory Stick in this condition, the data transfer is not guaranteed. All the data may be lost. c PANEL ACTIVE button Press to select the control mode for the connected camera system. Each time you press the button, the control mode cyclically switches among FULL, PART, and LOCK modes*. FULL mode: All controls from this unit are enabled (panel active status). Both this button and the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control block light. PART mode: Controls only from the iris/master black control block are enabled (iris/master black active status). This button goes dark, but the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE indicator stays lit. LOCK mode: All controls from this unit are disabled (lock status). Both this button and the IRIS/MB
ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control block go dark.

*Using the RM Configuration menu under the Maintenance menu, the function of this button can be changed to switch only between FULL and LOCK modes. The RM Configuration menu operation is possible in any mode.
d STANDARD button When you press this button, the video camera is initialized to its standard state, and the button illuminates for several seconds. If you press the button while lit, the video camera returns to the state before the button was originally pressed. e Spare button For future use. f Test signal output select buttons Press and light up one of these buttons to activate the test signal generator of the video camera and send the respective signals. TEST: To send a signal to test the video circuits. You can select the kind of the test signal to be output using the RM Configuration menu under the Maintenance menu. BARS: To send a colour bar signal Note: The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If the BARS button is lit, press the button to switch it off before pressing the TEST button. Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 107 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
g CLOSE button Press and light the button to close the iris. To release the close mode, press the button again so that it goes dark. h VTR START/STOP button. (Note these functions are designed for operation with camcorders. They can only be used with the BVP-E10 series when docked with a DNV-5 recorder Press and light up this button to start a recording operation. When you press the button when lit, it goes dark, and recording stops. Using the RM Configuration menu under the Maintenance menu, you can assign the CALL button function to this button. In this case, press to send a call signal to the video camera, on which the CALL button illuminates. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the camera control unit light when not lit, or go dark when lit. When the CALL button on the video camera is pressed, the button on this unit illuminates and a buzzer sounds. i VTR playback control buttons Controls VTR playback operations. s (stop) button Press to stop a rewind, fast-forward or playback operation. j (rewind) button
Press and light this button to start a rewind operation. H(play) button Press and light this button to start a playback operation. J(fast forward) button Press and light this button to start a fast-forward operation. 7(recording review) button Press and light this button to execute a recording review operation. Notes: When the VTR START/STOP button is lit, these buttons are deactivated. To activate the buttons, first press the VTR START/STOP button to cancel Recording mode. A part of the VTR control functions of this unit may be disabled depending on the combination of camera and VTR. For details, ask your Sony dealer. j ALARM indicator Flashes or illuminates red when the self-diagnostic function identifies a problem in the camera or CCU system . k Menu operation block
1 RM menu select/camera menu set buttons 2 LCD/touch panel
MONITOR
MENU SELECT
3Control knobs
A RM menu select/camera menu set buttons MONITOR: When this button is unlit, you can select the menus of this unit using the other buttons (RM Menu mode in which the functions indicated on the panel with white characters for the buttons are valid). Press and light this button to display the video signal from the connected camera on the LCD. This also permits the menus of the camera to be operated from this unit (the functions indicated on the panel with blue characters for the buttons and the leftmost control knob are valid). FUNCTION/VF DISP (viewfinder display): With the MONITOR button unlit, the Function menu of this unit appears on the LCD when you press and light this button. With the MONITOR button lit, the character display of the camera is turned on when you press and light this button.
MAINTENANCE/VF MENU (viewfinder menu): With the MONITOR button unlit, the Maintenance menu of this unit appears on the LCD when you press and light this button. With the MONITOR button lit, the unit enters Camera Menu mode when you press and light this button. The main menu of the camera appears on the LCD. SCENE/CANCEL: With the MONITOR button unlit, the Scene File menu of this unit appears on the LCD when you press and light this button. With the MONITOR button lit, you can cancel the setting of the camera menu item selected on the LCD by pressing this button. PAINT/ENTER: With the MONITOR button unlit, the Paint menu of this unit appears on the LCD when you press and light this button. With the MONITOR button lit, you can register the setting of the camera menu item selected on the LCD by pressing this button. When none of the buttons are lit, the status display is obtained.
B LCD/touch panel Normally displays the statuses. When you press and light the MONITOR button, it displays the video signal from the connected camera . In RM Menu or Camera Menu mode, the selected menu is displayed to permit you to operate the menu. C Control knobs (rotary encoders) In RM Menu mode, adjust the selected items on the touch panel. In Camera Menu mode, select and adjust the menu items using the leftmost knob. l Iris/master black control block
4 IRIS/MB ACTIVE indicator 1 AUTO IRIS button 5 MASTER BLACK control
m White balance/black balance control block

1 AWB button
2 ABB button
AWB
ABB
WHITE
3 WHITE controls
BLACK
4 BLACK controls
2 EXT lens extender
3 IRIS control
IRIS
A AUTO IRIS button Press and light the button to automatically adjust the iris according to the subject brightness. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark, and manual iris adjustment is enabled. B EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminates when the lens extender is used on the connected camera. C IRIS control When the AUTO IRIS button is not lit, you can adjust the iris manually by turning the control. When the AUTO IRIS button is lit, you can fineadjust the reference value for automatic iris adjustment in a range of 2f with this control. The adjustment mode of this control is specified at the factory as Absolute mode, which can also be changed to Relative mode using the RM Configuration menu under the Maintenance menu. D IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) indicator Illuminates when the control mode is set as FULL or PART mode with the PANEL ACTIVE button. When this indicator is lit, iris/master black controls from this unit are enabled. E MASTER BLACK control Manually adjusts the master black level. The adjustment mode of this control is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu under the Maintenance menu.
A AWB (auto white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button illuminates during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when lit, the automatic adjustment is canceled, and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. B ABB (auto black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button illuminates during adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when lit, the automatic adjustment is canceled, and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. Note: When the adjustment mode of the BLACK controls is specified as Absolute mode, automatic black balance adjustment with ABB button is disabled. C WHITE (white balance) controls Adjust the R/B white balance. The adjustment mode of these controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu under the Maintenance menu. D BLACK (black balance) controls Adjust the R/B black balance. The adjustment mode of these controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu under the Maintenance menu.
1 CAMERA connector 2 MONITOR connector
Cover fixing screw
a CAMERA connector (8-pin) Connect to the camera using the supplied remote control cable. b MONITOR connector (BNC) Connect to a colour monitor to observe the signal from the camera. Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 109 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
7-16.BVF-77/77CE, Electronic Viewfinder

7-16-1Appearance
1 PEAKING control 2 PEAKING selector 3 Tilt knob
7 8 9
Red tally lamps BRIGHT control Tilt lock lever
PEAKING
BRIGHT
R
ON
OFF
CONTRAST
POWER ON
SCAN SIZE NORMAL
R
OFF
R
NARROW
4 Lift-lock release knob 5 POWER switch 6 Green tally lamps
10 11
CONTRAST control SCAN SIZE switch
12
Up-tally lamp
Note In order to use the BVF-77CE viewfinder with the BVPE10 series camera, the CA-905F or CA-905L large lens adaptor and BKP-9057 viewfinder support are required a PEAKING control Used to adjust the sharpness (peaking) of the picture when the PEAKING selector is set to ON, to help ensure accurate focusing of the lens. Compensation increases as the control is turned clockwise. The compensation ranges from 0 to more than 15 dB.
b PEAKING selector Allows control compensation with the PEAKING control when this selector is set to ON. When it is set to OFF, the PEAKING control does not function, and compensation is equivalent to 0 dB. c Tilt knob Adjusts the tilt friction. d Lift-lock release knob Allows the viewfinder to be raised from the transport position (the lower position) to the middle or top position (the angle of the viewfinder is only adjustable at these positions). Adjust the height of the viewfinder while pulling the release knob.
e POWER switch ON: The power of the viewfinder is turned on. (Normal position) OFF: The power of the viewfinder is turned off. f Green tally lamps These illuminate when the camera receives a green tally signal. The brightness of these lamps is adjustable with an internal control. g Red tally lamps These illuminate when the camera receives a red tally signal. The brightness of these lamps is adjustable with an internal control. h BRIGHT control Used to adjust the picture brightness. This control has no effect on the video output signal from the camera.
i Tilt lock lever Pushing the lever forward toward the lens locks the viewfinder. Moving it back toward the camera operator allows the viewfinder to be tilted up and down. The tilt friction may be adjusted with the tilt knob (3). j CONTRAST control Adjusts the picture contrast. k SCAN SIZE switch NORMAL: The screen size is normal. NARROW: The screen size is 80 % of normal. l Up-tally lamp Functions the same as the red tally lamps on the viewfinder screen. This lamp does not illuminate when the UP TALLY switch on the camera is set to OFF. To adjust the brightness of this lamp, refer to the manual for the camera. One of the supplied number plates (0 through 9) can be attached to this lamp.
7-16-2Adjusting the Angle of the Viewfinder
60
25
25
60
7-17.BVF-55/ 55CE, Electronic Viewfinder

7-17-1Appearances
1G TALLY lamp 2R TALLY lamp 3Up-tally lamp
4Tilt lock lever
8PEAKING switch and knob 7BRIGHT knob 6CONTRAST knob
512-pin connector
9Tilt knob
q;UP TALLY switch
qaUP TALLY DIMMER control
a G TALLY lamp (green) Illuminates when the green tally signal is input. b R TALLY lamp (red) Illuminates when the red tally signal is input. c Up-tally lamp (red) Set UP TALLY switch to ON. The lamp illuminates in the same way as the R tally lamp. The supplied number plate can be attached to this. d Tilt lock lever Fixes any tilting position. e 12-pin connector Connects to a video camera's VF connector, using the supplied connecting cable. Power and video/tally signals are supplied through this connector. 112 Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
f CONTRAST knob *1) Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder picture. g BRIGHT knob *1) Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder picture. h PEAKING switch and knob *1) Setting this switch to ON and turning the knob increases the sharpness of the viewfinder image. Used to assist the focus on the video camera. The peaking control can be turned off by a control signal sent from the camera even if the PEAKING switch is set to ON. i Tilt knob Adjusts the tilt friction. j UP TALLY switch When this switch is set to ON, the UP TALLY lamp illuminates in the same way as the R tally lamp.
k UP TALLY DIMMER control Adjusts the brightness of the UP TALLY lamp.
*1) These controls do not affect the output signal of the video camera.
7-18.BVF-20W/20WCE, Electronic Viewfinder

7-18-1Appearances
1Plug Viewfinder cable 2Stopper 3Tally indicator
Microphone holder
Eyecup
4Diopter adjustment ring
5Tally indicator 6PEAKING control 7CONTRAST control
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
8BRIGHT control
DISPLAY
ON OFF ON OFF MOMENT
ZEBRA
TALLY
HIGH OFF LOW
9TALLY switch
q;ZEBRA switch qaDISPLAY switch
a Plug Connect to the VF connector on the camera. b Stopper Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camera when it is slid from side to side. c Tally indicator (rear) Illuminates up when the camera receives a tally control signal. This indicator can be covered when not in use. d Diopter adjustment ring Allows for optimal adjustment of focus. e Tally indicator (front) Illuminates up when the camera receives a tally control signal. Turn the TALLY switch 9 OFF when not in use. The brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY switch 9.
f PEAKING control Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camera. g CONTRAST control Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camera. h BRIGHT control Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camera. i TALLY switch Controls the tally indicator 5 located on the front of the viewfinder. HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to high. OFF: The tally indicator is disabled. LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low. Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 113 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
j ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch Controls the zebra pattern display on the viewfinder screen as follows: ON: A zebra pattern appears and stays. OFF: The zebra pattern disappears. MOMENT: A zebra pattern appears and stays for about five seconds.
k DISPLAY switch Enables or disables the marker indication when the indication is set to on with the camera.
7-19.CA-905K/F/L, Large Lens Adaptor

7-19-1Lens Attachment Section (Front) and Connectors
BKP-9057 Viewfinder Saddle(not supplied)
qaLens connector q;REMOTE cable
9CA cable 8Accessory bracket 7Number plate holder
Lens mouth
1Lens lock 2Lens lock holding knob 3Lens connector 4Cable clamp 5Lens mode switch 6CCU connector
a Lens lock Secures the lens by the tongue-like protrusion at the lens bottom. b Lens lock holding knob Secures the lens lock. Turn clockwise to tighten, and counterclockwise to loosen. c Lens connector (36-pin) Connect to the connector on the lens. d Cable clamp Secures the camera cable. The diameter of the cable with a diameter of 8 to 15 mm should be used with the cable clamp. e Lens mode switch Selects one of the two lens communication modes. During normal operation, set to NORMAL. During use of a serial communication lens, set to SERIAL. f CCU (camera control unit) connector (triax connector: Kings type for the CA-905K, Fischer type for the CA-905F; fibre connector: LEMO type for the CA-905L) Connects through a triax cable or fibre cable (not supplied) to the CAMERA connector on the CCU550D/550DP/700A/700AP.
g Number plate holder Fit the supplied number plates. h Accessory bracket Attach an optional accessory, such as a BKP-7911/ 7912 Script Holder. i CA (camera adaptor) cable (triax connector: Kings type for the CA-905K, Fischer type for the CA-905F; fibre connector: LEMO type for the CA-905L) Connect to the CCU connector on the camera adaptor.
j REMOTE cable (8-pin) Connect to the REMOTE connector on the camera adaptor. k Lens connector (12-pin) Connect to the LENS connector of the camera.
7-19-2Camera-mounting Section (Inner Base) and the Optional BKP-9057 Viewfinder Saddle
1VF (viewfinder) connector 2Viewfinder mount 3Viewfinder release button
q;Camera mount
4Pan-lock lever
9Camera mount release lever

5VF connecting cable
8Camera mount slide lever
7Number plate holder
6Saddle lock knob
a VF (viewfinder) connector Connect to the camera connector on a viewfinder. b Viewfinder mount Attach the viewfinder. c Viewfinder release button Push this button to disengage the viewfinder d Pan-lock lever Turn counterclockwise to tighten the viewfinder. Turn clockwise to loosen the viewfinder. e VF connecting cable (supplied with the BKP9057) (20-pin) Connects to the VF connector (20-pin) on the camera. f Saddle lock knob Locks the saddle so it does not topple down. Turn counterclockwise to tighten the saddle, or clockwise to loosen it. g Number plate holder Fit the supplied number plates. h Camera mount slide lever Pull this lever to slide the camera mount forward and backward. i Camera mount release lever To remove the camera from the unit, push this lever while pushing the safety lever (on the left) rightward. j Camera mount Fit the camera. Slide to the front and rear.
7-19-3Rear control panel

CA-905K/905F or CA-905L (during use with the CA950/950P only) with PinP switch sticker attached
1 POWER indicator 2 Video signal select buttons 3 H-POSI control 4 V-POSI control 5 WIDTH control 6 HEIGHT control 7 CURSOR STORE button 8 RET button 9 RET 1 button
POWER
R
2 3 4 1 5
G
H-POSI
B
V-POSI
RET
RET 1
FILTER LOCAL
q; Back tally lamp qa CURSOR ON button

STORE
wh FILTER LOCAL button wg ND filter control

CENTER SAFETY MARKER ZONE
ON ON OFF OFF
ND
B C D A E WIDTH HEIGHT
CORSOR 1 2 VF DETAIL 3 ON
CC
VF SCAN
16:9
UP TALLY
ON
SCREEN DISPLAY SIZE ON MARKER

ON OFF OFF MENU
MENU SELECT
ON
qs CURSOR 1, 2, and 3 buttons qd PinP switch (when the BKP-9057 is installed) qf VF DETAIL control qg VF DETAIL switch
4:3
OFF
CANCEL
ENTER
OFF
wf CC filter control wd CENTRE MARKER switch ws SAFETY ZONE switch wa MIX VF switch w; UP TALLY switch ql Spare switch
qh MENU SELECT knob qj MENU SELECT switch qk DISPLAY switch
POWER
R
2 3 4 1 5
G
H-POSI
B
V-POSI
RET
RET 1
FILTER LOCAL
ND
B C D A E WIDTH HEIGHT STORE
CORSOR 1 2 VF DETAIL 3 ON
CC
CENTER SAFETY MARKER ZONE
ON ON
VF SCAN
16:9
UP TALLY
ON
SCREEN SIZE DISPLAY ON MARKER

ON OFF OFF MENU
MENU SELECT
ON
wkAssignable switch
CANCEL ENTER OFF
OFF
OFF
4:3
OFF
wjSCREEN SIZE MARKER switch
a POWER indicator Illuminates as follows to show the power-supply status. Green: Power is supplied to the camera. Orange: Power is supplied to the camera, however the VF PW button of the MSU-700 or RCP-700 Series unit is set to off and power is not supplied to the viewfinder. Not lit: Power is not supplied to the camera. b Video signal select buttons Select the video signals (R, G, and B) displayed on the viewfinder. When no button is pressed, the following signals are output: When a monochrome viewfinder is used: The Y signal is output to the viewfinder. When a colour veiwfinder is used: The R, G, and B signals are output to the viewfinder, and a colour picture appears on the viewfinder. c H-POSI (horizontal position) control Adjusts the horizontal position of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen. d V-POSI (vertical position) control Adjusts the vertical position of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen.
e WIDTH control Adjusts the width of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen. f HEIGHT control Adjusts the height of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen. g CURSOR STORE button Press to store the size and position of the box cursor by adjusting H-POSI, V-POSI, WIDTH, and HEIGHT control. Note If the CURSOR ON button is not lit, the data cannot be stored. h RET (return video) button Push this button in to display in the viewfinder the return video signal (2, 3, or 4) selected on the CA-950/ 950P/ 570/ 570P. Push again to display the video signal from the camera. i RET 1 (return video 1) button Push this button to display the return video 1 signal on the viewfinder screen. Push again to view the video signal from the camera.
j Back tally lamp Illuminates when a red tally signal is supplied. When the CALL button on the MSU-700 or RCP-700 Series unit is pressed, this lamp, illuminates (or goes out if it is already lit). Attach the supplied number plate to show the camera number. k CURSOR ON button Press and light up this button to display the box cursor on the viewfinder screen. Press this button again and make the button go out, and the box cursor disappears. l CURSOR (cursor memory) 1, 2, and 3 buttons Press one of these buttons with the CURSOR STORE button blinking, and the size and position of the box cursor displayed on the viewfinder screen is recalled or stored. Three different box cursor settings can be stored using these buttons. You can recall the stored size and position of the box cursor by merely pressing the corresponding button. Note When the CURSOR 1, 2, or 3 button is lit, the HPOSI, V-POSI, WIDTH, and HEIGHT controls are disabled. m PinP (Picture-in-Picture) switch Used to display a small picture on a viewfinder screen. POSITION: The position of the subscreen moves each time you move the switch from ON to this position. ON: Enters PinP mode. When neither the RET 1 or RET button is depressed, you can monitor the camera's signal on the viewfinder screen and the last selected return video signal on the small picture. Press either the RET 1 or RET button to switch the pictures on the viewfinder screen and the small picture. OFF: The subscreen does not appear. Two other modes can also be selected. Note "Picture in Picture" function of the 7-inch viewfinder (BVF-77/77CE, BVF-7700/7700P) does not work when the BKP-9057 (Viewfinder Saddle for 7-inch Type Viewfinder) is used. n VF DETAIL (viewfinder detail) control Adjusts the amount of detail of the picture on the viewfinder screen when the VF DETAIL switch is set to ON. This has no effect on the output signal of the camera. Notes The viewfinder detail control function has no effect on a return video signal and a picture on a subscreen of Picture-in-Picture function. VF DETAIL control does not work in the following conditions: - The BKP-9057 is attached to this adaptor o VF DETAIL (viewfinder detail adjustment) switch ON: Emphasizes the contours of the image on the viewfinder screen. When the switch is set to this position, you can adjust the amount of detail using the VF DETAIL control. OFF: Disables contour emphasis. Note VF DETAIL switch does not work in the following conditions: - The BKP-9057 is attached to this adaptor p MENU SELECT knob For menu item selection and value setting on the viewfinder screen.
q MENU SELECT switch ENTER: Activates the selection made by the MENU SELECT knob. CANCEL: Cancels the selection made by the MENU SELECT knob and restores the previously selected menu item. r DISPLAY switch Used to display the status of the switch settings, automatic adjustment items, and results on the viewfinder screen. ON: The display function is enabled. OFF: The display function is disabled. MENU: A menu for setting the displaying items and functions appears. s Spare switch t UP TALLY switch Enables the lens tally lamp, and external tally lamp on the viewfinder when a red tally signal is supplied to this camera system. ON: The tally lamps light. OFF: The tally lamps do not light. u MIX VF (mix viewfinder) switch Selects the picture in the viewfinder when the RET 1 or RET button is depressed. ON: When the RET 1 or RET button is depressed, the mixed picture of the camera output signal and the return video signal (return video 1 or the return video 2) can be monitored on the viewfinder screen. The mixing ratio can be adjusted with the control on the internal board of the CCU-900/ 900P/ 700A/ 700AP. OFF: When the RET 1 button or RET button is pushed, only the return video 1 signal or return video 2 signal can be seen. Notes MIX VF switch does not work when the CCU-550D/ 550DP is connected. v SAFETY ZONE switch ON: A box cursor (safety zone) indicating 90% of the picture appears on the viewfinder screen. OFF: A safety zone does not appear on the viewfinder screen. You can change the size of the safety zone to 80% with a menu on the camera. w CENTRE MARKER switch ON: A white cross (centre marker) indicating the centre of the viewfinder screen appears on the viewfinder screen. You can adjust the position of the centre marker to the centre of the lens to be used. The adjusted position can be stored in a lens file. OFF: The centre marker is disabled. x CC (colour temperature conversion) filter control Selects a filter suitable for the lighting conditions when the FILTER LOCAL button is lit. Not applicable to BVP-E10/BVP-E10P cameras y ND filter control Selects the ND filter when the FILTER LOCAL button is lit. Not applicable to BVP-E10/BVP-E10P cameras z FILTER LOCAL (filter local control) button Press and light up this button to enable switching the CC and ND filters using the CC and ND filter controls. Press this button again so it goes out to return filter Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 117 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
control to the master setup unit or remote control panel. Not applicable to BVP-E10/BVP-E10P cameras wjSCREEN SIZE MARKER switch wj Enables a marker to define the picture edges on the viewfinder screen. ON (X): Display area is bounded by two dark margins. ON(S): Display area is bounded by two white lines. OFF: No marker is displayed. wkAssignable switch wk No function
1 8
Menu Settings
8-1. MSU Security Settings

The MSU-700A/750 has an Engineer Mode, which allows you to assign cameras to be controlled from the MSU-700A/750 and to limit the operations on the MSU700A/750. To authorize specific persons to use this Engineer Mode, specify a security code in advance. Once the security code is set, the MSU-700A/750 will enter into the Engineer Mode only when this security code is input.
3. Press [Security]. The Security Menu display

appears.
Security Menu
Exit
8-1-1 Specifying the Security Code

You can set, change, or delete the security code for entering into the Engineer Mode as follows:
Engineer Mode
8-1-1-1 To set a new security code

Menu operation block (Example:MSU-700A) Configuration Menu
MODE
4. Press [Engineer Mode]. The Security Menu items

now appear.
Security Menu
Configuration Menu
Exit
Engineer Mode
Camera
MULTI
CCU MSU
Status
CNU
Code Change
CARD
2
Engineer Mode
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
PAINT
5. Press [Code Change]. The numeric keys and field

for entering a New Code No. are displayed. Note At the factory the unit is set in a mode in which no security code is used. To use a security code, it is necessary to enable the use of a security code. See "To enable to cancel the security code"
Code Menu Security Change 7 8 9 New Code Engineer Mode
Status No: Code Change
Exit
1. Press and light the CONFIG button. The

configuration menu appears on the display.
4 5 6 1 2 3 0
2. Press [MSU]. The MSU Configuration Menu

appears.
Engineer Mode
MSU Configuration
MSU SW MSU Set Adjusting Date / Time
Exit
OK
Cancel
6. Enter the desired code (1 to 8 digits) using the

numeric keys, then press [OK]. Note Each digit you input will be displayed as an asterisk. The message "Retype New Code No." is then displayed.
Security
7. Enter the same code you entered in step 5 once

again, then press [OK]. The security menu is restored.
8. Press [Exit]. The specific security code is now

registered. When you next press [Engineer Mode] on the security menu, the numeric keys appear and the code input is required. The MSU-700A/750 will enter the Engineer Mode, if you enter the code properly and press [OK].
120 Chapter 8 Menu Settings BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
8-1-1-2 To change the security code

When the registered security code must be changed, proceed as follows.
Code Change
Old Code No: ******** New Code No:
1. Display the security menu items by following steps

1 through 3 of the above procedure for setting a new code.
7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0
2. Press [Engineer Mode]. The numeric keys and

field for entering the Code No. are displayed.
Engineer Mode
Code No:
7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0
OK
Cancel
6. Specify a New Code No. by following steps 6

through 8 of the previous procedure.
8-1-1-3 To override the security code

To enable the Engineer Mode, a security code is required. If the operator forgets the security code, or if an urgent Engineer Mode adjustment becomes necessary when the authorized operator is absent, the security code can be canceled by the following procedure:
OK
Cancel
3. Enter the current security code using the numeric

keys, then press [OK]. Note Each digit you input will be displayed as an asterisk. Security menu items now appear.
1. Turn on the power to the MSU-700A/750 while

holding PARA, PANELACTIVE, and camera select button 1 pressed. The numeric keys appear on the display.
PARA button
WAVEFORM MONITOR
Security Menu
Engineer Mode Status Code Change
Exit
MSU-700A
CC
PARA
MULTI TALLY
PANEL ACTIVE
1
EXPAND
10
11
Engineer Mode
Camera select button 1 PANEL ACTIVE button
4. Press [Code Change]. The numeric keys and field

- for entering the Old Code No. are displayed.
PARA button PANEL ACTIVE button
MSU-750
PANEL PARA EXPAND ACTIVE
MULTI TALLY
Code Change
Old Code No:
07
08
09
10
11
12
7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0
Camera select button 1
MULTI TALLY
01
02
03
04
05
06
The unmeric keys appear on the display.

Cancel
OK
2. Press the [0] [3] [5] [9] of the numeric keys to enter
"0359" in the field for entering the security code, then press [OK]. The Engineer Protection display now appears.
5. Enter the old code, then press [OK]. The field for
entering a New Code No. now appears.
Chapter 8 Menu Settings 121 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Engineer Protection
Protection Code Enable Code Delete
Exit
MSU Configuration
Exit
Security
3. To temporarily disable the security code, press

[Code Enable] to change it from inverse video to unhighlighted display. (Once you press it again to return it to inverse video, the security code is enabled.)
3. Press [Security]. The Security Menu display

appears.
Security Menu
Exit
4. To delete the security code, press [Code Delete].

The message "Code Delete, OK?" is displayed, press [OK] to return to the Engineer Protection display.
5. Press [Exit].
Note At the factory, the unit is set in a mode in which no security code is used.
Engineer Mode
8-1-2 Setting the Security Status

When in the Engineer Mode, it is possible to set restrictions which limit control capability of the MSU700A/750 in the normal operational mode. Operation Proceed as follows:
Menu operation block(Example:MSU-700A) Configuration Menu
MODE
4. Press [Engineer Mode]. The numeric keys and

field for entering the Code No. are displayed.
Engineer Mode
Code No:
7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0
Configuration Menu
Camera
MULTI
CCU MSU
OK
Cancel
CNU
CARD
CONFIG
5. Enter the security code using the numeric keys,

then press [OK]. Note Each digit you input will be displayed as an asterisk. The Security Menu items now appear.
MAINTENANCE
FILE
PAINT
1. Press to light the CONFIG button. 2. Press [MSU]. The MSU Configuration Menu
appears.
Status
Security Menu
Engineer Mode Code Change
Exit
Engineer Mode
6. Press [Status]. The display changes to the Security

Status setting display.
Configuration Menu
MODE
Security Status
Engineer Mode Ref. Enable Lens Enable OHB Enable
Exit
Configuration Menu
Camera
MULTI
CCU MSU
CNU
CARD
CONFIGURATION
MAINTENANCE
Engineer Mode
FILE
Full Lock
View Mode
Paint Only
PAINT
(Example:MSU-700A)
7. Setting the status for control from the MSU-700A/

750. [Ref. Enable]: Set it to inverse video to enable access to the reference file (Factory setting: ON). [Lens Enable]: Set it to inverse video to enable access to the lens file (Factory setting: ON). [OHB Enable]: Set it to inverse video to enable acces to the OHB file (Factory setting: ON). [Full Lock]: Set it to inverse video to fully disable the MSU-700A/750 (Factory setting: OFF) [View Mode]: Set it to inverse video to disable all adjustment operations from the MSU-700A/750 (Factory setting: OFF). (Only the display and indicators will be active. This mode allows operators to view all settings, but no adjustment is posible.) [Paint Only]: Set it to inverse video to enable the paint control only (Factory setting: OFF).
1. Press to light the CONFIG button on the menu

control block to call the Configuration menu on the display.
2. Press [CNU]. The CNU Configuration menu

appears.
CNU Configuration
RCP Assign
Engineer Mode MSU Assign
Exit
8. When the status settings are completed, press

[Exit]. The Security menu display in step 5 is restored.
9. Press [Engineer Mode] to exit the Engineer Mode.

The statuses specified in step 7 will be applied. Note All operations are enabled in the Engineer Mode regardless of the above status settings.
Note The item [MSU Assign] is displayed only when the Engineer Mode is active.
3. Press [MSU Assign]. The MSU Assignment menu

now appears. Simultaneously, the character display of the CNU- 700 changes to the MSU Assignment mode. Using the four arrow buttons on the MSU Assignment menu (MSU-700A/ 750), move the cursor on the character display of the CNU-700 to the point where you wish to change the assignment.
MSU Assignment menu
8-1-3 MSU Assignment

When multiple MSU-700A/ 750 units are used in the same system, it is possible to assign specific cameras to be selected or controlled from each MSU-700A/ 750. This assignment operation is only enabled in the Engineer Mode. Turn on the CONFIG/ MSU / SECURITY/ ENGINEER Mode to activate the Engineer Mode. Operation Proceed as follows:
MSU Assignment
Exit
Set Cancel
Default
Character display of the CNU-700 (in MSU Assignment mode
To resume the initial assignment Press [Default] on the MSU Assignment menu.
MSU assignment
OFF ON
SUPERVISER MSU mode LOCAL MSU mode 1-6 7 - 12 CAMERA SELECT /ACTIVE assignment
6. When your settings are completed, press [Set] on

the MSU Assignment menu with the cursor on [Ret] in the upper right of the CNU character display. (To cancel the settings, press [Cancel].) The character display of the CNU-700 returns to its previous status (MSU Assignment display). In SUPERVISOR MSU mode, perform the settings for the cameras of other groups in the same manner. When the MSU assignment is completed Press [Exit] on the MSU Assignment menu.
NEXT
4. Select the control mode.

SUPERVISOR MSU mode: To control all the cameras connected to all the CNUs (Camera Network Unit) in the same system. LOCAL MSU mode: To control only the cameras connected to the same CNU (Camera Network Unit) as the MSU-700A/750 being operated. Move the cursor to the required position and press [Set] on the MSU Assignment menu to switch between modes. 5. Select the camera group to be set. In LOCAL MSU mode, only the group of cameras 1 through 12 (standard) can be selected. When the SUPERVISOR mode is active, you can select each camera group in the system from the lower rows on the character display of the CNU-700. Pressing [Set] on the MSU Assignment menu with the cursor on [NEXT] calls up the setting display for the selected camera group.
Example: Setting display in LOCAL MSU mode
8-1-3-1 To restore operations of the MSU700A/750

If the MSU-700A/750 has become inoperative by disabling the selection/control for all the connected cameras, change the MSU assignment using the internal switches of the CNU-700 as follows:
AT
+5 MODE
UP
CHARACTER PHASE
DOWN SET CANCEL
SET/CANCEL switch UP/DOWN switch MODE switch
1. Set the MODE switch to 3.

The message "MSU Assignment" appears on the screen.
MSU assignment [LOCAL]

1CAM Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para 7CAM Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para Camera Select Active/Para
Ret
2. Push the SET/CANCEL switch (S6) toward SET. The same MSU Assignment display as that in step 3 on the previous page appears. Each press of the UP/ DOWN switch (S5) toward DOWN moves the cursor on the display to the right, or down when it reaches the right edge of the frame. Each press of the switch toward UP moves the cursor to the left, or up when it reaches the left edge of the frame. 3. Move the cursor to the desired position, then push
the SET/CANCEL switch (S6) toward SET.
2CAM
8CAM
3CAM
9CAM
4. Repeatedly push the UP/DOWN switch (S5) toward

UP until the cursor reaches the SAVE position outside the frame.
4CAM
10CAM
5CAM
11CAM
6CAM
12CAM
5. Push the SET/CANCEL switch (S6) towards SET. The assignment set in steps 3 and 4 is written to nonvolatile memory. 6. Return the MODE switch to 0.
5. Select the control functions for each camera.

Camera Select: Selection by the corresponding camera select button on the MSU-700A/750 Active/Para: Control from the MSU-700A/750 in Panel Active/Parallel mode. Each item is on (selection/control enabled) when the characters are shown in black, and off (selection/control disabled) when the characters are shown in white. Each time [Set] is pressed on the MSU Assignment menu with the cursor on the item turns it on or off. Caution Be sure to enable the camera selection for at least one camera. If selection/control is disabled for all the connected cameras, the MSU-700A/750 becomes inoperative and the MSU Assignment mode can no longer be selected. If this occurs, change the MSU assignment as described in "To restore operations of the MSU-700A/750" on the next page. 124 Chapter 8 Menu Settings BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
8-1-4 Setting the Operating Conditions of the MSU

By using the MSU Configuration menu the user can also set the built-in clock of the MSU-700A/750 and adjust various conditions of the MSU-700A/750, such as the sound volume of the warning buzzer and the brightness of the lamp and EL display.
Date/Time Set
1999/ 7 /1 (WED) 11: 47: 27
Exit
8-1-4-1 To display the MSU Configuration menu

Date Configuration Menu
MODE
Time Month Day
Set
Cancel
Year
1998
Configuration Menu
Camera
MULTI
CCU MSU
CNU
CARD
CONFIG
(2) Set the Year, Month, and Day with the left three control knobs. (3) Press [Set]. The set date becomes valid. To restore the previous setting, press [Cancel] instead of [Set]. Date/Time Set Exit
MAINTENANCE
3. To set the time:

(1) Press [Time].
FILE
PAINT
(Example:MSU-700A)
Date/Time Set
1998/ 7 /1 (WED) 11: 47: 51
Exit
1. Press to light the CONFIG button.

The Configuration Menu appears on the display.
2. Press [MSU].
The MSU Configuration menu appears.
Date Time
Set Second
Cancel
MSU Configuration
Exit
Hour
Minute
11
47
51
Security
(2) Set the Hour, Minute, and Second with the left three control knobs. (3) Press [Set] in synchronization with a time signal. The set time becomes valid. To resume the previous setting, press [Cancel] in place of [Set]. When the clock setting is completed Press [Exit] to leave this menu.
8-1-4-2 To set the built-in clock

The MSU-700A/750 has a built-in clock to record the date and time when reference and scene files are saved to IC memory cards. To set the clock, proceed as follows.
8-1-4-3 To adjust the buzzer sound

A buzzer sounds on the MSU-700A/750 when it receives a call signal or when a panel control is operated. When required, you may turn on/off the buzzer or adjust the sound volume. To adjust the buzzer, proceed as follows:
1. Press [Date/Time] on the MSU Configuration menu.

The current setting is displayed on the Data/Time Set menu.
1. Press [MSU Adjusting] on the MSU Configuration

menu. The MSU adjustment menu appears.
Date / Time Set

1998/ 7 /1 (WED) 11: 47: 00
Exit
Clear Auto Iris Buzzer LED Bright LED Disp EL Bright Bright
Exit 1 1
Date
Time
2. To set the date:

(1) Press [Date] to set it to inverse video. Chapter 8 Menu Settings 125 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Note [LED Disp Bright] is displayed with the MSU-750 only.
Clear
Home 1 1
2. Press [Buzzer] to set it to inverse video.

The lower half of the display becomes the Buzzer Volume Level adjustment display.
/
Buzzer
LED Bright
LED Disp EL Bright Bright
Clear
Home 1 1
LED Brightness
Buzzer
LED Bright
Switch
Tally
Other LED
Master
72
78
93
78
Buzzer Volume Level Call Touch Switch Buzzer Click Click Touch Switch All Off Master
3. Adjust the brightness with the three corresponding

control knobs. Switch: Brightness of the built-in LEDs of the control buttons Tally: Brightness of the built-in LEDs of the camera number/tally indication window Other LED: Brightness of the other LED indicator, such as those of the camera select block and the ACCESS indicator The master brightness can be adjusted with the rightmost control knob. When the adjustment is completed Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu, and press [Exit] to release the menu operation.
Call
30
85
68
66
3. Adjust the levels with the three control knobs.

Call: volume of the buzzer when a call signal is received Touch: volume of the buzzer when a button displayed on the EL menu display is operated Switch: volume of the buzzer when a button on the control panel is operated. The master volume can be adjusted with the rightmost control knob.
8-1-4-4 To turn on/off the buzzers independently

Press the corresponding button. When it is in inverse video, the buzzer is on. [Call Buzzer]: For the buzzer sound when a call signal is received [Touch Click]: For the buzzer sound when a button displayed on the menu display is operated [Switch Click]: For the buzzer sound when a button on the panel is operated
8-1-4-7 To adjust the brightness of the EL display

You can adjust the brightness of the display of the menu control block. To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows.

menu to display the MSU Adjustment menu.
2. Press [EL Bright] to set it to inverse video. The

lower half of the display becomes the EL Display adjustment display.
8-1-4-5 To turn off all the buzzers

Press [All Off]. When the adjustment is completed Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu, and press [Exit] to release the menu operation.
Clear
Home 1 1
Buzzer
LED Bright
8-1-4-6 To adjust the brightness of the LEDs

You can adjust the brightness of the LEDs of the panel buttons and camera number/tally indication window. To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows.
Level
EL Display Brightness

menu to display the MSU adjustment menu.
50
3. Adjust the brightness with the leftmost control knob.
When the adjustment is completed Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu, and press [Exit] to leave this menu.
2. Press [LED Bright] to set it to inverse video. The

lower half of the display becomes the LED Brightness adjustment display.
8-1-4-8 To adjust the brightness of the LED camera number displays (MSU-750 only)
You can adjust the brightness of the LED displays (camera number indicators) on the control panel. To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows.

menu to display the MSU Adjustment menu.
2. Press [LED Disp Bright] to set it to inverse video.

The lower half of the display becomes the LED Display Brightness adjustment display.
Clear Home 1 1
Buzzer
LED Bright
LED Display Brightness
Level
50
3. Adjust the brightness with the leftmost control knob.
When the adjustment is completed Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu, and press [Exit] to leave this menu.
8-1-4-9 To set the screen saver

The screen saver can be activated to protect the menu display when the MSU-700A/750 is not operated for a certain time. The screen saver can be turned on and off as required, and the time to activate it can be adjusted. To set the screen saver, proceed as follows.
1. Press [MSU SW Set] on the MSU Configuration

menu. The MSU SW Setting display appears.
MSU SW Setting
PIX/WF Syncro
ON
Exit
PIX/WF All Mode

ON
PIX/WF Control Mode

Direct Alternate
Screen Saver
Wait Time
ON 5
[min]
Test SW Mode
Saw 3 Step 10 Step
Screen saver setting area
Note The Test SW Mode Setting area is displayed with the MSU-750 only.
2. Press [ON] to set it to inverse video to activate the

screen saver.
3. When the screen saver is turned on, set the wait

time (in units of minutes) until it activates by pressing f or F. When the adjustment is completed Press [Exit] to leave this menu.
8-2. Stand-alone Viewfinder Menu Tables for the BVP-E10 Series

8-2-1 Menu Items - Operation Menu
MAINTENANCE Menu Menu <TEST/VF OUT> Page Items: default setting 1 TEST OUT : ENC TEST CHARA : ON VF OUT :Y MIX VF : OFF CHARACTER : VF SYNC <CURSOR> 2 CURSOR : OFF H POSITION : 50 W POSITION : 50 H WIDTH : 50 V HEIGHT : 50 <ZEBRA/VF DETAIL> 3 ZEBRA : ON : 1&2 ZEBRA1 LEVE : 75% WIDTH : 10% ZEBRA2 LEVEL : 100% VF DTL : ON VF DTL GAIN : 20 <MARKER> 4 SAFETY ZONE : OFF : 90% : NORMAL ASPECTIND : OFF : .4:3. CENTER MARKER POSITION V POSITION EX ZOOM DISP FOCUS ND CC IRIS WHITE 5600K GAIN SHUTT RETURN ATW SCENE MESSAG < ! IND> 6 ND CC WHITE 5600K GAIN SHUTTER EXTENDER FORMAT 16:9/4:3 GAIN [L] [M] [H] WHITE [B] OUTPUT [DCC] RE.ROTATION : ON :0 :0 : ON : OFF : LEFT : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON : ALL [IND] [NORMAL] : ON 1 - - : ON - B - : ON - A B : ON OFF : ON L - : ON OFF : ON OFF : ON 59.95I(NTSC)/ 50I(PAL) : ON 16:9 : 0dB : 9dB : 18dB :B : AUTO KNEE : STD Setting values ENC/Y/R/G/B/RETURN/VF ON/OFF Y/R/G/B/COLOR ON/OFF VF/TEST ON/OFF 0 to 99 0 to 99 0 to 99 0 to 99 ON/OFF 1/2/1&2 50 to 109% 0 to 30% 50 to 109% ON/OFF 0 to 99 ON/OFF 80/90 NORMAL/ASPECT LINE/MASK/LINE&MASK/OFF 15:9 /14:9/13:9/4:3/- (BVP-E10WS/E10WSP only) ON/OFF -99 to 99 -99 to 99 3S/ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF LEFT/RIGT (only for the lenses with this function) 3S/ON/OFF (only for the lenses with this function) 3S/ON/OFF ON/OFF (BVP-E10WS/E10WSP only) ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF 3S/ON/OFF ALL/WRN/AT/OFF ON/OFF 1234 ON/OFF ABCD ON/OFF PAD ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF LMH ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 59.94I/29.97PsF, 50I/25PsF ON/OFF 16:9/4:3 -3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36 -3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36 -3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36 B/ATW AUTO KNEE/ADAPTIVE STD/RVS
<VF DISPLAY>
<SWITCH ASSIGN1>
Menu <SWITCH ASSIGN2>
Page Items: default setting 8 LENS VTR S/S : RET2 SW CAM VTR S/S : RET2 SW ASSIGNABLE :-DIMMER :-HANDLE SWITCH : RET-INCOM1 ZOOM SPEED :-COLOR TEMP : 3200K FINE :0 R GAIN :0 B GAIN :0 MEMORY STICK READ (MStCAM) WRITE (CAMtMS) PRESET FILE ID CAM CODE DATE TIME FILE HA14*8 F2.0 : BVP-E10
PRESET WHITE>
Setting values RET2 SW/INCOM1/INCOM2 RET2 SW/INCOM1/INCOM2 5600K/ATW/CROP/- 0 to 9/- RET-INCOM1/RET-INCOM2/RETPROD/RET-ENG/ZOOM/- 00 to 99/- 2000K to 10000K -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 Reading from a Memory Stick Writing to a Memory Stick Restoring the preset data Comment for the operation file stored in a Memory Stick
<OPERATOR FILE>
10
<LENS FILE>
11
:1
1 to 16
8-2-2 Menu Items - Paint Menu

Paint Menu Menu <SW STATUS> Page Items P1 FLARE GAMMA BLK GAM KNEE WHT CLIP DETAIL LEVEL DEP SKIN DTL MATRIX P2 WHITE BLACK FLARE GAMMA V MOD FLARE V MOD D.SHAD TEST <GAMMA> P3 LEVEL COARSE GAMMA TYPE GAMMA TEST <BLACK GAMMA> P4 LEVEL RANGE <LOW KEY SAT> P5 LEVEL RANGE TEST : default setting : ON : ON : OFF : ON : ON : ON : ON : OFF : ON [R] [G] [B] [M] :0 0 0 0 :0 0 0 0 :0 0 0 0 :0 0 0 0 :0 0 0 0 : ON : ON : ON : OFF [R] [G] [B] [M] :0 0 0 0 : 0.45 : 1 or 2 : ON : OFF [R] [G] [B] [M] :0 0 0 0 : HIGH : OFF :0 : HIGH : OFF : OFF Setting values ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF/1/2 -99 to 99 0.35 to 0.90 (0.05 unit) 1 to 7 ON/OFF OFF/1/2 -99 to 99 LOW/MID L/MID H/HIGH ON/OFF -99 to 99 LOW/MID L/MID H/HIGH ON/OFF OFF/1/2
<VIDEO LEVEL>
Menu <KNEE>
<WHITE CLIP>
Page Items P6 K POINT K SLOPE KNEE KNEE MAX KNEE SAT AUTO KNEE POINT LIMIT SLOPE P7 W-CLIP P8 DETAIL LEVEL LIMITER[M] [WHT] [BLK] CRISP LVL DEP H/V RATIO FREQ MIX RATIO FINE DTL KNEE APT DTL COMB SKIN DTL SKIN GATE CH SW HUE PHASE WIDTH SAT LEVEL
<DETAIL 1>
<DETAIL 2>
P9
<SKIN DETAIL>
P10
<USER MATRIX>
P11 R: G: B: MATRIX PRESET USER MATRIX PHASE HUE SAT ALL CLEAR MATRIX PRESET MULTI MATRIX SUPPRESSION SHUTTER ECS FREQ EVS
<MULTI MATRIX>
P12
: default setting [R] [G] [B] [M] :0 0 0 0 :0 0 0 0 : ON : OFF :0 : OFF :0 :0 [R] [G] [B] [M] :0 0 0 0 : ON : ON :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 : 0 ON :0 :0 :0 : 0 OFF : 0 OFF : -50 : OFF : OFF [1] [2] [3] :(ON) OFF OFF : AUTO AUTO AUTO :0 0 0 : 30 30 30 : -89 -89 -89 :0 0 0 [-R] [-G] [-B] :0 0 :0 0 :0 0 : ON : : :0 :0 :0
Setting values -99 to 99 -99 to 99 ON/OFF ON/OFF -99 to 99 OFF/AUTO/ADAPTIVE -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 ON/OFF ON/OFF -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 0 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 0 ON/OFF OFF/1/2/3
ON/OFF
ON/OFF ON/OFF
ON/OFF Executing Auto Hue 0 to 359 0 to 90 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 0/23/45/68/90/113/135/158/180 /203/225/248/270/293/315/338 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 Clearing the values for PHASE, HUE, and SAT ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 0 to 99 ON/OFF OFF/ON/ECS
<CROSS COLOR> <SHUTTER>
P13 P14
: ON : ON : OFF :0 : OFF : OFF : 1/100 *a) : 30.0Hz *b) : OFF
ON/OFF/-
*a) NTSC: PAL: NTSC/sF: PAL/sF: *b) NTSC: PAL: NTSC/sF: PAL/sF: 60.1 to 6000 Hz 50.2 to 6000 Hz 30.00 to 6000 Hz 25.00 to 6000 Hz 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 1/60, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 1/50, 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000
<SCENE FILE>
P15
1 2 3 4 5 STORE STANDARD MEMORY STICK READ (MStCAM) WRITE (CAMtMS) FILE ID : CAM CODE DATE
1 to 5/-
8-2-3 Menu Items - Maintenance Menu

MAINTENANCE Menu Menu <AUTO SETUP> Page Items: default setting M1 AUTO BLACK AUTO WHITE AUTO LEVEL AUTO WHITE SHADING AUTO BLACK SHADING AUTO COLOR SETUP TEST : OFF H PHASE [COARSE] : 0 [FINE] : 0 SC PHASE :0 GENLOCK : ENABLE VF VIDEO : NORMAL FORMAT : 59.94I PsF-SHUTTER LINK CROP ZEBRA2 LEVEL VF DTL VF DTL GAIN WINDOW OVERRIDE IRIS LEVEL APL RATIO IRIS GAIN AUTO IRIS : OFF : OFF (16:9) Setting values
<GENLOCK> (effective in the standalone operation only) <FORMAT>
M2
M3
OFF/1/2 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 ENABLE/DISABLE NORMAL/GENLOCK NTSC: 59.94I/29.97PsF, PAL: 50I/ 25PsF ON/OFF OFF (16:9)/ON (4:3) (BVP-E10WS/ E10WSP only) 50 to 109% ON/OFF 0 to 99 1/2/3/4/5/6 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 ON/OFF -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 RGB/RB ON/OFF -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -99 to 99 -3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36 SMPTE/EIA/EBU(75%)/EBU(100%) (NTSC;SMPTE/PAL;EBU(75%) standard) NORMAL/WIDE (NTSC only) ON/OFF ON/OFF day, time 1 to 6 NAM/Y/G/R+G H/V V 19H/20H/21H (NTSC only) ON/OFF OPE&USER/ALL/OFF
<AUTO IRIS>
M4
<WHITE SHADING>
M5
<BLACK SHADING>
M6
<ENCODER>
M7
: 100% : ON : 20 :1 :0 :0 : 80 :0 : ON [R] [G] [B] [M] V SAW :0 0 0 0 V PARA :0 0 0 0 H SAW :0 0 0 0 H PARA :0 0 0 0 WHITE :0 0 0 0 AUTO WHITE SHADING WHITE SHAD MODE : RGB 3D WHITE SHAD : ON ] [R] [G] [B] [M V SAW :0 0 0 0 V PARA :0 0 0 0 H SAW :0 0 0 0 H PARA :0 0 0 0 BLK SET :0 0 0 0 BLACK :0 0 0 0 MASTER GAIN : 0dB AUTO BLACK SHADING CB MODE : SMPTE (NTSC)/ EBU (75%) (PAL) Q-FILTER CCU CALL CHU CALL 2000/4/30 8:32 DATE TYPE V DTL CREATION DTL H/V MODE V BLANKING FLT WHT MEM MENU RESUME : WIDE : ON : OFF : 1 Y/Mn/D : NAM : H/V : 20H : ON : OPE & USER
<SYSTEM> <DATE/TIME> <OTHERS>
M8 M9 M10
8-2-4 Menu Items - File Menu

FILE Menu Menu <OPERATOR FILE> Page Items: default setting F1 READ (MStCAM) WRITE (CAMtMS) PRESET STORE PRESET FILE FILE ID CAM CODE DATE F2 1 2 3 4 5 STORE STANDARD MEMORY STICK READ (MStCAM) WRITE (CAMtMS) FILE ID CAM CODE DATE F3 STORE FILE STANDARD ALL PRESET READ (MStCAM) WRITE (CAMtMS) FILE ID CAM CODE DATE F4 STORE FILE No. NAME F NO SELECT CURRENT : 1 LENS F5 STORE FILE F6 PRESET OPERATOR REFERENCE (ALL) 10 SEC CLEAR : OFF LENS (CURRENT) OHB WHITE SHADE OHB BLACK SHADE OHB ND OFFSET OHB MATRIX MS FORMAT Setting values
<SCENE FILE>
<REFERENCE>
<LENS FILE>
<OHB FILE> <FILE CLEAR>
8-2-5 Menu Items - Diagnosis Menu

DIAGNOSIS Menu Menu <DIAGNOSIS> Page Items D1 ROM CAMERA OHB VA DPR IF AT HUR CCU CA-570 MD AU TR : default setting :-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-Setting values
1 9
Connector Pin Assignment
9-1. BVP-E10 Series, Color Video Camera

9-1-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
9-1-1-1 TEST OUT
BNC 75 Ohms 1.0 V p-p MIC IN (3P FEMALE)
9-1-1-2 VF (20P FEMALE)
2 3
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Signal NC ABNORMAL IND OUT 16:9 MODE OUT NC COMP/VBS SW IN/OUT CCIR/EIA OUT NC G TALLY OUT NC Y (X) OUT ZEBRA ON IN VF VIDEO OUT (X) NC B-Y (X) OUT R-Y (X) OUT BATT IND OUT TALLY IND OUT +9.3 V (VF) OUT GND UNREG OUT
Specifications No connection L: Indicator lights OPEN: Indicator goes out H: NORMAL (4:3) L: WIDE (16:9) No connection *Note 1 H: CCIR, L: EIA No connection H: Indicator lights L: Indicator goes out No connection 1 V p-p, VF: Zi = 1 k Ohms H: OFF, L: ON 1.0 V p-p, VF: Zi = 1 k Ohms No Connection 700 mV p-p, VF: Zi = 1 k Ohms, 75 % color-bars 700 mV p-p, VF: Zi = 1 k Ohms, 75 % color-bars H: Indicator lights L: Indicator goes out H: Indicator lights L: Indicator goes out REG +9.3 V GND +10.5 V to +17 V
(External view)
No. 1 2 3
Signal MIC IN (G) MIC IN (X) MIC IN (Y)
Specifications _60 dBu High impedance balanced
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
LENS (12P FEMALE)
(External view)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal
Specifications
10 11 12
RET VIDEO ENA- ENABLE: 0 V BLE IN DISABLE: +5 V or OPEN RET 2 ENABLE IN ENABLE: 0 V DISABLE: +5 V or OPEN GND GND for UNREG AUTO +5 V OUT AUTO: +5 V MANU: 0 V or OPEN IRIS CONT OUT +3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8) UNREG OUT +10.5 V to +17 V IRIS POSITION IN +3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8) AUTO/MANU AUTO IRIS: 0 V OUT MANUAL IRIS: +5 V EXTENDER ON/ EX 2 ON: 0 V OFF IN EX 0.8 ON: +1.8 V OFF: +4.8 V ZOOM POSIWIDE: +2 V TION IN TELE: +7 V SER DATA OUT H: +5V L: 0V SER DATA IN H: +5V L: 0V
Note1: Specification of COMP/VBS SW Signal When powering on, the microcomputer of the camera identifies a viewfinder in use by detecting the voltage at pin 5. H: Color VF, L: B/W VF . In use of B/W VF Voltage control of pin 5 is disabled during operation. Switching between the return video signal and monochrome signal for the viewfinder is done by the camera and selected signal is output at pin 12 to the viewfinder. . In use of Color VF By controlling the voltage at pin 5 during operation, switching between the decoded return video signal and the camera component signal is done in the viewfinder. H: Camera, L: Return video
136 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
9-1-1-3 ANALOG CA (68P FEMALE)

34 1
No. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Signal LENS UNREG GND UNREG IN UNREG IN VF UNREG IN LENS UNREG IN NC NC VBS OUT (X)
Specifications GND for LENS UNREG
68
35
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Signal UNREG GND UNREG GND VF UNREG GND LENS UNREG GND UNREG IN UNREG IN VF UNREG IN LENS UNREG IN NC NC VBS OUT (G) Y OUT (X) B-Y OUT (X)
Specifications GND for UNREG GND for UNREG GND for VF UNREG GND for LENS UNREG 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V No connection No connection GND for VBS VIDEO VS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms 700 mV p-p, with sample 350 mV* 756 mV p-p (J) ** 700 mV p-p (UC) ** 525 mV p-p (CE) ** No connection No connection 1.0 V p-p 6 dB GND for RET VIDEO VS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms Zi = 300 Ohms *Note 2
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
NC NC VBS GENLOCK IN (X) RET VIDEO IN (G) MONITOR VIDEO OUT (X) BATTERY ALARM IN NC AUDIO CH1 CONT OUT MIC 1 OUT (Y)
No connection 0 V (0 dB) to 7 V (-50 dB or less) Zo < 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced NC No connection SKIN TONE GATE 1.0 V p-p OUT TAPE REM IN *Note 4 VTR SYNC OUT +5.0 V p-p Negative pulse, Zo < 100 Ohms RET EN OUT ENABLE; 0 V, DISABLE; +5 V or OPEN PB REF IN PB; +4.5 V, CAM; 0 V or OPEN H CONT IN 0 V to 5 V, Analog ANALOG GND DIGITAL HD OUT 3.3 V p-p for Digital COM CONT IN 5 V p-p IIC CLOCK OUT 5 V p-p (CA) NC No connection UNREG GND GND for UNREG UNREG GND GND for UNREG VF UNREG GND GND for VF UNREG
63 64 65 66 67 68
10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V No connection No connection 1.0 V p-p 10 %, Zo = 75 Ohms R-Y OUT (X) 700 mV p-p, with sample 350 mV* 756 mV p-p (J) ** 700 mV p-p (UC) ** 525 mV p-p (CE) ** Y/R-Y/B-Y GND GND for Y/R-Y/B-Y NC No connection NC No connection VBS GENLOCK GND for GENLOCK/H IN (G) CONT IN RET VIDEO IN (X) 1.0 V p-p, Zi = 1 k Ohms MONITOR VIDEO GND for MONITOR VIDEO OUT (G) VTR START/STOP Zo < 10 k Ohms OUT NC No connection MIC 1 OUT (G) GND for CAM MIC MIC 1 OUT (X) Zo < 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced NC No connection NC No connection AUDIO LEVEL IN Zi > 1 k Ohms (-15 dBu at 0 VU) NC No connection NC No connection REC TALLY IN ON; +5 V, OFF; +2.5 V or 0 V, Zi > 20 k Ohms *Note 3 VTR SAVE OUT SAVE; +4.5 V, STANDBY; 0 V, Zo < 10 k Ohms GND NC No connection COM DATA OUT 5 V p-p IIC DATA IN/OUT 5 V p-p, 4700 Ohms, Pull (CA) up NC No connection
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
*: In connection with CCU, **: In connection with VTR
Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment 137 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Note 2 : Specification of BATT ALARM Signal VTR has a battery voltage detection and warning signal generation circuits and it sends the signal shown below to the camera.
Battery Terminal Voltage (VTR internal battery)
12.011.1 V dc
11.110.8 V dc 1.0 0.2 Hz duty 50 10 %
10.8 V dc
Input Signal at Pin 19 0V LED on Viewfinder Stays out Blinks at 1 Hz
23 V dc across 300 Z
Lights up
Note 3: Specifications of REC TALLY Signal
+1 5.0 _0.5 V dc Input Signal at Pin 62 2.5 0.5 V dc REC TALLY signal 1.0 0.2 Hz duty 50 10 % Power ON When VTR changes from POWER SAVE to REC START mode, or when the servo is lost
0 0.3 V dc Power OFF VTR Action
REC RESET signal 10100 msec When VTR changes from STANDBY to REC START mode, or in REC mode At the end of STOP tape or When mode VTR is put into STOP mode by itself (REC RESET signal does not appear when VTR is put into STOP mode by operating the camera)
Note 4 :Specifications of TAPE REM Signal
Tape Remaining(VTR) Input Signal at Pin 25 TAPE1 +5V +5V 0V 0V +5V 0V +5V 0V TAPE2 +3.4V +3.1V +2.2V 0V G TALLY lamp lights at +3.1V Remark
9-1-1-4 DIGITAL CA (68P FEMALE)

No.
34 1
Signal R (2) OUT R (4) OUT R (6) OUT R (8) OUT B (L) OUT B (2) OUT B (4) OUT B (6) OUT B (8) OUT DIGITAL GND DIGITAL BLANKING OUT DIGITAL SYNC OUT
Specifications 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p GND for DIGITAL 3.3 V p-p 3.3 V p-p
68
35
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 138 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Signal G (L) OUT G (2) OUT G (4) OUT G (6) OUT G (8) OUT R (L) OUT
Specifications 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
No. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Signal NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC (Reserve) 18 MHz OUT (G) G (1) OUT G (3) OUT G (5) OUT G (7) OUT G (M) OUT R (1) OUT R (3) OUT R (5) OUT R (7) OUT R (M) OUT
Specifications No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection GND for 18 MHz 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p
No. 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Signal B (1) OUT B (3) OUT B (5) OUT B (7) OUT B (M) OUT DIGITAL GND DIGITAL SAMPLE OUT DIGITAL VD OUT DIGITAL CF OUT NC NC NC NC NC NC NC (Reserve) NC NC NC NC NC (Reserve) 18 MHz OUT (X)
Specifications 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p 2.5 V p-p GND for DIGITAL 3.3 V p-p 3.3 V p-p 3.3 V p-p No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection 3.3 V p-p

9-2-1 Connector Input/Output Signal
9-2-1-1 PROMTER *1/GENLOCK *2
BNC 75 Ohms 1.0 V p-p
*1: In connection with CCU *2: In connection with VTR
1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
9-2-1-4 REMOTE (8P FEMALE)
(External view)
9-2-1-2 TRIAX
TRIAX (CA-570) Kings type Tri-LDC Connector Series For details, see www.kingselectronics.com Lemo Kings-type 4A Series For details, see www.lemo.ch TRIAX (CA-570P) Fischer type Series 1051 For details, see www.fischerconnectors.com
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) VIDEO (G) POWER (+) OUT POWER (-) OUT VIDEO (X) OUT CHASSIS GND
Specifications BVP SERIAL DATA BVP SERIAL DATA CCU/MSU/RCP/CNU/VCS SERIAL DATA CCU/MSU/RCP/CNU/VCS SERIAL DATA GND for VIDEO +12 V, 500 mA (MAX) GND for +12 V VBS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms CHASSIS GND
9-2-1-3 TEST OUT

9-2-1-5 RET CONT (6P FEMALE)

No. 1 2 3
(External view)
Signal TRACKER R OUT (X) TRACKER T IN (G) TRACKER R OUT (G) PGM OUT (X) +12 V (T) OUT PGM OUT (G) TRACKER T IN (X) TRACKER T IN (Y) UP TALLY OUT (G) UP TALLY OUT (X)
Specifications TRACKER RECEIVE 0 dBu unbalanced GND for TRACKER T GND for TRACKER R -20 dBu unbalanced +12 V dc. 500 mA (MAX) GND for PGM TRACKER TALK 0 dBu / -20 dBu High impedance balanced TRACKER TALK 0 dBu / -20 dBu High impedance balanced GND for UP TALLY +12 V dc 200 mA (MAX)
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
No. 1
Signal INCOM 1 MIC ON/OFF IN INCOM 2 MIC ON/OFF IN
Specifications Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN
4 5 6 7
9 10
3 4
GND RET 3 ON/OFF IN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN RET 1 ON/OFF IN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN RET 2 ON/OFF IN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN
9-2-1-8 AUDIO IN 1/2 (3P MALE)
2 3
9-2-1-6 INCOM 1/2 (5P FEMALE)

(External view) 5 4 3 2 1
No. 1
Signal MIC IN (G) MIC IN (X) MIC IN (Y)
Specifications -60 dBu High impedance balanced -60 dBu High impedance balanced -60 dBu High impedance balanced
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
(External view)
2 3
No. 1
Signal INCOM MIC IN (Y)
Specifications -20 dBu (CARBON_MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) -20 dBu (CARBON_MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) -20 dBu (with INCOM level control set to mechanical center) -20 dBu (with PGM level control set to mechanical center)
9-2-1-9 DC IN (4P MALE)
INCOM MIC IN (X)
3 4
GND (PGM) INCOM RECEIVE OUT PGM 1/2 OUT
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4
Signal GND NC NC DC (+) IN
Specifications GND for DC (+) No conncetion No conncetion DC 10.5 V to 17 V
9-2-1-7 TRACKER (10P FEMALE)
8 7 10 6 5
1 2 9 3 4
(External view)
9-2-1-10DC OUT (4P FEMALE)
No. 6
Signal
Specifications
4 3
1 2
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4
Signal GND NC NC UNREG +12 V OUT
Specifications GND for UNREG No conncetion No conncetion +12 V dc, 500 mA (MAX) 9 10 11
9-2-1-11 VTR (26P MALE)

B A 3 1 2 8 7 13 12 18 5 4 10 9 15 14 20 19 23 6 11 17 16 22 21 24
12
(External view)
No. A B 1 2 3 4 5
Signal POWER (+) IN POWER (-) IN VBS OUT (X) VBS OUT (G) Y VIDEO OUT (G) Y VIDEO OUT (X) R-Y VIDEO OUT (X)
Specifications UNREG 10.5 V to 17 V, 3 A UNREG 10.5 V to 17 V, 3 A VBS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms VBS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms VS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms VS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms Zo = 75 Ohms 700 mV p-p (USA & Canada) 525 mV p-p (Other countries)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
R-Y VIDEO OUT (G) Zo = 75 Ohms 700 mV p-p (USA & Canada) 525 mV p-p (Other countries) B-Y VIDEO OUT (X) Zo = 75 Ohms 700 mV p-p (USA & Canada) 525 mV p-p (Other countries) B-Y VIDEO OUT (G) Zo = 75 Ohms 700 mV p-p (USA & Canada) 525 mV p-p (Other countries) MIC OUT (X) Zo 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced MIC OUT (Y) Zo 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced MIC OUT (G) Zo 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced VTR START/STOP START: 5 1 Vdc, OUT STOP: 0 +0.2 Vdc, Zo 10 k Ohms BATT IND IN Zi = 300 Ohms*Note 1 NC No connection REC ALARM IN Zi 20 k Ohms *Note 2 NC No connection GND (SHIELD) Camera GND PB VIDEO IN (X) VBS 1 V p-p, Zi = 75 Ohms PB VIDEO IN (G) VBS 1 V p-p, Zi = 75 Ohms AUDIO MONISAVE: +4.5 0.5 V, Zo 10 k TOR IN/ Ohms VTR SAVE OUT STANDBY: +9.0 (+1.0, -0.5 ) V, Zo 10 k Ohms MONITOR: Zi = 750 Ohms NC No connection CF OUT Color Framing NC No connection NC No connection
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
Note: VTR connector is disabled when the CCU is connected. Note1: Specifications of BATT IND Signal VTR has a battery voltage detection and warning signal generation circuits and it sends the signal shown below to the camera.
BatteryTerminal Voltage (VTR internal battery)
17.011.1 Vdc
11.110.8 Vdc 1.0 0.2 Hz duty 50 10 %
10.8 Vdc
Insert Signal at Pin 13
23 Vdc across 300 Z
0V LED on Viewfinder Stays out Brinksat 1 Hz Lights up
Note2: Specifications of REC ALARM Signal
Input Signal at Pin 15
+1 5.0 _0.5 Vdc
2.5 0.5 Vdc
0 0.3 Vdc
REC ALARM signal 1.0 0.2 Hz duty 50 10 % Power ON When VTR changes from POWER SAVE to REC START mode, or when the servo is lost
REC RESET signal 10100 msec When VTR changes from STANDBY to REC START mode, or in REC mode At the end of STOP tape or When mode VTR is put into STOP mode by itself (REC RESET signal does not appear when VTR is put into STOP mode by operating the camera)
Power OFF
VTR Action
9-2-1-12CAMERA (68P MALE)

1 35 34 68
No. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Signal NC AUDIO CH1 CONT IN MIC IN (Y)
Specifications
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Signal UNREG GND UNREG GND VF UNREG GND LENS UNREG GND UNREG OUT UNREG OUT VF UNREG OUT LENS UNREG OUT R IN (X) B IN (X) VBS IN (G) Y IN (X) B-Y IN (X)
Specifications GND for UNREG GND for UNREG GND for VF UNREG GND for LENS UNREG 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 700 mV p-p 2 %, DC 0200 mV, Zi 10 k Ohms 700 mV p-p 2 %, DC 0200 mV, Zi 10 k Ohms GND for VBS VIDEO VS 1.0 V p-p, Zi = 1 k Ohms 700 m V p-p, with sample 350 mV * 700 mV p-p (USA & Canada), ** 75 % color bars 525 mV p-p (Other countries), ** 75 % color bars No connection No connection 1.0 V p-p 6 dB, Zo = 75 Ohms GND for RET VIDEO
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
14 15 16 17 18 19 142 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
NC NC VBS GENLOCK OUT (X) RET VIDEO OUT (G) MONITOR VIDEO VS 1 Vp-p, Zi = 1 k Ohms IN (X) BATTERY ALARM Zo = 300 Ohms OUT
No connection 0 V (0 dB) to 7 V (-50 dB or less) Zi 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced NC No connection SKIN TONE GATE 1.0 V p-p IN TAPE REM OUT No connection VTR SYNC IN +5.0 V p-p Negative pulse, Zi 100 Ohms RET EN IN ENABLE: 0 V, DISABLE: +5 V or OPEN PB REF OUT PB: +4.5 V, CAM: 0 V or OPEN H CONT OUT 0 V to 5 V, analog ANALOG GND DIGITAL HD IN 3.3 V p-p for digital COM CONT OUT 5 V p-p IIC CLOCK IN 5 V p-p (CA) IIC CLOCK IN 5 V p-p (ST) UNREG GND GND for UNREG UNREG GND GND for UNREG VF UNREG GND GND for VF UNREG LENS UNREG GND for LENS UNREG GND UNREG OUT 10.5 V to 17 V UNREG OUT 10.5 V to 17 V VF UNREG OUT 10.5 V to 17 V LENS UNREG 10.5 V to 17 V OUT G IN (X) 700 mV p-p 2 %, DC 0 200 mV, Zi 10 k Ohms R/G/B GND GND for R/G/B VIDEO VBS IN (X) 1.0 V p-p 10 %, Zi = 75 Ohms
No. 46
Signal R-Y IN (X)
Specifications 700 m V p-p, with sync 350 mV * 700 mV p-p (USA & Canada), ** 75 % color bars 525 mV p-p (Other countries), ** 75 % color bars GND for Y/R-Y/B-Y No connection No connection GND for GENLOCK 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms GND for MONITOR VIDEO Zi 10 k Ohms No connection GND for CAM MIC Zi 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced No connection
No. 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Signal NC AUDIO LEVEL OUT NC V RESET OUT/CF IN REC TALLY OUT VTR SAVE IN GND CA (CONT/DATA) COM DATA IN IIC DATA IN/OUT (CA) IIC DATA IN/OUT (ST)
Specifications No connection No connection No connection V Reset: 0 V to +5 V, CF: 0 V to -5 V ON: +5 V, OFF: +2.5 V or 0 V, Zo 20 k Ohms SAVE: +4.5 V, STANDBY: 0 V, Zi 10 k Ohms Serial data for camera control 5 V p-p 5 V p-p, 4700 Ohms, Pull up 5 V p-p, 4700 Ohms, Pull up
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Y/R-Y/B-Y GND NC NC VBS GENLOCK OUT (G) RET VIDEO OUT (X) MONITOR VIDEO IN (G) VTR START/STOP IN NC MIC IN (G) MIC IN (X) NC
*: In connection with CCU **: In connection with VTR

9-3-1 onnector Input/Output Signals
9-3-1-1 PROMTER *1/GENLOCK *2
*1: In connection with CCU *2: Standalone use
No. 8
Signal VIDEO (X) OUT CHASSIS GND
Specifications VBS 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms CHASSIS GND
*1 : Standalone use *2 : In connection with CCU
9-3-1-2 TEST OUT

9-3-1-5 RET CONT (6P FEMALE)
9-3-1-3 SERIAL IN/SERIAL OUT

BNC Based on SMPTE259M
9-3-1-4 REMOTE (8P FEMALE)

1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
(External view)
No. 1
Signal INCOM 1 MIC ON/OFF IN INCOM 2 MIC ON/OFF IN
Specifications Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Signal TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) VIDEO (G) POWER (+) OUT POWER (-) OUT
Specifications BVP SERIAL DATA BVP SERIAL DATA RM SERIAL DATA *1, CA-905L IIC DATA *2 RM SERIAL DATA *1, CA-905L IIC DATA *2 GND for VIDEO 10.5 V to 17 V, 500 mA (MAX) GND for +12 V 3 4
GND RET 3 ON/OFF IN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN RET 1 ON/OFF IN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN RET 2 ON/OFF IN Zi > 10 k Ohms ON: GND OFF: OPEN
9-3-1-6 INCOM 1/2 (5P FEMALE)
9-3-1-9 DC OUT (4P FEMALE)
5 4 3 2
4 3
1 2
(External view)
(External view)
No. 1
Signal INCOM MIC IN (Y)
Specifications .-20 dBu (CARBON_MIC) .-60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) .-20 dBu (CARBON_MIC) .-60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) .-20 dBu (with INCOM level control set to mechanical center) .-20 dBu (with PGM level control set to mechanical center)
No. 1 2 3 4
Signal GND NC NC UNREG +12 V OUT
Specifications GND for UNREG No connection No connection DC 10.5 V to 17 V, 500 mA (MAX)
INCOM MIC IN (X)
9-3-1-10CCU (MALE)
1 4 02 2 3
3 4
GND (PGM) INCOM RECEIVE OUT PGM 1/2 OUT
01
(External view)
9-3-1-7 AUDIO IN 1/2 (3P FEMALE)

No. 01
2 3 1
Signal CA t CCU CCU t CA CONTROL (CCU t CHU) CONTROL (CHU t CCU) POWER HOT POWER COLD POWER GND
Specifications OPTICAL_OUTPUT .-8.5 dB (Typ.) OPTICAL_INPUT .-20 dB (MIN)
02 1
(External view)
2 3 4 .-
No. 1
Signal AUDIO IN (G)
Specifications LINE (-20 dBu)/ MIC (-60 dBu) SELECTABLE High impedance balanced LINE (-20 dBu)/ MIC (-60 dBu) SELECTABLE High impedance balanced LINE (-20 dBu)/ MIC (-60 dBu) SELECTABLE High impedance balanced
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
STANBY : DC38 V AC240 V GND for POWER
AUDIO IN (X)
9-3-1-11TRACKER (FEMALE)
1 2 6 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
AUDIO IN (Y)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
9-3-1-8 DC IN (4P MALE)

No. 1 2 3
(External view)
(External view)
Signal TRACKER R OUT (X) TRACKER R OUT (G) GND (UNREG/ TALLY) R TALLY PGM OUT (G) UNREG TRACKER T IN (X)
Specifications TRACKER RECEIVE 0 dBu unbalanced GND for TRACKER R GND for UNREG/TALLY ON : GND OFF : High impedance GND for PGM .+12 V (+10.5 to +17.0 V) TRACKER TALK 0 dBu / -20 dBu High impedance balanced
4 No. 1 2 3 4 144 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual Signal GND NC NC DC (+) IN Specifications GND for DC (+) No connection No connection DC 10.5 V to 17 V 5 6 7
No. 8
Signal TRACKER T IN (Y) TRACKER T IN (G) PGM OUT (X) (Spare) G TALLY
Specifications TRACKER TALK 0 dBu / -20 dBu High impedance balanced GND for TRACKER T -20 dBu unbalanced
No. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
Signal NC SKIN TONE GATE IN TAPE REM OUT VTR SYNC IN RET EN IN PB REF OUT H CONT OUT ANALOG GND DIGITAL HD IN COM CONT OUT IIC CLOCK IN (CA) IIC CLOCK IN (ST) UNREG GND UNREG GND VF UNREG GND LENS UNREG GND UNREG OUT UNREG OUT VF UNREG OUT LENS UNREG OUT G IN (X) R/G/B GND VBS IN (X)
Specifications No connection No connection No connection No connection ENABLE; 0 V, DISABLE; OPEN PB; +5.0 V, CAM; 0 V 0 V to 5 V, Max frequency at 5 V 3.3 V p-p for Digital 5 V p-p 5 V p-p 5 V p-p GND for UNREG GND for UNREG GND for VF UNREG GND for LENS UNREG 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
ON : GND OFF : High impedance NC No connection RX_DATA_IN (0) TRUNK DATA IN, RS232-C RX_DATA_IN (1) TRUNK DATA IN, RS232-C NC No connection NC No connection TX_DATA_OUT (0) TRUNK DATA OUT, RS232C TX_DATA_OUT (1) TRUNK DATA OUT, RS232C GND
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)

For Analog Interface (upper side)
34 68
1 35
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Signal UNREG GND UNREG GND VF UNREG GND LENS UNREG GND UNREG OUT UNREG OUT VF UNREG OUT LENS UNREG OUT R IN (X) B IN (X) VBS IN (G) Y IN (X) B-Y IN (X) RET B-Y OUT (X) C IN (X) VBS GENLOCK OUT (X) RET VIDEO OUT (G) MONITOR VIDEO IN (X) BATTERY ALARM OUT NC AUDIO CH1 CONT IN MIC IN (Y)
Specifications GND for UNREG GND for UNREG GND for VF UNREG GND for LENS UNREG 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V 10.5 V to 17 V No connection No connection GND for VBS VIDEO No connection No connection 0.7 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms No connection 1.0 V p-p 6 dB, Zo = 75 Ohms GND for RET VIDEO VS 1 Vp-p, Zi = 75 k Ohms Zo = 220 Ohms No connection 0 V (0 dB) to 7 0.5V (-50 dB) Zi = 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
No connection No connection 1.0 V p-p 10 %, Zi = 75 Ohms R-Y IN (X) No connection Y/R-Y/B-Y GND No connection RET R-Y OUT (X) 0.7 V p-p, Zo = 75 k Ohms C GND No connection VBS GENLOCK GND for GENLOCK OUT (G) RET VIDEO OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms (X) MONITOR VIDEO GND for MONITOR VIDEO IN (G) VTR START/STOP Zi < 10 k Ohms IN NC No connection MIC IN (G) GND for CAM MIC MIC IN (X) Zi > 600 Ohms, -60 dBu balanced NC No connection NC No connection AUDIO LEVEL No connection OUT NC No connection V RESET OUT/CF No connection IN REC TALLY OUT No connection VTR SAVE IN No connection GND CA (CONT/DATA) No connection COM DATA IN 5 V p-p
No. 67 68
Signal
Specifications
No. 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Signal R/R-Y (5) IN R/R-Y (7) IN R/R-Y (M) IN B/B-Y (1) IN B/B-Y (3) IN B/B-Y (5) IN B/B-Y (7) IN B/B-Y (M) IN DIGITAL GND SAMPLE IN/ CONT1 DIGITAL VD IN CF IN/CONT2 DIGITAL SKIN GATE IN L2 (1) IN L2 (3) IN L2 (5) IN L2 (7) IN L2 (M) IN DIGITAL GND H REF OUT L3 (1) IN L3 (3) IN L3 (5) IN L3 (7) IN L3 (M) IN 27 MHz IN (X) 18 MHz IN (X)
Specifications 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p GND for DIGITAL 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p GND for DIGITAL 3.3 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
IIC DATA IN/OUT 5 V p-p, 4700 Ohms, Pull up (CA) IIC DATA IN/OUT No connection (ST)
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)

For Digital Interface (lower side)
34 1
68
35
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 146 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Signal G/Y (L) IN G/Y (2) IN G/Y (4) IN G/Y (6) IN G/Y (8) IN R/R-Y (L) IN R/R-Y (2) IN R/R-Y (4) IN R/R-Y (6) IN R/R-Y (8) IN R/B-Y (L) IN R/B-Y (2) IN R/B-Y (4) IN R/B-Y (6) IN R/B-Y (8) IN DIGITAL GND DIGITAL BLANKING IN DIGITAL SYNC IN DIGIRAL GND VF CHARA IN L2 (L) IN L2 (2) IN L2 (4) IN L2 (6) IN L2 (8) IN DIGITAL GND L3 (L) IN L3 (2) IN L3 (4) IN L3 (6) IN L3 (8) IN NC 27 MHz (G) 18 MHz IN (G) G/Y (1) IN G/Y (3) IN G/Y (5) IN G/Y (7) IN G/Y (M) IN R/R-Y (1) IN R/R-Y (3) IN
Specifications 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p GND for DIGITAL No connection No connection GND for DIGITAL 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p GND for DIGITAL 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p No connection GND for 27 MHz GND for 18 MHz 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p 3.3 V p-p to 2.5 V p-p
9-3-2 Wiring Diagrams for Cables

9-3-2-1 CCA-5 Cable
(Outer sheath color: White)
Black White Orange White Brown
Red
White Red Brown Brown
8-pin connector (Male) (Wiring side)
8-pin connector (Male) (Wiring side)
9-3-2-2 REMOTE Cable (supplied with RM-B150)

(Outer sheath color: Black)
Black White
White Brown
White Red
8P CONNECTOR (MALE) (WIRING SIDE)
8P CONNECTOR (MALE) (WIRING SIDE)
9-4. CCU-500D/ 500DP, Camera Control Unit

9-4-1-1 MIC OUTPUT CH1/CH2 (XLR 3P, MALE)
No. 3 4
1 3 2
Signal AUX2 (*4 G TALLY OUT) AUX1 (*4 R TALLY OUT) CHU MIC1 CONT2 AMP CONT1 GAIN IN CONT0 MIC1 GAIN CONT ON/OFF IN GND (+5.5 V) AUX3 (*4 TALLY OUT) NC 16:9/4:3 SELECT EN IN 16:9/4:3 SELECT IN AUX9 MIC GAIN CONT2 IN
Specifications *4 Q405 (NPN) /AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA *4 Q403 (NPN) /AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA *2 See below *2 See below *2 See below *3 See below
5 6 7 8
(External view)
No. 1 2 3
Signal MIC OUT (G) MIC OUT (X) MIC OUT (Y)
Specifications 0 dBu/ -20 dBu (Selectable with S201, S251/ AU board)

(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
9 10
9-4-1-2 WF MODE (4P FEMALE)
11 12 13
4 3
1 2
14 15
GND for 5.5 V *4 R/G TALLY OUT Q409 (NPN) /AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA No connection +5.0 V (or OPEN): DIS-EN GND: EN +5.0 V (or OPEN): 4:3 GND: 16:9 *1 Refer to the following table. *2 See below
(External view)
No. 1
Signal SEQ CONT OUT (G)
Specifications
*2:
3 4
OPEN COLLECTOR +(PNP)/ -(NPN) (Selectable with S901/VA board) SEQ CONT OUT OPEN COLLECTOR (X) +(PNP)/ -(NPN) (Selectable with S601/DPR board) STAIR CASE OUT *1 (X) STAIR CASE OUT GND for STAIR CASE (G)
*3
CONT0 H L H L H
CONT1 H H L L H
CONT2 H H H H L
CHU MIC1 AMP GAIN 60 dB 50 dB 40 dB 30 dB 20 dB
*1) Stair Case signal
8-pin
R G B
15-pin L H L H
MIC GAIN CONT MIC1/MIC2 ON MIC1 ON MIC2 ON INTERNAL SET
12 +1 V -6
DC 0 2 V
L L H H
*4 To use these interface signals, modification for AT board is required.
9-4-1-3 MIC REMOTE (D-Sub 15P, FEMALE) 9-4-1-4 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (D-Sub 25P, FEMALE)
8 15 9 13 1 14 1
(External view)
25
(External view)
No. 1 2
Signal +5.5 V OUT AUX4 (*4 TALLY GND)
Specifications Max. 70 mA *4 TALLY for GND No. 1 Signal Specifications ENG (R) (X) OUT ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED
No. 2 3 4 5 6
Signal
Specifications
No. 14
Signal PROD (R) (X) OUT
Specifications PROD SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED PROD SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED GND for PROD PROD SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED PROD SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED No connection No connection No connection
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
ENG (R) (Y) OUT ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED GND GND for ENG ENG (T) (X) IN ENG SYSTEM TALK ENG (T) (Y) IN 0 dBu BALANCED PGM (X) IN -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S451/AU board) PGM (Y) IN -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S451/AU board) PGM (G) IN -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S451/AU board) GND GND for AUX AUX8 R TALLY (X) IN ON: 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN R TALLY (Y) IN ON: 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN GND CHASSIS GND
15
PROD (R) (Y) OUT PROD (G) PROD (T) (X) IN PROD (T) (Y) IN NC NC NC AUX7 AUX6 G TALLY (X) IN G TALLY (Y) IN
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ON: 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN ON: 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
9-4-1-5 REMOTE (8P, FEMALE)

RCP/CNU
9-4-1-6 INTERCOM (5P, FEMALE) on the front panel
1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) TX GND POWER (+) OUT POWER (-) OUT SPARE CHASSIS GND
Specifications CCU SERIAL DATA No. RCP/CNU/BVP/MSU/VCS SERIAL DATA GND for TX RCP POWER, +30 V GND for POWER CHASSIS GND 1 2 3 4 5 Signal
(External view)
Specifications
INCOM (T) IN (Y) -20_dBu_(CARBON_MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) INCOM (T) IN (X) -20_dBu_(CARBON_MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) INCOM (T) IN (G) GND for INCOM INCOM (R) OUT (X) Max. 12 dBu PGM OUT (X) Max. 12 dBu
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
9-5. CCU-700A/ 700AP, Camera Control Unit

9-5-1-1 MIC OUTPUT CH1/CH2 (3P, MALE)
No. 1 2 3 Signal MIC OUT (G) MIC OUT (X) MIC OUT (Y) Specifications 0 dBu/ -20 dBu (Selectable with S201, S301/ AT board)
2 3
(External view)
9-5-1-2 RTS IN/OUT

RTS IN (3P, FEMALE) RTS OUT (3P, MALE)
9-5-1-4 INTERCOM REMOTE (25P, FEMALE)

13 25 14 1
2 3
2 3
(External view)
(External view)
No. 1
Signal +5.5 V OUT
Specifications Max. 250 mA Fuse/AT board
No. 1 2 3
Signal RTS (COMMON) RTS (ENG) RTS (PROD)
Specifications 2.0 Vp-p 200 Ohms D GND for STAIR CASE
2 3 4 5 6
9-5-1-3 MIC REMOTE (15P, FEMALE)
8 15 9
8
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Signal +5.5 V OUT TALLY GND G TALLY OUT R TALLY OUT CHU MIC1 CONT2 AMP CONT1 GAIN IN CONT0 MIC1 GAIN CONT ON/OFF IN GND TALLY OUT
Specifications Max. 250 mA Fuse/AT board GND for TALLY Q2841 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA Q2840 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA *1 Refer to the following table. *1 Refer to the following table. *1 Refer to the following table. L: AUX MIC GAIN CONTROL GND for 5.5 V R/G TALLY OUT Q2842(NPN)/AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA No connection *1 Refer to the following table. *1 Refer to the following table. *1 Refer to the following table. L: AUX MIC GAIN CONTROL
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17
11 12 13 14 15
NC CHU MIC2 CONT2 AMP CONT1 GAIN IN CONT0 MIC2 GAIN CONT ON/OFF IN
18 19 20 21 22 23
*1) CHU MIC 1/2 AMP GAIN
CONT0. H L H L H
CONT1 H H L L H
CONT2 H H H H L
CHU MIC AMP GAIN 60 dBu 50 dBu 40 dBu 30 dBu 20 dBu
24 25
CAMERA No. CK OUT CAMERA No. SPARE OUT TALLY GND GND for TALLY G TALLY OUT Q2841 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND): Max.30 mA R TALLY OUT Q2840 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND): Max.30 mA TALLY OUT R/G TALLY OUT Q2842 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND): Max.30 mA CALL OUT Q1010 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND): Max.30 mA INCOM TALK (G) *2) IN -20_dBu_(CARBON_MIC) -60_dBu_(DYNAMIC_MIC) INCOM TALK (Y) *2) IN -20_dBu_(CARBON_MIC) -60_dBu_(DYNAMIC MIC) INCOM TALK (X) *2) IN -20_dBu_(CARBON_MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) PRIVATE IN L: INCOM PRIVATE ON INCOM OFF OUT L: CHU INCOM MIC OFF GND GND for +5.5V CAMERA No. DATA OUT CAMERA No. STROBE OUT INCOM REAR *2) PANEL L: INCOM REAR PANEL TALK ON IN TALK ON ENG IN L: ENG INTERRUPT ON PROD IN L: PROD INTERRUPT ON PGM (G) OUT *2) MAX. 12 dBu PGM (Y) OUT *2) MAX. 12 dBu PGM (X) OUT *2) MAX. 12 dBu INCOM RECEIVE *2) (G) OUT MAX. 12 dBu INCOM RECEIVE *2) (Y) OUT MAX. 12 dBu INCOM RECEIVE *2) (X) OUT MAX. 12 dBu
*2) To use these interface signals, modification for AT board is required.
9-5-1-5 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (19P, MALE)
No. 2
Signal SEQ CONT OUT (X)
Specifications
3 7 6
2 5
1 4 9 17 8
3 4
12 11 10 19
16 15 14 13 18
OPEN COLLECTOR +(PNP)/ -(NPN) (Selectable with S601/DPR board) STAIR CASE OUT *3 (X) STAIR CASE OUT GND for STAIR CASE (G)
*3) Stair Case signal
(EXTERNAL VIEW) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Signal PGM (X) IN Specifications

RCP/CNU AUX
-20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S2081/AT board) PGM (Y) IN -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S2081/AT board) PGM (G) IN -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S2081/AT board) R TALLY (X) IN ON: 24 Vdc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 Vdc, TTL (L), OPEN R TALLY (Y) IN ON: 24 Vdc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 Vdc, TTL (L), OPEN G TALLY (X) IN ON: 24 Vdc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 Vdc, TTL (L), OPEN G TALLY (Y) IN ON: 24 Vdc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF: 0 Vdc, TTL (L), OPEN ENG (R) (X) OUT ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED ENG (R) (Y) OUT ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED GND CHASSIS GND PROD (R) (X) PROD SYSTEM OUT RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED PROD (R) (Y) PROD SYSTEM OUT RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED ENG (T) (X) IN ENG SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED ENG (T) (Y) IN ENG SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED PROD (T) (X) IN PROD SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED PROD (T) (Y) IN PROD SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED ENG (G) GND for ENG NC No connection PROD (G) GND for PROD
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) TX GND POWER (+) OUT POWER (-) OUT SPARE CHASSIS GND
Specifications CCU SERIAL DATA CCU SERIAL DATA *4) *4) GND for TX RCP POWER, +30 V GND for POWER CHASSIS GND
*4) RCP/CNU : RCP/CNU/BVP/MSU/VCS SERIAL DATA AUX : AUX SERIAL DATA
9-5-1-8 INTERCOM (5P, FEMALE) on the front panel
5 4 3 2
(External view)
No. 1 2
Signal
Specifications
9-5-1-6 WF MODE (4P, FEMALE)

3 4
4 3 1 2
INCOM (T) IN (Y) -20 dBu (CARBON MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) INCOM (T) IN (X) -20 dBu (CARBON MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) INCOM (T) IN (G) GND for INCOM INCOM (R) OUT Max. 12 dBu (X) NC No connection
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
(External view)
9-5-2 Cable Wiring Diagram

CCA-5 Cable (for REMOTE connector)
(See the diagram in 8-3-2-1)
No. 1
Signal SEQ CONT OUT (G)
Specifications OPEN COLLECTOR +(PNP)/ -(NPN) (Selectable with S601/DPR board)
9-6. CCU-900/ 900P, Camera Control Unit

9-6-1-1 AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2 (XLR 3-pin, Male)
No. 10 Signal TALLY OUT Specifications R/G TALLY OUT Q7 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA NC No connection +5.0 V (or OPEN): DIS-EN 16:9/4:3 SELECT GND: EN EN IN (S1002-1/AT board *2 Refer to the following table. tOFF) CHU MIC2 AMP GAIN CONT2 (S1002-1/AT board t ON) 16:9/4:3 SELECT IN +5.0 V (or OPEN): 4 : 3 (S1002-1/AT board GND: 16 : 9 *2 Refer to the following table. t OFF) CHU MIC2 AMP GAIN CONT1 (S1002-1/AT board t ON) No connection NC (S1002-1/AT board *2 Refer to the following table. t OFF) CHU MIC2 AMP GAIN CONT0 (S1002-1/AT board t ON) MIC GAIN CONT2 *3 Refer to the following table. IN
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) *2:
1 3
11 12
(External view)
No. 1 2 3
Signal MIC OUT (G) MIC OUT (X) MIC OUT (Y)
Specifications 0 dBu/ -20 dBu (Selectable with S101, S102/ AT board)

(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
13
9-6-1-2 WF MODE (4-pin Female)

14
4 3 1 2
(External view)
15
No. 1 2 3 4
Signal SEQ CONT OUT (G) SEQ CONT OUT (X)
Specifications OPEN COLLECTOR +(PNP)/ -(NPN)

(Selectable with S601/DPR board)
CONT0. H L H L H
*3:
CONT1 H H L L H
CONT2 H H H H L
STAIR CASE OUT (X) *1 STAIR CASE OUT (G) GND for STAIR CASE
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
CHU MIC AMP GAIN 60 dB 50 dB 40 dB 30 dB 20 dB
*1 : Stair Case signal
9-6-1-3 MIC REMOTE (D-sub 15-pin, Female)
8 15 9
8-pin L L H H
15-pin L H L H
MIC GAIN CONT MIC1/MIC2 ON MIC1 ON MIC2 ON INTERNAL SET
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal .+5.5 V OUT TALLY GND G TALLY OUT R TALLY OUT CHU MIC1 CONT2 AMP CONT1 GAIN CONT0 MIC GAIN CONT1 IN GND (+5.5 V)
Specifications Max. 500 mA GND for TALLY Q9 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA Q9 (NPN)/AT board ON (GND) : Max 30 mA *2 Refer to the following table. *2 Refer to the following table. *2 Refer to the following table. *3 Refer to the following table. GND for 5.5 V
9-6-1-4 4 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (D-sub 25-pin, Female)

13 25 14 1
(External view)
No. Signal 1 2
Specifications
ENG (R) (X) OUT ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED ENG (R) (Y) OUT ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED
No. Signal 3 4 5 6 ENG (G) ENG (T) (X) IN ENG (T) (Y) IN PGM1 (X) IN
Specifications GND for ENG ENG SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED ENG SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S201/AT board) -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S201/AT board) -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S201/AT board) GND for AUX ON : 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF : 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN ON : 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF : 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN CHASSIS GND PROD SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED PROD SYSTEM RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED GND for PROD PROD SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED PROD SYSTEM TALK 0 dBu BALANCED -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S202/AT board) -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S202/AT board) -20 dBu/0 dBu (Selectable with S202/AT board)
No. Signal 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RECALL3 RECALL1 RECALL4 GND NC RECALL10 RECALL5 RECALL6 RECALL7 RECALL8
Specifications LOW ACTIVE LOW ACTIVE LOW ACTIVE No connection LOW ACTIVE LOW ACTIVE LOW ACTIVE LOW ACTIVE LOW ACTIVE
PGM1 (Y) IN
PGM1 (G) IN
9-6-1-6 AUX1 (D-sub 9-pin, Female)

5 9 6 1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
GND AUX8 R TALLY (X) IN R TALLY (Y) IN GND PROD (R) (X) OUT PROD (R) (Y) OUT PROD (G) PROD (T) (X) IN PROD (T) (Y) IN PGM2 (X) IN
No. Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND VTR RX (_) VTR TX (+) GND NC GND VTR RX (+) VTR TX (-) GND
Specifications
No connection
9-6-1-7 AUX2 (D-sub 9-pin, Female)

5 9 6 1
20
PGM2 (Y) IN
21
PGM2 (G) IN
22 23 24 25
AUX7 AUX6 G TALLY (X) IN G TALLY (Y) IN
No. Signal ON : 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF : 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN ON : 24 V dc, TTL (H), SHORT OFF : 0 V dc, TTL (L), OPEN
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
Specifications
9-6-1-5 WF MODE (D-sub 15-pin, Female)
8 15 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GND VTR RX (_) VTR TX (+) GND NC GND VTR RX (+) VTR TX (-) GND
No connection
9-6-1-8 TRUNK LINE1 (D-sub 9-pin, Female)

5 1 9 6
(External view)
No. Signal 1 2 3 4 5 NC NC RECALL9 NC RECALL2
Specifications No connection No connection LOW ACTIVE No connection LOW ACTIVE
No. Signal 1 2 DCD EXT-COM1 (RXD)
Specifications
No. Signal 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Specifications
No. 16 17 18 19 20
Signal CAMERA No. STROB NC ENG INTR IN PROD INTR IN x1/x3 IN
Specifications
EXT-COM1 (TXD) DTR 12 V, 15 k Ohms GND DSR EXT-COM1 (RTS) EXT-COM1 (CTS) NC No connection
9-6-1-9 TRUNK LINE2 (D-sub 9-pin, Female)

5 9 6 1
21 22 23
NC NC x1/x3 ENABLE
No. Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Specifications
24 25
NC NC
No connection L : ENG INTERRUPT ON L : PROD INTERRUPT ON L : x3 (for BVP-9500WS/ 9500WSP) H (OPEN) : x1 No connection No connection L : Enable (for BVP-9500WS/ 9500WSP) H (OPEN) : DIS-EN No connection No connection
DCD EXT-COM1 (RXD) EXT-COM1 (TXD) DTR 12 V, 15 k Ohms GND DSR EXT-COM1 (RTS) EXT-COM1 (CTS) NC No connection
9-6-1-11RCP/CNU (8-pin, Female)

1 2 7 3 8 6 5 4
(External view)
No.
Signal RCP TRS (+) RCP TRS (-) RCP RCV (+) RCP RCV (-) TX GND POWER (+) OUT POWER (_) OUT SPARE CHASSIS GND
Specifications CCU SERIAL DATA CCU SERIAL DATA RCP/CNU/BVP/MSU/VCS SERIAL DATA RCP/CNU/BVP/MSU/VCS SERIAL DATA GND for TX RCP POWER, +30 V GND for POWER CHASSIS GND
9-6-1-10INCOM REMOTE (D-sub 25-pin, Female)
1 2 3 4
13 25 14
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Signal
Specifications
5 6 7 8
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 154 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
+5.5 V OUT Max.500 mA CAMERA No. CK OUT CAMERA No. SPARE TALLY GND GND for TALLY G TALLY OUT open collector ON (GND) : Max.30 mA R TALLY OUT open collector ON (GND) : Max.30 mA TALLY OUT RG TALLY OUT open collector ON (GND) : Max.30 mA CALL OUT open collector ON (GND) : Max.30 mA NC No connection NC No connection NC No connection PRIVATE IN L : INCOM PRIVATE ON INCOM OFF OUT L : CHU INCOM MIC OFF GND GND for +5.5 V No. Signal Specifications
9-6-1-12 Front panel INTERCOM (5-pin, Female)
5 4 3 2
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Signal
Specifications
INCOM (T) IN (Y) -20 dBu (CARBON MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) INCOM (T) IN (X) -20 dBu (CARBON MIC) -60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) INCOM (T) IN (G) GND for INCOM INCOM (R) OUT Max. 12 dBu (X) NC No connection
0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
9-6-2 Cable Wiring Diagram

CCA-5 cable (for RCP/CNU connector)

Main connector input and output signals are as follows. RCP/CCU/MSU/VCS AUX 1/2/3/4
9-7-1-1 BNC connector 75 Ohms

[Input Signal] REFERENCE [Output Signal] CHARACTER 300 mV p-p, loop through
1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
(External view)
700 mV p-p, 300 mV p-p (SYNC) No. Signal TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) TX GND POWER (+) POWER (-) SPARE CHASSIS GND Specifications CNU SERIAL DATA MSU/RCP/CCU/VCS/AUX SERIAL DATA GND for TX *3 *3 CHASSIS GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9-7-1-2 RS232C-1/2/3 *1 (9P, FEMALE)

5 9 1 6
(External view)
RS232C
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal DCD IN RXD IN TXD OUT DTR OUT SIGNAL GND DSR IN RTS OUT CTS IN NC
Specifications DATA CARRIER DETECT RECEIVED DATA TRANSMITTED DATA DATA TERMINAL READY SIGNAL GND DATA SET READY REQUEST TO SEND CLEAR TO SEND -
*3
RS422 *2
CCU1 to CCU6 CONNECTOR 6PIN . . POWER (+) IN 7PIN . . POWER (-) IN RCP1 to RCP6, AUX1, AUX2, MSU 6PIN . . POWER (+) OUT (RCP POWER +25 V) 7PIN . . POWER (-) OUT (GND for Power) VCS CONNECTOR 6PIN . . NOT USED 7PIN . . NOT USED
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal DCD IN RXD IN TXD (+) OUT TXD (-) OUT SIGNAL GND RXD (-) IN RTS OUT CTS IN NC
Specifications DATA CARRIER DETECT RECEIVED DATA TRANSMITTED DATA TRANSMITTED DATA SIGNAL GND RECEIVED DATA REQUEST TO SEND CLEAR TO SEND -
9-7-2 Cable Wiring

9-7-3 Connection Connector

Use the connectors below or the equivalent at its tip when cables are connected to each connector on the connector panel during installation and servicing. Connector name REFERENCE CHARACTER (BNC) RS232C (9P, FEMALE) CCU RCP MSU VCS AUX 1/2/3/4 (8P, FEMALE) Connection connector/cable 1-569-370-12 Connector, BNC
*1 The RS-232C-3 port can be used only when the BKP-7930 is installed. *2 The RS-232C-2 and RS-232C-3 ports can be used for RS422 interfaceing by changing the switch setting of S802 to S806 on the IF-777 board.
1-566-354-11 D-SUB, 9P MALE 1-766-848-11 PLUG, 8P MALE or CCA cable assembly (option) CCA-5-10 (10 m) CCA-5-3 (3 m) CCA-5-30 (30 m)

Main connector input and output signals are shown below. No. 3 4 5 6 7 8
*1
Signal RX (+) RX (-) TX GND POWER (+) POWER (-) SPARE CHASSIS GND
Specifications MSU/RCP/CCU/VCS/AUX SERIAL DATA GND for TX *1 *1 CHASSIS GND
9-8-1-1 BNC connector 75 Ohms

[Input Signal] REFERENCE [Output Signal] CHARACTER 700 mVp-p, 300 mVp-p (SYNC) 300 mVp-p, loop through
9-8-1-2 RS232C (9P, FEMALE)

5 9 1 6
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal DCD IN RXD (+) IN TXD (+) OUT DTR OUT SIGNAL GND DSR IN RTS OUT CTS OUT NC
Specifications DATA CARRIER DETECT RECEIVED DATA TRANSMITTED DATA DATA TERMINAL READY SIGNAL GND DATA SET READY REQUEST TO SEND CLEAR TO SEND -
CCU1 to CCU6 CONNECTOR 6PIN . . POWER (+) IN 7PIN . . POWER (-) IN RCP1 to RCP6, AUX1 Connectors 6PIN . . POWER (+) OUT (RCP POWER +30 V) 7PIN . . POWER (-) OUT (GND for Power) MSU/VCS Connectors NOT USED
9-8-2 Cable Wiring

9-8-3 Connection Connector

Connections made with the connector panels during installation or service should be made with the connectors/complete cable assemblies specified in the following list, or equivalent parts. Connector name REFERENCE CHARACTER (BNC) RS-232C (9P, FEMALE) CCU RCP MSU VCS AUX (8P, FEMALE) Connection connector/cable 1-569-370-12 Connector, BNC

RCP/CCU/MSU/VCS/AUX
1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
(External view)
1-566-354-11 D-SUB, 9P MALE 1-766-848-11 PLUG, 8P MALE or CCA cable assembly (option) CCA-5-10 (10 m) CCA-5-3 (3 m)
No. 1 2
Signal TX (+) TX (-)
Specifications CNU SERIAL DATA
9-9. VCS-700, Video Selector

Main connector input and output signals are shown below. PIX 1 to PIX 6 INPUT: WF 1 to WF 6 INPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p (V), 75 Ohms CHARACTOR INPUT: 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 Ohms PIX A INPUT: 1.0 Vp-p(VBS), 75 Ohms 156 Chapter 9 Connector Pin Assignment BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual WF A INPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms PIX A, PIX B OUTPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms WF A, WF B OUTPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p (V), 75 Ohms SYNC OUTPUT: 0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ohms, negative
9-9-1-1 WF Mode (4P, female)
Pin No 7
Signal
Specifications
4 3
1 2
PIX/WF SEL 1 IN SEL 1: L, SEL 2: L - NC SEL 1: H, SEL 2: L - WF/PIX PIX/WF SEL 2 IN SEL 1: L, SEL 2: H - WF SEL 1: H, SEL 2: H - PIX PORT ENB IN L: ACTIVE SW RESET IN L: RESET NC NC NC NC --------NC NC NC NC +5V POWER SUPPLY OUT max. 500 mA CH1 LED OUT CH2 LED OUT CH3 LED OUT (NPN TRANSISTOR) CH4 LED OUT OPEN COLLECTOR OUT CH5 LED OUT ON: LOW CH6 LED OUT SEQ 3A ON IN L: ON, H: OFF CH 1, 2 and 3 of WF INPUT will be output in sequence when the pin status is LOE(ON). SEQ 3B ON IN L: ON, H: OFF CH 4, 5 and 6 of WF INPUT will be output in sequence when the pin status is LOE(ON). NC NC NC NC --------NC NC NC NC GND SIGNAL GND GND FRAME GND
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
(External view)
Pin No 1 2 3 4
Signal
Specifications
SEG CONT OUT(G) OPEN COLLECTOR SEG CONT OUT(X) STAIR CASE OUT (X) STAIR CASE SIGNAL STAIR CASE OUT (G)
12 - 6 Vp-p
+1
B -0 2 Vdc
9-9-1-2 Remote (8P, female)
1 2 3 4 8
7 6 5
(External view)
27
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal TX(+) TX(-) RX(+) RX(-) TX GND POWER (+) POWER (-) SPARE CHASSIS GND
Specifications VCS SERIAL DATA MSU/CNU SERIAL DATA GNE for TX NOT USED NOT USED CHASSIS GND 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
9-9-1-3 I/O Port (D-SUB 37P, female)

19 1
37
20
( External view )
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6
Signal CH1 ON IN CH2 ON IN CH3 ON IN CH4ON IN CH5 ON IN CH6 ON IN
Specifications L: ON H: OFF

9-10-1Connector Input/Output Signals
1 POWER switch 2 AC IN connector 3 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector 4 AUX REMOTE connector
REMOTE AUX CCU/CNU POWER

I O
AC IN I/O PORT
5 I/O PORT connector
a POWER switch Turns the power to the unit on and off. b ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to this unit using the supplied plug holder. c CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera command network unit remote) connector (8pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of the CCU-700A/ 700AP or the MSU connector of the CNU-700. d AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8pin) e I/O PORT connector (50-pin) Reserved for future use. Main connector input and output signals are shown below.
9-10-1-2I/O PORT (50-pin, Female)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
(External view)
Pin Signal No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 EXT I/O-00 EXT I/O-03 EXT I/O-06 EXT I/O-11 EXT I/O-14 EXT I/O-17 EXT I/O-22 EXT I/O-25 EXT I/O-30 EXT I/O-36 EXT I/O-03 EXT I/O-41 EXT I/O-44 EXT I/O-47 +12 V OUT +12 V OUT SPARE EXT I/O-01 EXT I/O-04 EXT I/O-07 EXT I/O-12 EXT I/O-15 EXT I/O-20 EXT I/O-23 EXT I/O-26 EXT I/O-31 EXT I/O-34 EXT I/O-37 EXT I/O-42 EXT I/O-45 +5 V OUT GND (+5 V) GND (+5 V)
Specifications INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT PORT (*1) INPUT PORT (*1) Utility power 12 V Utility power 12 V No connection INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT PORT (*1) Utility power 5 V GND for utility power 5 V GND for utility power 12 V
9-10-1-1REMOTE (8-pin, Female)

AUX CCU/CNU
1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) TX GND POWER (+) POWER (-) SPARE CHASSIS GND
Specifications MSU Serial data MSU Serial data CCU/CNU/AUX Serial data MSU/RCP/CCU/VCS/AUX GND for TX Not used Not used -CHASSIS GND
Pin Signal No 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
(*1)
Specifications INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (*1) OUTPUT PORT (*1) OUTPUT PORT (*1) INPUT PORT (*1) Utility power 5 V GND for utility power 5 V GND for utility power 12 V No connection
9-10-2Cable Wiring
CCA-5 Cable
EXT I/O-02 EXT I/O-05 EXT I/O-10 EXT I/O-13 EXT I/O-16 EXT I/O-21 EXT I/O-24 EXT I/O-27 EXT I/O-32 EXT I/O-35 EXT I/O-40 EXT I/O-43 EXT I/O-46 +5 V OUT GND (+5 V) GND (+12 V) SPARE
9-10-3Connection Connector
Connections made with the connector panels during installation or service should be made with the connectors/complete cable assemblies specified in the following list, or equivalent parts. Connector name Connection connector/cable
INPUT OUTPUT
ON: 5 V OFF : 0 V TTL LEVEL Darlington transistor drive One port: max 5 mA (VEXT: 1.5 V, RETX: 1.1 kOhms) All ports total: max 60 mA
REMOTE AUX (8-pin) Plug 8-pin, Male (Sony part number: 1-766-848-11) REMOTE CCU/CNU (8-pin) or CCA-5 cable assembly (Option) CCA-5-3 (3 m)/CCA-5-10 (10 m) I/O PORT (50-pin) Plug, D-SUB 50-pin, Male (Sony part number: 1-566-35811) or JAE DDU-50PF-F0 or equivalent

1POWER switch 2AC IN connector
a POWER switch Turns the power on and off of this unit. b AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using an optional AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to this unit using an optional plug retainer. c AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8pin) d CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera command network unit remote) connector (8pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of the CCU or the MSU connector of the CNU.
REMOTE
AUX CCU/CNU
POWER I O
-AC IN
4CCU/CNU REMOTE connector 3AUX REMOTE connector

9-12-1-1AUX REMOTE
CCU/CNU REMOTE (8P, FEMALE)
1 2 7 3 8 6 4 5
(External view)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C
Signal TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) TX GND POWER (+) IN POWER (-) IN SPARE CHASSIS GND
Specifications RCP SERIAL DATA CCU/CNU/AUX SERIAL DATA GND for TX RCP POWER, +10 V to +30 V GND for POWER CHASSIS GND
No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal SPARE I/O PORT 1 SPARE I/O PORT 2 SPARE I/O PORT 3 SPARE I/O PORT 4 SPARE I/O PORT 5 POWER OUT GND
Specifications (CMOS LEVEL 3.3 HI ACTIVE) Assignable
+5V DC -
9-12-2Connection Connector
Connections made with the connector panels during installation or service should be made with the connectors/complete cable assemblies specified in the following list, or equivalent parts. Connector function Connection connector
9-12-1-2EXT I/O
(9P, FEMALE)
5 1
(External view)
1-706-848-11 PLUG, 8P MALE or CCU/CNU REMOTE Cable assembly (Option) (8P, FEMALE) CCA-5-3 (3 m), CCA-5-10 (10 m), CCA-5-30 (30 m) EXT I/O 1-560-651-00 D-SUB 9P, MALE (9P, FEMALE) 1-561-749-00 JUNCTION SHELL 9P
AUX REMOTE
No. 1
Signal PREVIEW S1
Specifications CONTACT (X) (Modification is required for some units) CONTACT (Y) (Modification is required for some units)
PREVIEW S2
9-13.CA-905K/F/L, Large Lens Adaptor

TRIAX (CA-905K) Kings type Tri-LDC Connector Series For details, see www.kingselectronics.com Lemo Kings-type 4A Series For details, see www.lemo.ch TRIAX (CA-905F) Fischer type Series 1051 For details, see www.fischerconnectors.com FIBRE (CA-905L) LEMO 3K.93 Series For details, see www.lemo.ch Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal I/O Specifications No connection No connection SERIAL DATA SERIAL DATA GND for DATA +12 V GND for +12V (VIDEO (X) IN) CHASSIS GND NC NC IIC DATA IIC CLK GND POWER (+) IN POWER (-) IN NC CHASSIS GND
9-13-1-1REMOTE (8P, male) 9-13-1-2LENS (12P, male)

1 2 3 4 (External view)
(External view)
7 8 6 5
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Signal RET VIDEO ENABLE RET 2 ENABLE GND AUTO +5 V
I/O
Specifications
Pin No 14
Signal RET 1 ON
I/O IN
Specifications
12
OUT ENABLE: GND DISABLE: +5 V or OPEN OUT ENABLE: GND DISABLE: +5 V or OPEN GND IN AUTO: +5 V MANU: 0 V or OPEN IRIS CONT IN +2.0 V to +7.0 V (+3.4 V = F16, +6.2 V = F2.8) NC (UNREG) IRIS POSI- OUT +2.0 V to +7.0 V TION (+3.4 V = F16, +6.2 V = F2.8) AUTO/ IN AUTO IRIS: 0 V MANU MANUAL IRIS: +5 V EXTENDER OUT EX ON: 0 ON/ OFF OFF: +4.8 V ZOOM OUT WIDE: +2 POSITION TELE: +7 V LAUX1 OUT LENS AUX (SERIAL (LENS SERIAL DATA) RXD) LAUX1 IN LENS AUX (SERIAL (LENS SERIAL DATA) TXD)
15
16
17
18
19 20 21
22
23
9-13-1-3LENS (36P, female)

18 1
24 25 26 27
36 (External view)
19
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal NC NC NC +12 V (LENS) LENS DC GND GND (Z POT FOLLOW) LENS EXT1 (SERIAL RXD) LENS EXT2 LENS EXT3 LENS AUX IRIS POSI
I/O
Specifications 28
No connection No connection No connection OUT +12 V (2 A max) for +12 V (LENS) GND No connection *2 (LENS SERIAL DATA)
29 30 31
32
IN
33
9 10 11 12
13
ZOOM POSI
IN *2 IN *2 OUT ON: GND OFF: High impedance IN Zi 10 kOhms 2 to 7 V "3.4 0.1 V (F16)" "6.2 0.1 V (F2.8)" IN Zi 10 kOhms 2 to 7 V "2 V (WIDE), 7 V (TELE)"
34
35 36
Zi 10 kOhms ON: L OFF: High impedance RET 2 ON IN Zi 10 kOhms ON: L OFF: High impedance FOCUS IN Zi 10 kOhms POSI 2 to 7 V "2 V (MIN), 7 V ()" IRIS CONT OUT 2 to 7 V "3.4 0.1 V (F16)" "6.2 0.1 V (F2.8)" Zo 1 kOhms IRIS AUTO/ OUT AUTO: L MANU MANU: H (SERIAL Zo 1 kOhms TXD) (LENS SERIAL DATA) NC No connection NC No connection LENS R OUT ON: L TALLY ON OFF: H Zo 1 kOhms EXP POSI- IN Zi 10 kOhms TION 1 to 4 V 1 V: -7.5 4 V: +7.5 RET 3 ON IN Zi 10 kOhms ON: L OFF: High impedance LENS IN *1 ADRS A LENS IN *1 ADRS B LENS IN *1 ADRS C LENS IN *1 ADRS D EXTENDER OUT ON: GND 1 ON OFF: High impedance EXTENDER OUT ON: GND 2 ON OFF: High impedance (F DEM No connection FAR) INCOM 1 IN Zi 10 kOhms ENG/PRD ENG: GND PRD: High impedance INCOM 2 IN Zi 10 kOhms ENG/PRD ENG: GND PRD: High impedance INCOM IN Zi 10 kOhms MIC 1 ON ON: GND OFF: High impedance INCOM IN Zi 10 kOhms MIC 2 ON ON: GND OFF: High impedance (F CONT SIG) No connection (F DEM No connection NEAR)
Zi 10 kOhns 1: High impedance 0: 0 +0.5 V LENS ADRS A (Low-order bit) LENS ADRS D (High-order bit)
*1
*2
Zi 10 kZ 1: High impedance 0: 0 0.5 V
HD video Pin No EXT3 1 1 1 1 MODE EXTENDER OFF EXT-A (x1.5) ON EXT-B (x2) ON EXT-C (x2.5) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal S-DATA NC NC SCK NC NC NC G TALLY NC NC NC VF VIDEO (Y) VIDEO GND VF VIDEO (PB) VF VIDEO (PR) NC R TALLY NC UNREG GND NC I/O Specifications
EXT1 1 1 0 0
EXT2 1 0 1 0
9-13-1-4VF (20P, male) (BKP-9057)
(External view)
SD video Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 Signal I/O Specifications
13 14 15 No connection H: NORMAL (4:3) L: WIDE (16:9) 16 17 18 19 20 No connection No connection H: Indicator lights L: Indicator goes out
IN/ TTL level OUT No connection No connection IN TTL level No connection No connection No connection IN ON: 5 V OFF: GND No connection No connection No connection IN VS = 1.0 V p-p, Zi = 75 Ohms GND for Y VIDEO IN IN 0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75 Ohms 0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75 Ohms No connection ON: 5 V OFF: GND No connection GND for UNREG No connection
1 (VTR SAVE) NC 16:9 MODE IN (REC ALARM) (COMP/ VBS SW IN/ OUT) NC NC G TALLY IN PEAKING OFF Y (X) NC VF VIDEO (X) (AUDIO CTL) B-Y (X) IN IN IN
IN
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
9-13-1-5VF (25P, female) (BKP-9057)

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
1 V p-p, VF: Zi = 1.5 kOhms No connection 1.0 V p-p, VF: Zi = 1.5 kOhms
(External view)
SD video Pin No Signal VF R VIDEO (X) I/O Specifications
IN
15
R-Y (X)
IN
16 17 18 19 20
NC TALLY IND IN NC GND NC
700 mV p-p, VF: Zi = 1.5 kOhms, 75 % color bars 700 mV p-p, VF: Zi = 1.5 kOhms, 75 % color bars No connection H: Indicator lights L: Indicator goes out No connection GND No connection
2 3
4 5
6 7 8 9 10
OUT V = 714 mV p-p (NTSC) 700 mV p-p (PAL) Zo = 75 Ohms 5 % POSI NC No connection VF G (X) OUT B/W: Y/RET, COLOR: G Zo = 75 Ohms 5 % 1 V p-p NC No connection VF B OUT V = 714 mV p-p (NTSC) VIDEO (X) 700 mV p-p (PAL) Zo = 75 Ohms 5 % POSI RET ON OUT ON: GND, OFF: +5 V +12 V (VF) OUT +12 V dc +12 V (VF) OUT +12 V dc UP TALLY OUT ON: +12 V ON OFF: 0 V NC No connection (VF RET (V = 1.0 V p-p VIDEO(X)) Zo = 75 Ohms 5 % )
Pin No 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Signal R TALLY ON VF SEL COL/BW NC VF R VIDEO (G) PEAKING OFF VF G VIDEO (G) CHASSIS GND VF B VIDEO (G) VF DC GND VF DC GND TALLY GND NC (VF RET VIDEO OUT (G)) G TALLY ON NC 16:9 ON
I/O
Specifications
Pin No 16
Signal NC (BATT IND) CHASSIS GND G TALLY GND (+12 V) GND (+12 V) NC (VF SEL) NC (H EXPAND) NC NC NC (V EXPAND) -
I/O
Specifications No connection (ON: +5 V OFF: 0 V)
OUT ON: 5.0 V 0.5 V OFF: 0 +0.5 V IN COLOR:GND B/W: High impedance No connection OUT GND for VF R VIDEO OUT OFF: GND ON: High impedance OUT GND for VF G VIDEO CHASSIS GND
17 18 19 20 21
22 OUT GND for VF B VIDEO GND for +12 V (VF) GND for +12 V (VF) GND for TALLY No connection (GND for VF RET VIDEO) 23 24 25
OUT ON: +5 V OFF: 0 V GND for +12 V GND for +12 V No connection (BW: 0 V COLOR: +5 V) No connection (EXPAND (4:3): GND NORMAL: +5 V) No connection No connection No connection (EXPAND (4:3): GND NORMAL: +5 V)
23 24 25
OUT ON: 5.0 V0.5 V OFF: 0 +0.5 V No connection OUT ON: GND OFF: High impedance
HD video Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Y VIDEO PR VIDEO GND PR VIDEO (X) PB VIDEO GND PB VIDEO (X) PEAKING LEVEL +12 V +12 V NC S-DATA R TALLY NC (EFFECT) NC Y VIDEO GND S-CK I/O Specifications
OUT VS = 1.0 Vp-p, Zo = 75 Ohms GND for PR VIDEO OUT V = 0.7 Vp-p, Zo = 75 Ohms GND for PB VIDEO OUT V = 0.7 Vp-p, Zo = 75 Ohms IN 0 to 5 Vdc 0 V: PEAKING OFF 5 V: PEAKING MAX OUT +12 V (at 4 A) OUT +12 V (at 4 A) No connection IN/ TTL level OUT OUT ON: +5 V OFF: 0 V No connection (ON: +5 V OFF: 0 V) No connection GND for Y VIDEO OUT TTL level
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
1 10
Glossary - Terms and Definitions
10
10-1. Hardware
The following are some technical terms that are frequently used in camera brochures or technical papers. Adaptive detail A technique used to eliminate unpleasant edges on areas of the picture with strong contrast. A simple limiter causes detail edges to become thick. Adaptive DTL is a very effective function which reduces the amplitude of the detail, rather than clipping it. It has the further benefit of reducing aliasing Adaptive highlight control To improve picture highlight handling, the picture is divided into several zones depending on the brightness level. A knee circuit provides varying amounts of knee compression; areas with little information are compressed more, while those containing more information have less compression. In the case of Sony's HDC/BVP-Series cameras, Adaptive Highlight Control is only applied to the video levels higher than the knee point. Aspect ratio conversion Modern programme production can requires origination in either 16:9 or 4:3 formats. Sony video cameras for broadcasting and professional use provide the aspect ratio conversion function in combination with a digital filter. Some other manufacturers perform this function by changing the reading process of the CCD. Auto knee/DCC A device that automatically adjusts the knee point and knee slope to increase the dynamic range depending on the subject. Black Gamma Black Gamma is a function to change the Gamma curve of dark portions of the picture. Black shading correction Black shading correction is used to compensate for the irregular black shading which can be caused by variations in the dark current of CCD elements and the characteristics of power circuits. Boost frequency Horizontal detail correction is usually performed by boosting the spatial frequency characteristics between around 3 to 4 MHz. The peak of the frequency boost can be adjusted in order to meet the users' different tastes. A higher detail frequency results in a finer, more film-like look. CCD CCD is the acronym for Charge Coupled Device. It is a kind of semiconductor that converts an optical image into electronic signals - the heart of a camera. After accomplishing the conversion, each pixel (a kind of photoelectric convertor) on the CCD first holds the signal and then transfers it to the next cell, in a way often described as a 'bucket brigade'. According to the transfer method, there are three types of CCDs - IT , FIT and FT CCD, although only two of these -IT and FIT are used by Sony. Colour bars Almost all of the video cameras used for broadcasting - have a colour bar generator. Although the colour bar signal was originally developed for the adjustment of an analogue encoder, it has become a standard function for professional video camera. It can be used to monitor the amplitudes of the luminance and chrominance paths in the programme chain. Crispening Detail correction enhances picture sharpness but at the same time also emphasizes the noise, which can increase the picture noise. Crispening is a technique that removes small amplitude DTL to improve the signal to noise ratio. Crispening is also often referred to as "noise coring". Detail comb filter The detail comb filter is used to reduce the diagonal detail that interferes with the sub carrier to generate cross colour in an encoded signal. However, subjective resolution is reduced if the diagonal DETAIL is reduced too much. DTL mix ratio Adjusts the mixture of detail correction before and after gamma correction. Can be used to affect the relative amount of detail in the light and dark areas of the picture. Electronic soft focus The detail circuit can make the picture sharper, but it can also soften the picture by inverting the polarity. When used this way, Electronic Soft Focus is a function to generate a gentle film-like picture. It is more effective to improve the look of a presenter's skin colour when used in combination with the Skin Tone DTL. Encoder Inside the camera, video signals are processed as independent Red Green and Blue component signals. The encoder is a device used to convert the component signals into composite signals such as NTSC and PAL. Flare correction In an optical system, reflections and diffusion can cause dark areas of the picture to appear lighter than they should. Flare correction electronically compensates for this phenomenon. Gamma correction A CRT has a non-linear relationship between screen brightness and signal level. This non-linearity is known as the Gamma Law of the CRT Logically; a TV set should include compensation for the error because it is part of a CRT's characteristics. However, in consideration of the total cost, the industry has reached an agreement with TV stations that the nonlinear correction should be carried out during acquisition. This camera function is the Gamma Correction. Although most broadcasters and TV stations have their own internal standard for gamma, this can vary significantly between them. As a result, camera manufacturers need to include various gamma settings to accommodate the different requirements. Different gamma settings can also be used as a way of creating a different 'look' to an image. Gen lock When using multiple cameras are used together in a system, it is necessary to synchronize the horizontal, vertical and subcarrier phases of the cameras. Gen lock is a technique developed for this purpose to
166 Chapter 10 Glossary - Terms and Definitions BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
synchronize the cameras to an external composite video input. Horizontal image enhancement (H DTL) Horizontal image enhancement is performed by boosting the frequency characteristic of the video signals. In the case of analogue cameras, this is carried out by using the Low Pass Filters and Delay Lines, for while in digital cameras. it is achieved by using digital filters. H/V Ratio Adjusts the relative amounts of detail correction in horizontal and vertical directions. Image enhancement A function which gives an increase in the perceived sharpness or resolution of a picture. It is extremely difficult to quantify the effects of image enhancement, so it does not appear in brochure specifications of the camera. However, it has an important influence on subjective picture quality. Image enhancement is sometimes referred to as Aperture Correction, Contour Correction, Detail Correction, or more simply as Detail (DTL) In cameras, image enhancement is usually applied both horizontally (horizontal detail, or H DTL) and vertically (vertical detail or V DTL) directions. IT/FIT In an IT type of CCD, adjacent to the light-sensitive pixels there are columns of cells dedicated for vertical transfer, known as Vertical Shift Registers. The electronic signals are transferred from the pixels to the vertical shift registers during vertical blanking. Finally, the signals reach a row of cells for horizontal transfer, the Read Out Register, from where the signals are output as video signals. Although the registers are covered by an opaque metal film to prevent any light from reaching the cells, sometimes leakage still happens under a strong light, which causes smear. To avoid this phenomenon, in an FIT type CCD, there is additional storage area added to the CCD which enables the vertical transfer to be performed much more quickly so to minimize the chance of light leakage even under a strong light. However, this additional storage increases the overall size of the sensor, and hence the cost. Recently, there have been great advances in IT CCD technology and the gap between IT and FIT has been dramatically reduced. Knee aperture Knee compression applied to the picture will also reduce detail in the highlights. Knee aperture is a technique which allows independent adjustment of the amount of detail in the highlights. Knee correction The dynamic range of a natural scene is very large, but that of a video interface standard is limited. If we use a camera to shoot a subject against a very bright background, if we use the iris to adjust for the correct exposure of the subject, the bright backgraound of the picture will become almost completely white. However, if we expose for the bright portion, the subject will become very dark. Knee correction is a function that solves this problem by compressing the level of the bright area to meet that in the video standard so as to make the dynamic range seem larger. When represented graphically, the characteristic resembles the shape of a knee. Knee point and knee slope Knee point is the starting point of the knee correction process, and the knee slope is its compression rate.
Knee saturation In a conventional knee circuit, knee correction is performed independently in R/ G/B channels. When shooting a coloured object, the amount of overexposure, and therefore the amount of knee compression, will be different in each of the three colour channels. This will result in a change in both the colour phase and saturation of the coloured highlight. Subjectively, skin tones will "wash out" and appear yellowish. Knee saturation is a technique used to balance the colouring to avoid this phenomenon. Level dependency Just like Crispening reduces noise, level dependency is a circuit that decreases the detail value in dark areas. Limiter CCD sensors have a very large dynamic range, and can produce outputs up to 6 times normal signal white level. On strong highlights, this can cause excessive detail edges on the picture, giving an unnatural "cardboard cut-out" appearance to the picture A limiter is a circuit used to constrain the peak value of the detail correction signal. Linear matrix The linear matrix is used in order to correct the colour response of the camera to established standards, such as SMPTE or EBU. The matrix compensates for differences between the actual colour response of the optical prism and the theoretical ideal. Typically six matrix values are used to mix between the RGB signals. User adjustment of the matrix characteristics can have a strong influence on the subjective colouring of the picture, but there is severe interaction between the 6 parameters, which makes the adjustment very difficult. But see Multi Matrix. Mix DTL/NAM DTL The recent trend has been for cameras to create Vertical Detail from all three R/G/B channels. The BVPE10 series cameras include two alternative methods for combining these three signals. Mix DTL provides a simple sum of the three components, while NAM DTL uses a Non Additive Mix, which uses whichever signal has the largest amplitude. NAM DTL can be very effective when shooting material in coloured lighting, for example at a music or theatre event. However, it can introduce unwanted sideeffects, such as increasing the noise in the picture, so the choice of techniques can be selected by the user. NAM DTL is not applied to horizontal detail, since it would increase aliasing. Multi matrix Conventional matrix adjustment can be used to change the colour response of the camera, but with severe interaction between different colours. Multi matrix on the other hand offers an easy way of manipulating colours to achieve a particular colour effect. For instance, it is possible to change the colour phase and saturation of red colour only. The colour spectrum is divided into 16 separate ranges, each independently adjustable. Conventional matrix requires six matrix coefficients. However, to further simplify operation, Sony's cameras use dedicated software to reduce the adjustments required to just two, colour phase and saturation. On-chip-lens In order to achieve high resolution, CCDs generally use large numbers of pixels. However, increasing the number of pixels means decreasing the individual Chapter 10 Glossary - Terms and Definitions 167 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
10
pixel size. When the pixel size becomes smaller, less incident light can be gathered, which results in lower sensitivity. In all CCD devices, only part of the sensor area is composed of active photosensors, the rest being used for 'housekeeping -shift registers and control gates. The on-chip lens is a series of micro lenses located above each pixel to concentrate the light onto the photosensitive area, rather than being wasted in the inactive areas. As a result, sensitivity can be increased with no loss of performance in other respects Optical filter There are two types of optical filters, Neutral Density (ND) filter and Colour Temperature Conversion (CC) filter. The former is like a pair of sunglasses for the camera to avoid the iris to be stopped down too much under a very strong light, while the latter works like a pair of coloured glasses to compensate for the colour temperature beyond the white balance compensation range. Both of them are integrated on one or more built-in filter disks, and can be controlled manually or remotely controlled from one of the camera control panels. In some cameras, a very wide range of electronic colour correction can eliminate the need for an optical CC filter. By changing the iris f-stop required for correct exposure, the ND filter also allows the user to control the depth-of-field for given lighting conditions. Optical low pass filter A CCD imager uses discrete sensing elements (pixels) to sample the incoming light from the image. If the image contains very fine details, (a high spatial frequencies) these could cause beat interference (moire patterning) with the CCD structure, a problem known as aliasing. To prevent this, a CCD camera includes a special optical low pass filter which limits the high special frequencies. Detail Out of green Older cameras create Vertical DTL from the Green channel and add it to each channel to provide image enhancement. This method helps reduce the number of delay lines required, but does not perform well in certain situations such as a picture of a deep red flower. Some cameras create V DTL from R/G channels. Pedestal/Master black Controls the displayed value the darkest areas of the picture. If the black level is too high, the picture will be grey, lacking in true blacks. If the Black Level is too low, the picture will be "crushed", with information lost in the dark areas. Prism block for colour separation All broadcast and professional cameras use three CCDs, one each for Red, Green and Blue. The prism block breaks down light into its red, green, and blue components, and is an essential component for a CCD camera. Skin tone DTL Skin tone DTL is a function that allows the user to change the detail value only for one specific colour range. It was originally designed to conceal imperfections in an announcer's face by reducing the DTL only on his/her face. The colour range over which it operates, and the detail setting applied to this range, can be adjusted by the user, usually with an Automatic setting (Skin Tone Auto Hue). In many modern cameras, it can be used for the full colour spectrum, not just for skin colours, and can increase, as well as
reduce, the amount of detail. So it can be a useful function for intentionally emphasizing certain scenes such as the surface of a lawn. Vertical image enhancement (V DTL) Vertical image enhancement increases the sharpness of a picture in the vertical direction, and is achieved using a 2H delay line. White balance Unlike the human eye, most TV cameras cannot adjust automatically for changes in the colour temperature of the lighting on the scene. White balance is the technique used to compensate the camera settings for changes in the lighting. This can be achieved manually, using the RGB white balance controls, or automatically, using the Auto White function when the camera is viewing a white card. White balance adjustment can also be used to deliberately change the appearance of a scene, for example to create the appearance of a sunset scene, or moonlight. White clip/Black clip The range between black level and the maximum white level is determined by video signal standards. The white clip and black clip are the circuits used to prevent video signals from exceeding this range. White shading correction The optical characteristics of lenses can cause variations in sensitivity across the picture, especially when the range extender is used. To compensate for this, the camera employs white shading correction (sometimes known as modulation shading) to correct the errors. Uneven sensitivity can also be caused by variations in the light-to-voltage conversion in a CCD, so individual settings for RGB white shading compensation. However these errors are very small in modern CCDs.
10-2. Software
Software plays an important role in cameras today. It is not too strong to say that a camera without software is just like a body without a brain. In modern digital cameras, software carries out two functions. Firstly, internal software performs the calculations required for the basic functioning of the camera, to provide detail correction etc. Secondly, it provides the user interface which allows operators to change the setup of the camera for different preferences or requirements. Auto black balance (ABB) Auto black balance automatically adjusts the Red Green and Blue black levels to eliminate any colour errors when the lens iris is completely closed. Sometimes, black set is also carried out at the same time. Some CCD cameras use it to perform APR (Automatic Pixel Restoration) at the same time as auto black balance for convenience. Auto iris Auto iris is a function that ensures correct exposure by automatically controlling the aperture (lens opening) based on the mean or the peak value of video signals. The area of the picture used by the auto iris circuit can be varied to take account of the picture content. For example, the auto iris can be made to use only the central area of the picture, or eliminate the upper part to ignore the sky in a scene Auto set up Auto set up includes a number of functions for camera automatic adjustment which can be divided into Auto White Balance (AWB), Auto Tracing White (ATW), Auto Black Balance (ABB), Level Auto Setup, Auto White Shading, Auto Black Shading, etc. Auto level Auto Level is an automatic technique for ensuring the camera is always operating under know, optimum conditions. The functions adjusted depend on the camera, but will typically include automatic black, white and gamma adjustments. The introduction of modern, high stability digital cameras has reduced the need for frequent auto level setting. Auto tracing white (ATW) The BVP-E10 series includes an Auto Trace White function, which uses intelligent automation to determine the optimum white balance setting for a given scene. In the past, this function was usually found in low-end or consumer type cameras. However in most broadcast applications, camera operators (or vision controllers) check and control the colour balance from an operator control panel. Nevertheless, ATW can provide an effective aid to the operators when shooting in difficult, rapidly changing lighting conditions. Auto white balance (AWB) Auto white balance automatically adjusts colour temperature when shooting a white or neutral subject. Auto white shading/Auto black shading Both of them automatically adjust the shading. Auto black shading is readily carried out when the lens is closed. However, to achieve accurate RGB white shading requires an accurately calibrated test chart and very uniform lighting. The BVP-E10 offers an alternative mode of auto white shading where the Red and Blue channels are adjusted to match the Green, which is not changed. This allows the adjustment to be Chapter 10 Glossary - Terms and Definitions 169 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual carried out when the absolute accuracy of the chart and lighting is uncertain. Black set Black Set adjustment ensures that the black balance of the camera does not change when the camera gain is increased. This adjustment is usually carried out automatically at the same time as Auto Black. File system Increasing the number of camera functions also expands the number of its adjustment items. In order to improve the ease of operation, operational and engineering adjustments are stored in files in the camera head. For further security, reference and scene files can also be stored 'offline' in a memory card. Lens file In broadcast use, camera lenses are often changed to meet different shooting environments. Since each lens has its own characteristic, some camera adjustments should be optimised every time the lens is changed. In order to improve the operability, lens files are used to store data that can be recalled to simplify adjustment and to save time. In the case of the BVP-E10 series cameras used with modern digital lenses, the camera can automatically recognize the type of lens in use, and recall the appropriate file. Reference file The reference file is used to store data representing normal operation of the camera- for example, gamma setting, white clip level, etc. However the requirement will vary according to each user's requirements, so when a camera system is installed, it is preferable to create a custom reference file. The reference data is also the target value for "auto level set up", including both analogue and digital control data and also switch settings. Scene file A scene file can be used to store settings for specific production requirements. For instance, a camera setting data made during rehearsal can be stored in a scene file and then be recalled during an actual take. If a camera is used for a regular programme - a game show, for example - a scene file can be created for that programme, which can be quickly recalled each time. Scene files are stored in the camera, and can be easily transferred to another camera using the MSU.
10
10-3. Camera characteristics

Most of the camera characteristics cannot be properly represented by numbers on a specification sheet. Good values do not always equal good picture quality. Judging by human eyes is one of the most important processes to evaluate a camera. The following are a few technical terms to be familiar with: Modulation depth Modulation depth is one aspect of a camera's fundamental performance, and relates to its ability to respond to the fine details in a scene. To evaluate this, the camera shoots a Multiburst or frequency sweep chart containing closely spaced black and white vertical lines. This explores the frequency characteristics of the camera between 0.5 MHz and 5 MHz or higher, and the camera output measured using a waveform monitor. Gamma, Knee and matrix should be switched off for this test. When image enhancement (detail) is switched off, all cameras will show a response that falls off with increasing frequency, but that fall should ideally be small. Depth of Modulation is usually expressed as the output at %MHz in relation to at 0.5 MHz, in percentage terms. With detail switched on, the same technique can be used to set the detail correction to flatten the frequency response. If excessive detail is used, the picture will look unnatural, and noise will be worsened. Power consumption and heating Most of the power consumed by the camera turns to heat, which can lead to poor performance, reduced stability and unreliability. Also, when the camera is used hand held, or shoulder mounted, excessively high temperatures of the camera can be very uncomfortable for the operators. Using a cooling fan to reduce the temperature is not a good solution, because it can lead to unwanted audible noise. So, low power consumption is an essential factor. Reliability Reliability is one of the most important factors when we evaluate a camera. Unlike other broadcasting equipment, cameras are often used outside under severe circumstances such as live broadcasting of skiing events below the freezing point or of baseball in mid-summer. For coverage of all live events, where there is no opportunity to repeat a shot, reliability always has first priority and a camera malfunction is not acceptable. Resolution When talking about camera resolution, this usually means horizontal resolution. Somewhat similar to Depth of Modulation, this refers to the limiting resolution of the camera - the smallest detail which can be resolved. Again it is measured by viewing a Multiburst or video sweep chart, but for convenience this should be calibrated in TV lines (TVL). For historical reasons, this measurement is rather confusingly expressed as "TV lines per picture height" - how many line pairs could be fitted into the height of the picture. Great care should be taken when comparing the performance of 16:9 and 4:3 cameras. Even if the cameras have the same subjective appearance, the 16:9 camera will always have a lower numerical resolution. In the past, tube cameras had resolution that was similar to that of the TV system as a whole. However today, modern cameras can have resolution of 900 TVL or more. Since the TV system bandwidth is closely defined (limited to around 500 TVL in the case of the serial digital interface), camera resolution is less important, and the performance in the actual video bandwidth - Depth of Modulation - is much more important. S/N (signal-to-noise ratio, or SNR), Sensitivity and dynamic range In a good camera, the noise level will be low, and difficult to see in a normal picture, but is most evident when the camera is capped, producing only a black output. The black level is amplified by gamma and camera gain greatly affects the S/N, which can vary between different manufacturers and even - different models from the same manufacturer.. S/N is also changed by different DTL settings. To provide a standard measurement, it is usually measured when IRIS is closed, gamma is off, DTL is off, Chroma is off, and the pedestal level is set at 5%, and with the measuring instrument set to measure in a specified bandwidth. It can also be instructive to measure the camera under normal operating conditions, with all corrections switched on. However, since these operating settings will vary a lot between different users, they are not included in specification sheets. There is a close relationship between S/N, sensitivity, and dynamic range. When we raise the sensitivity, the S/N and dynamic range will decrease. So a key part of camera design is to choose the optimum balance between these conflicting factors. Although the measured value of the S/N is important, it seems that the subjective visual assessment of the picture under actual operating conditions is vital to understanding the real performance of a camera system. Weight and balance Clearly, less weight is better for shoulder-operated or hand held equipment. However, for operating comfort, the balance of the camera and lens combination is of even greater importance.
1 11
Specifications
11
11-1.BVP-E10, Color Video Camera

General Power requirements Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature Mass (Approx.) Dimensions
168 (6 5/8)
12 V DC (10.7 to 17 V DC) 13 W -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) 2.5 kg (5 lb 8 oz) (not including viewfinder)
Input connectors MIC
XLR 3-pin, female (1) -60 dBu (adjustable to -20 dBu with the CCU), balanced
Output connectors TEST OUT VF
BNC-type (1) 1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohm terminated 20-pin (1)
Input/output connectors LENS 12-pin (1) CA 68-pin (2) Supplied accessories Operation Manual (1) (Paper document, English only) CD-ROM Operation Manual (1) (multi-language) Label for assignable button and handle buttons (1 set) Optional accessories For BVP-E10/E10WS BVF-10 1.5-type Black-and-White Viewfinder BVF-20W 2-type Black-and-White Viewfinder BVF-55 5-type Black-and-White Viewfinder CA-570/950 Camera Adaptor For BVP-E10P/E10WSP BVF-10CE 1.5-type Black-and-White Viewfinder BVF-20WCE 2-type Black-and-White Viewfinder BVF-55CE 5-type Black-and-White Viewfinder CA-570P/950P Camera Adaptor Common to BVP-E10/E10P/E10WS/E10WSP CAC-12 Microphone Holder LCR-1 Rain Cover LC-304SFT Soft Carrying Case VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor VFH-550 5-inch Viewfinder Sports Hood Memory Stick Recommended equipment CCU-550A/550AP/700A/700AP/950/950P Camera Control Unit MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel RM-B150 Remote Control Unit VCS-700 Video Selector CNU-500/700 Camera Command Network Unit
VF
OUTPUT
LE
OFF ON SEL BLK MIC1 LEVEL
VTR START
STATUS ON OFF CANCEL MENU MENU DISPLAY GENLOCK
125 (5)
Pick-up device Pick-up device
2/3-type, interline transfer CCD Device configuration RGB 3-CCD system Picture elements BVP-E10/E10WS: 980 (h) x 988 (v) BVP-E10P/E10WSP: 980 (h) x 582 effective (v)
Optical specifications Spectral system F1.4 prism system Built-in filters ND filters 1: Clear 2: 1/4 ND 3: 1/16 ND 4: 1/64 ND Color temperature A: Cross filter conversion filters B: 3200K (Clear) (BVP-E10WS/ C: 4300K E10WSP only) D: 6300K Electrical characteristics Sensitivity 2,000 lux (F11, typical) Reflection ratio of 89.9% Minimum subject illumination Video signal-tonoise ratio About 0.5 lux (F1.4, +36 dB gain) BVP-E10/E10WS: 65 dB (typical) BVP-E10P/E10WSP: 63 dB (typical) BVP-E10/E10P: 80% (typical) at 5 MHz BVP-E10WS/E10WSP: 80% (typical) at 5 MHz (16:9) 60% (typical) at 5 MHz (4:3) -140 dB (typical) 600%
Modulation
Smear Dynamic range 172 Chapter 11 Specifications BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
WHITE BAL
GAIN
VTR
NS
SHUTTER
AUTO W/B BAL WHT
105 (4 1/4)
291 (11 1/2)
219 (8 5/8)
291 (11 1/2)
11-2.CA-570/ 570P, Camera Adaptor

Dimensions
PAL
NTSC
221 (8 3/4)
193 (7 5/8)
131 (5 1/4)
General Power consumption 11 W Operating tempera- -20C to +45C(-4F to ture +113F) Storage temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) Dimensions 131 x 221 x 193 mm (w/h/d) (5 1/4 x 8 3/4 x 7 5/8 inches) Mass (Approx.) 2.7 kg (5 lb 15 oz) Input/output connectors MIC IN (2ch) XLR type 3-pin, Female, 600 ohms, balanced DC IN XLR type, 4-pin, DC 10.5 to 17 V DC OUT 4-pin, DC 10.5 to 17V, Max. 500 mA GEN LOCK IN BNC type, 1Vp-p, 75 ohms TEST OUT BNC type, 1Vp-p, 75 ohms RET CONT 6-pin EARPHONE Mini-jack, 8 ohms CAMERA I/F 68-pin VTR CCZ type, 26-pin CCU Triax INCOM (2ch) XLR type, 5-pin, Female RCP 8-pin Tracker 10-pin Supplied accessories Carrying belt (1) Cable holder (2) M3 x 6 screws (4) Operation manual (1) Maintenance manual (1) Optional accessories CAC-6 Return Video Selector BVF-55/55CE Viewfinder RM-B150 Remote Control Unit
Chapter 11 Specifications 173 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
11
11-3.CA-950/ 950P, Camera Adaptor

Dimensions
PAL
NTSC
227 (9)
193 (7 5/8)
133 (5 1/4)
General Power consumption 17 W Operating tempera- -20C to +45C (-4F to ture +113F) Storage temperature -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) Dimensions 133 x 227 x 193 mm (w/h/d) (5 1/4 x 9 x 7 5/8 inches) Mass (Approx.) 2.7 kg (5 lb 15 oz) Input/output connectors AUDIO IN (2ch) XLR type 3-pin, Male, 600 ohms, balanced DC IN XLR type, 4-pin, DC 10.5 to 17 V DC OUT 4-pin, DC 10.5 to 17 V, Max. 500 mA GEN LOCK IN BNC type, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms TEST OUT BNC type, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms RET CONT 6-pin EARPHONE Mini-jack, 8 ohms
CAMERA I/F CCU INCOM (2ch) RCP Tracker
68-pin 2 Optical fibre XLR type, 5-pin, Male 8-pin 20-pin
Supplied accessories Carrying belt (1) Cable holder (2) M3x6 screws (4) Operation manual (1) Installation and Maintenance manual (1) Optional accessories CAC-6 Return Video Selector BVF-55/55CE Viewfinder RM-B150 Remote Control Unit CA-905L Large Lens Adaptor BKP-9057 Viewfinder Saddle BVF-77/77CE/7700/7700P Viewfinder
11-4.CCU-550D/ 550DP, Camera Control Unit
174 Chapter 11 Specifications BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Dimensions Unit: mm (inches)
350 (13 7/8)
45
13
POWER
CAM MAIN ?
CABLE ALARM
OPEN SHORT
124 (5)
INCOM
MIC ON OFF PGM
PROD PREV PGM
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
5 (7/32)
200 (7 7/8)
11
11
General Power consumption 100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, maximum 1.8 A Peak inrush current (1) Power ON, current probe method: 20 A (240V) (2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in accordance with European standard EN551031: 2 A (230V) Cable length Maximum 1,400 m (14.5 mm) Maximum 875 m (11 mm) Operating tempera-10C to +40C (14F to ture 104 F) Dimensions (w/h/d) 200 x 124 x 350 mm (not including pro(8 x 5 x 137/8 in.) jecting parts) Mass (Approx.) Approx. 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz) (when the BKP-5972 and the BKP-5073 are installed) Input signals REFERENCE RET 1/2/31)
INCOM (on the front XLR, 5-pin (1) panel) Supplied accessories Operation Manual (1) Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1) AC power cord (1) AC power plug holder (1) 4-pin connector (1) Number plate (1 set) Optional accessories Extension board (service parts) CCU Control Panel BKP-5973 DC Power Unit BKP-5974 Rack Mount Adaptor RMM-301 Recommended equipment BVP-E10-series Color Video Camera RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel MSU-700/750 Master Setup Unit VCS-700 Video Selector CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit CCA-5-3 (3m or 9.8 feet) and CCA-5-10 (10m or 32.8 feet) CCA-5-30 (30m or 98.4 feet) connecting cables NOTE: 1) RET 3 and PROMPTER is switchable. 2) R/G/B/and Y/R-Y/B-Y is switchable.
PROMPTER1)
BNC type (loopthrough) VBS/BS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type (1 each, loopthrough) VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, BNC type (loopthrough) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 2.0
Output signals SERIAL 1/2
BNC type (1 each) 4:2:2 component serial digital (270MB/s), 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms VBS 1/2/3 BNC type (1 each) VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms Y/R-Y/B-Y video3) BNC type (1 each) Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms R-Y/B-Y: U.S.A. and Canada: 700 m Vp-p, 75 ohms Europe: 525 m Vp-p, 75 ohms R/G/B video3) BNC type (1 each) 700 m Vp-p, 75 ohms PIX BNC type (1) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms WF BNC type (1) NTSC: 714 mVp-p, 75 ohms PAL: 700 mVp-p, 75 ohms Encoded output: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms WF MODE 4-pin (1) MIC OUTPUT XLR, 3-pin 0 dBu/-20 dBu, balanced, 2 channels
Camera input/output signals CAMERA Triax (Kings type for the U.S.A. and Canada, Fischer type for Europe) COAX BNC type (1), 75 ohms RCP/CNU REMOTE 8-pin, multiconnector INTERCOM/TALLY/ D-sub, 25-pin (1) PGM 4W/RTS TALLY: 24 V DC, TTL level or contact selectable MIC REMOTE D-sub, 15-pin (1)
11-5.CCU-700A/ 700AP, Camera Control Unit

Dimensions
424 (16 3/4) 465 481
General Power requirements CCU-700A 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz CCU-700AP 110 to 120 V/220 to 240 V AC selectable, 50/60 Hz Power consumption CCU-700A 450 VA max. for entire system CCU-700AP 4 A max. for entire system Cable length 2,000 m (6,560 feet) max. (14.5 mm [19/32 inches] wide-band triax) Operating tempera- 5C to 40C (41F to 104F) ture Dimensions (w/h/d) Approx. 424 x 133 x 400 mm (16 3/4 x 5 1/4 x 15 2/4 inches) Mass (Approx.) Approx. 19 kg (41 lb 14 oz) Input connectors ANALOG INPUT REFERENCE
BNC type (1, with loopthrough output) VBS: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms RET 1, RET 2, BNC type (1 each, with loopRET 3, and RET 4 through output) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms PROMPTER BNC type (1, with loopthrough output) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
DIGITAL VIDEO SERIAL INPUT RET 1 and RET 2 (when the BKP-7312 is installed) BNC type (1 each) 4:2:2 component serial digital video signal (270 Mb/s) 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms AC IN 3-pin (1)
Output connectors ANALOG OUTPUT VBS1, VBS2, and VBS3 BNC type (1 each) VBS: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms R, G, and B BNC type (1 each) 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms Y, R-Y, and B-Y BNC type (1 each) CCU-700A Y: 1.0 Vp-p (video: 0.714, sync: 0.286), 75 ohms R-Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms (75% CB) B-Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms (75% CB) CCU-700AP Y: 1.0 Vp-p (video: 0.7, sync: 0.3), 75 ohms R-Y: 0.525 Vp-p, 75 ohms (75% CB) B-Y: 0.525 Vp-p, 75 ohms (75% CB) PIX 1 and PIX 2 BNC type (2) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms WF 1 and WF 2 BNC type (2) CCU-700A 0.714 Vp-p, 75 ohms CCU-700AP 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms ENC 1.0 Vp-p SYNC BNC type (1) 0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms, negative CHARACTER BNC type (1) Video 0.3 Vp-p, Sync CCU-700A: 0.286 Vp-p CCU-700AP: 0.3 Vp-p DIGITAL VIDEO SERIAL OUTPUT 1, BNC type (1 each) 4:2:2 component serial dig2, and 3 (when the BKP-7311 ital video signal is installed) (270 Mb/s) 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms
57.2 133 (5 1/4)
400 (15 2/4)
11
MIC OUTPUT CH1
WF MODE
XLR 3-pin, male, 1 each and CH2 0 dB/-20 dB selectable with the switch on the AT board 4-pin (1)
Input and output connectors CAMERA Triax (1) CCU-700A King type CCU-700AP Fischer type COAX BNC type (1) RCP/CNU REMOTE 8-pin multiconnector (1) AUX REMOTE 8-pin multiconnector (1) INTERCOM/TALLY/ 19-pin multiconnector (1) PGM TALLY 24 V DC, TTL level, or contact selectable MIC REMOTE D-sub 15-pin (1) INTERCOM D-sub 25-pin (1) REMOTE INTERCOM (front XLR 5-pin (1) panel)
Supplied accessories AC power cord (1) Plug holder for the AC power cord (1) 4-pin connector (1) 19-pin connector (1) Number plate (1 set) Operation Manual (1) Maintenance Manual (1) Optional accessories Triax cable BKP-7931/7931P sub-encoder board A-8314-633-A (EX-450 board) extender board BKP-7311 SDI output board BKP-7312 SDI ret vf input board CCA-5-3 (3m or 9.8 feet) and CCA-5-10 (10m or 32.8 feet) CCA-5-30 (30m or 98.4 feet) connecting cables Recommended equipment BVP-E10-series Color Video Camera RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel MSU-700/750 Master Setup Unit VCS-700 Video Selector CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit
11-6.CCU-900/ 900P, Camera Control Unit

General Power supply 100/110-120/220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 5 A (at 100 V AC, entire system active) Operating tempera- 5C to 40C (41F to 104F) ture Storage temperature -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) Humidity no condensation Dimensions (w/h/d) Approx. 424 x 133 x 460 mm (16 3/4 x 5 1/4 x 18 1/8 inches) Mass (Approx.) Approx. 20 kg (44 lb 1 oz)
Current consumption Peak in rush current (1) Power ON, cur- 80 A (240 V) 60 A (100 V) rent probe method: (2) Hot switching EN55103-1: 10 A (230 V) inrush current, measured in accordance with European standard:
Dimensions
424 (16 3/4) 465 481
Environment for installing and using the equipment Avoid rooms of high temperature or placing near a heat source. Avoid a place with strong electric or magnetic field. Set in a cool, dry place. Keep out of direct sunlight or other strong light. Input/Output connectors CAMERA Optical-fiber connector (1) 1.08Gb/s SDI L 2, 240 V AC power supply INCOM/TALLY/PGM D-sub 25-pin connector (1) INCOM-4W, 2 systems (PD/ ENG), 0 dB PGM, 2 systems, 0 dB/-20 dB TALLY (R, G), TALLY contact INCOM REMOTE D-sub 25-pin (1) RCP/CNU 8-pin multiconnector (1) TRUNK LINE 1/ D-sub 9-pin, female (1) TRUNK LINE 2 RS-232C, for CHU transmission
AUX 1/AUX 2
57.2 133 (5 1/4)
D-sub 9-pin, female (1) RS-422, for CCU system expansion
Input connectors AC IN
100 to 120, 220 to 240 V AC switchable PROMPTER IN BNC-type (1), with loopthrough output, SMPTE292M analog signal, 1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohms SERIAL RET INPUT BNC-type (4), SMPTE-259M, 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms, 270Mb/s bit rate REFERENCE IN BNC-type (1), with loopthrough output, composite SYNC/VS RET INPUT BNC-type (4), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, analog signal AUX IN BNC-type (1) SDI video signal 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms, 270Mb/s bit rate Chapter 11 Specifications 179 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
460 (18 1/8)
11
Output connectors AUDIO OUT
XLR 3-pin, male (2), 0 dBs/-20 dBs CHARACTER BNC-type (1), 525 black and white 210 mVp-p (characters) 300 mVp-p (sync) MIC REMOTE D-sub 15-pin, female (1) WF MODE D-sub 15-pin, female (1) SERIAL OUTPUT BNC-type (4), SMPTE-259M, 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms, 270Mb/s bit rate SYNC OUT BNC-type (1), composite sync, 0.286 Vp-p, 75 ohms MONITOR OUT PIX BNC-type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 1/PIX 2 ohms, R/G/B/ENC MONITOR OUT WF BNC-type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 1/WF 2 ohms, R/G/B/ENC/SEQ WF MODE 4-pin multi-connector (1) Stair step AUX OUT BNC-type (1) SDI signal, 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms, 270Mbps bit rate PROMPTER OUT BNC-type (1) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms SERIAL OUTPUT BNC-type (1) MONI SDI signal, 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms, 270Mbps bit rate DIGITAL AUDIO BNC-type (1) AES/EBU format
Number plates (1 set) Fuses (1 set) Operation manual (1) Maintenance manual (1) Voltage indication label (1) Optional accessories FC2-PD50 Optical Fiber Cable (50 meter/164 feet)* FC2-PD250 Optical Fiber Cable (250 meter/820 feet)* CCA-5-3 Connection Cable (3 meter/10 feet) CCA-5-10 Connection Cable (10 meter/33 feet) BKP-7900 Expansion Board BKP-9330 Optional Board Related equipment BVP-9500WS/9500WSP Super Motion Camera BVP-E10 Series Color Video Camera CA-950/950P Camera Adapter CA-905L Studio Build-up Unit RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit VCS-700 Video Selector CNU-700/500 Camera Command Network Unit MAV-555 Multi Access Video Disk Recorder BKMA-520SS Super Motion Input Board
* Please contact your Sony local office.
Supplied accessories AC power cord (1) Power cord plug holder (1) 4-pin connector (1)
BKP-9330 (optional) Operating tempera- 5C to 40C (41F to 104F) ture Storage temperature -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) Dimensions (w/h/d) VPR-57 board Approx. 23017309 mm (91/811/16121/4 inches) DIR-38 board Approx. 2132894 mm (81/211/833/4 inches) Mass (Approx.) : Approx. 1.4 kg (2 lb 5 oz) SERIAL OUT BNC-type, SMPTE-259M, 270Mb/s bit rate
11-7.CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit

General Power requirements For United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz For other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Current consump- Max .4.0 A tion Operating tempera- 0C to +45C (+32F to ture +113F) Dimensions 424 (W) x 132 (H) x 400 (D) mm (16 3/4 x 5 1/4 x 15 3/4 inches) Mass (Approx.) 9.5 kg (20 lb 15 oz) Input and output connectors CCU 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) RCP 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) MSU 8-pin multi-connector (1) VCS 8-pin multi-connector (1) 180 Chapter 11 Specifications BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual AUX 1 and 2 CHARACTER REFERENCE RS232C AC IN 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) BNC type (2), video: 0.7 Vpp, sync: 0.3 Vp-p BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with loop-through output D-sub 9-pin 3-pin (1)
Supplied accessories AC power cord x1 Plug holder for the AC power cord x1 Operation manual x1 Maintenance manual x1 Optional accessories A-8314-633-A (EX-450 board) extender board
11-8.CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit

General Power requirements For USA and Canada: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz For other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Current consump- Max.4.0 A tion Operating tempera- 5C to +45C (+41F to ture +113F) Dimensions 424 (W) x 45 (H) x 400 (D) mm (16 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 15 3/4 inches) Mass (Approx.) 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz) Input and output connectors CCU 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) RCP 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) MSU VCS AUX 1 and 2 CHARACTER REFERENCE RS232C AC IN 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) BNC type (2), video: 0.7 Vpp, sync: 0.3 Vp-p BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with loop-through output D-sub 9-pin 3-pin (1)
Supplied accessories AC power cord x1 Plug holder for the AC power cord x1 Operation manual x1 Maintenance manual x1
11-9.VCS-700, Video selector

General Power requirements For USA and Canada: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz For other countries: 220 to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz Current consump- For USA and Canada: Max tion 0.28A For other countries: Max.0.28 A Operating tempera- 0C to +45C (+32F to ture +113F) Dimensions 424 (W) x 44 (H) x 400 (D) mm (16 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 15 3/4 inches) Mass (Approx.) 5.2 kg (11 lb 7 oz) Input Connectors PIX 1 to PIX 6 INPUT BNC type (6), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms WF 1 to WF 6 INPUT BNC type (6), For USA and 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p Canada: (V), 75 ohms For other coun- 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V), tries: 75 ohms PIX A INPUT BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms WF A INPUT BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms CHARACTER INPUT BNC type (1, with loopthrough output), 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75ohms AC IN 3-pin (1) Output connectors PIX A and PIX B OUTPUT WF A and WF B OUTUT For other countries: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/ 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms SYNC OUTPUT BNC type (1), 0.3 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms, negative polarity WF MODE Round 4-pin connector (1) Remote connectors REMOTE 8-pin multi-connector (1) I/O PORT D-sub 37-pin (1) Supplied accessories AC power cord x1 Plug holder for the AC power cord x1 4-pin connector x1 Operation manual x1 Maintenance manual x1
BNC type (1 each), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms For USA and Canada: 1.0 Vpp (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms
11

Dimensions
67 (2 3/4) 221.5 (8 3/4)
MASTER BLACK IRIS EXT IRIS/MB ACTIVE AUTO CALL
481 (19) 465 400
AUTO SETUP
MODE
ALL
CAM PW
VF PW
TEST1
TEST2
BARS
CLOSE
STANDARD
BLACK
KNEE OFF
KNEE KNEE APARTURE SAT
MULTI
5600K
AUTO KNEE
CHARACTER
CARD
3
SCENE FILES
5
STORE
CONFIGURATION
146.1
MAINTENANCE
ECS
FILE
ON
ACCESS ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA MASTER GAIN
ENC
FILTER CTRL
3
ND
PAINT
PICTURE MONITOR
SEQ
ENC
C
CC
WAVEFORM MONITOR PARA
MULTI TALLY
PANEL ACTIVE
1
EXPAND
10
11
12
General Power requirements Current consumption Peak inrush current (1) Power ON, current probe method: (2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in accordance with European standard EN55103-1: Operating temperature Maximum cable length Dimensions (w/h/d)
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 0.45 A
20A(100V), 55A (240V)
12A (230V) 0C to 45C (32F to 113F) 200 m (656 feet) (with CCA-5 cable) 481x 221.5 x 67 (19 x 8 3/4 x 2 3/4 inches) (including projecting parts) Approx. 4.5 kg (9 lb 15 oz)
Mass (Approx.) Inputs/outputs REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX I/O PORT AC IN
8-pin multi connector (1) 8-pin multi connector (1) 50-pin (1) 3-pin (1)
Supplied accessories Operation Manual (1) Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1) Button labels for HD system (1 set) Optional accessories AC power cord
POWER
-AC IN REMOTE AUX CCU/CNU
I/O PORT

Dimensions
O
204 (8 1/8) 102
AUTO SETUP
AUTO LEVEL START/ WHITE BLACK HUE BREAK
ALL
CAM PW VF PW
TEST
BARS
CLOSE STANDARD
CHARACTER
ECS/SHUTTER ACCESS
GAMMA
MASTER GAIN
ND CC FILTER
1 R
2 G
MODE
3 B
4
SCENE FILES SEQ MONITOR
5
STORE ENC WF PIX
IC MEMORY CARD
MULTI CARD
354 (14)
332
310
CONFIG MAINTENANCE FILE
PAINT FUNCTION
CALL PANEL PARA EXPAND ACTIVE

MULTI TALLY
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
07
08
09
10
11
12
EXT
AUTO
MULTI TALLY
01
02
03
04
05
06
MASTER BLACK IRIS MASTER SETUP UNIT
General Power requirements Current consumption Peak inrush current (1) Power ON, current probe method: (2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in accordance with European standard EN55103-1: Operating temperature Maximum cable length Dimensions (w/h/d)
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 0.4 A
Inputs/outputs REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX AC IN
8-pin multi connector (1) 8-pin multi connector (1) 3-pin (1)
30A(100V), 60A (240V)
Supplied accessories Operation Manual (1) Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1) Optional accessories AC power cord
14A (230V) 0C to 45C (32F to 113F) 200 m (656 feet) (with CCA-5 cable) 204 x 354 x 83 mm (8 1/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches) (including projecting parts and controls) Approx. 3.5 kg (7 lb 11 oz) Chapter 11 Specifications 183 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Mass (Approx.)
83 (3 3/8)
AUX
REMOTE
CCU/CNU
POWER I
-AC IN
11

Dimensions
5
RCP-700
PANEL ACTIVE WHITE BLACK
CALL
Connectors REMOTE CCU/CNU: PREVIEW: I/O port: Power requirements Mass (Approx.) RCP-700: RCP-701: Dimensions RCP-700:
8-Pin 8-Pin 29-pin 30 VDC (supplied from CCU or CNU) 1.0 kg (2 lb 3 oz) 0.9 kg (2 lb) 68 (W) x 199 (H) x 127 (D) mm (2 3/4 x 7 7/8 x 5 inches) 68 (W) x 199 (H) x 83 (D) mm (2 3/4 x 7 7/8 x 3 3/8 inches)
WHITE
BLACK
MASTER
SLAVE
EXT
2-
199 (7 7/8)
177
SENS
CLOSE OPEN
COARSE ALARM
188
AUTO
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
183.4
RCP-701:
IRIS
68 (2 3/4)
60 127 (5)
67
PANEL ACTIVE WHITE BLACK
WHITE
BLACK
2CALL
RCP-701
MASTER
SLAVE
EXT
SENS
MASTER BLACK
CLOSE OPEN
COARSE ALARM
IRIS
PREVIEW
68 (2 3/4)
16
67 83 (3 3/8)
183.4
AUTO
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
199 (7 7/8)
177
188

Dimensions
102 (4 1/8) 74 66.5
RCP-750
BARS
CLOSE
AUTO SETUP
5600K
AUTO KNEE
SKIN DETAIL
DTL GATE
354 (14)
332
310
WHITE
DETAIL
BLACK/FLARE a
EXT
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
MASTER BLACK
AUTO
SENS
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
CLOSE
OPEN
COARSE
ALARM
CALL
PANEL ACTIVE IRIS

125 (5)
RCP-751
102 (4 1/8)
74 66.5
BARS
CLOSE
AUTO SETUP
5600K
AUTO KNEE
SKIN DETAIL
DTL GATE
354 (14)
332
310
WHITE
DETAIL
BLACK/FLARE a
EXT
MASTER BLACK
RELATIVE
SENS
CLOSE
OPEN
COARSE
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
AUTO
ALARM
CALL
PANEL ACTIVE
IRIS
17
84 (3 3/8)
11
General Power requirements 10.5 to 35 V DC (supplied from CCU or CNU) Power consumption 4 W max. Maximum cable 200 m (656 feet) with CCU/ length HDCU connected (with CCA-5 cable) Operating tempera- 5C to 40C (41F to 104F) ture Dimensions (w/h/d) RCP-750: 102 x 354 x125 mm (4 1/8 x 14 x 5 inches) RCP-751: 102 x 354 x 84 mm (4 1/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches) Mass (Approx.) RCP-750: 1.5 kg (3 lb 5 oz) RCP-751: 1.3 kg (2 lb 14 oz)
Inputs/outputs REMOTE CCU/CNU: AUX: EXT I/O Supplied accessory Operation Manual (1)
8-pin multi connector (1) 8-pin multi connector (1) 9-pin D-sub connector (1)
Optional accessories Remote cable CCA-5-3 (3 m) Remote cable CCA-5-10 (10 m) Remote cable CCA-5-30 (30 m) Maintenance Manual Memory Stick
11-14.RM-B150 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit

General Power Requirements DC 10.5 - 30 V (max) (supplied from camera/camcorder/CCU) Operating Tempera- -20C to +45C ture Storage Tempera- -20C to +55C ture Dimensions (W x H x 86 mm x 65 mm x 179 mm D) (3 1/2 x 2 5/8 x 7 1/8 inches) Mass (Approx.) Inputs Control interface Approx. 0.7 kg (1 lb 9 oz)
Monitor in
8-pin (x 1), Sony Camera Command Network Protocol BNC type (x 1) VBS (No HD signal capable)
11-15.RM-B750 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit

General Power Requirements DC 10.5 - 30 V (max) (supplied from camera/camcorder/CCU) Operating Tempera- +5C to +40C ture Storage Tempera- -20C to +55C ture Dimensions (W x H x 197 mm x 62 mm x 124 mm D) (7 7/8 x 2 1/2 x 5 inches) Mass (Approx.) Approx. 0.7 kg (1 lb 9 oz) Inputs Control interface
Monitor in
8-pin (x 1), Sony Camera Command Network Protocol BNC type (x 1) VBS (No HD signal capable)
11-16.BVF-10/10CE/20W/20WCE Viewfinder
General Power requirements 9.3 V DC Power consumption BVF-10/10CE: 1.6 W BVF-20W/20WCE: 2.3 W Operating tempera- -20C to +45C (-0F to ture +113F) Storage temperature -20C to +60C (-0F to +140F) Dimensions (w/h/d) BVF-10/10CE: 229 x 76 x 215 mm (9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches) BVF-20W/20WCE: 239 x 76 x 215 mm (9 1/2 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches) Mass (Approx.) BVF-10/10CE: 530 g (1 lb 3 oz) BVF-20W/20WCE: 580 g (1 lb 4 oz) Performance CRT Accessories supplied Microphone (1) Optional accessories BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-12) Lens assembly (farsighted) (-2.8 D to +2.0 D) (Part No. A-8262-537-A) Lens assembly (low magnification) -3.6 D to -0.8 D) (Part No. A-8262-538-A) Lens assembly (standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations) (-3.6 D to +0.4 D) (Part No. A-8267-737-A) Lens assembly (high-performance triple magnification) (-2.42 D to +0.5 D) (Part No. A-8314-798-A) Lens assembly (compensation for distortion) (-3.5 D to +0.4 D) (Part No. A-8328-756-A) Cushioned eyecup Pad (Part No. X-3678-187-1) Attachment (Part No. 3-682-494-02)
BVF-10/10CE: 1.5-type monochrome BVF-20W/20WCE: 2-type monochrome Horizontal resolution 600 TV lines (at center) Indicator: REC/TALLY, BATT, VTR SAVE, !
11-17.BVF-55/ 55CE, 5-inch B/W Viewfinder

General Power requirements 10.5V to 17V DC, nominal 12 VDC Power consumption 10 W Operating tempera- -10C to +50C (14F to ture 122F) Operating humidity 0% to 90%, non-condensing Operating altitude Max. 3000 m (10,000 feet) Mass (Approx.) Body: Approx. 1.9 kg (4 lb 2 oz) Body with stand: Approx. 2.5 kg (5 lb 5 oz) Dimensions See below (Unit: mm/inches)
191 (7 5/8)
188 (7 1/2)
6 (4 1/4)
156 (6 1/4) 291 (11 1/2)
11
Performance CRT Effective viewing area Video signal Scanning
Input 5-inch monochrome 4:3 mode: 97. 73 mm (w/h) 16:9 mode: 97. 54.56 mm (w/ h) BVF-55: EIA standard BVF-55CE: CCIR standard 2:1 interlace. 525 lines (BVF55). 625 lines (BVF-55CE). 5% underscanning. Horizontal linearity error: less than 3% Vertical linearity error: less than 3% (4:3 mode) More than 650 TV lines at center More than 550 TV lines at corners
12-pin connector Video input: 1 Vp-p. sync negative, 10 K ohms Geometric distortion Less than 3% Frequency response -3 dB or less (at 8 MHz) Supplied accessories V-wedge shoe attachment (1) Screws (4) Hexagonal wrench (1) Connecting cable (1) Studio monitor hood (1)
Resolution
11-18.BVF-77/ 77CE, 7-inch B/W Viewfinder

External dimensions Unit: mm(inches) 265 (10 1/2) 362 (14 3/8)
178 (7 1/8)
300 (11 7/8)
General Power requirements 10.5 V to 17.0 VDC (supplied from camera/CA-905 Power consumption 23 W Mass (Approx.) 5.0 kg (11 lb, excluding hood) Dimensions 265 (W) x 178 (H) x 362 (D) mm (10 1/2 x 7 1/8 x 14 3/8 inches) Performance CRT
DC restoration
7-inch monochrome 160(W) x 131(H) mm (6 3/8 x 5 1/4 inches) 90-degree deflection Picture size 120 (W) x 90 (H) mm (4 3/4 x 3 5/8 inches) Brightness 500 NIT Resolution 800 lines at center, 600 lines at corner Geometric distortion Less than 1.0 % EHT regulation Less than +/-2 % EHT voltage 13.5 kV (standard) Video input 1.0 Vp-p, -6/+4 dB,sync negative, 75 ohms, terminated
Back porch type Back porch level: Peaking value 2 % 10 to 90 % APL Frequency response 0.1 MHz to 8 MHz (+/-3 dB) Aperture correction 0 dB to 15 dB (4MHz) Synchronization Line pull range Horizontal: more than +/-500 Hz Vertical: more than -10 Hz line hold range: more than +/500 Hz Retrace time Horizontal: less than 15 % Vertical: less than 5 % Blanking time Horizontal: less than 16 % Vertical: less than 6 % Supplied accessories Indoor hood x1 Number plate x1 Operation and maintenance manual x1 Screws x2 Fuse x1 Optional accessories VFH-770 sports hood
11-19.CA-905F/905K, Large Lens Adaptor

General Mass (Approx.) Dimension (w/h/d) 12 kg (24 lb 4 oz) 368 x 327 x 534 mm (14 5/8 x 13 x 21 1/8 inches) Operating tempera- -20C to + 45C (-4F to ture +113F) Storage temperature -20C to + 55C (-4F to +131F) Power Consumption 90 W (Large lens and 7-type color viewfinder with the BKP9057)
Input/Output connectors CCU connector CA-905K: Kings triaxial connector CA-905F: Fischer triaxial connector Lens connector 36-pin (front) LENS connector 12-pin (top) CA connector CA-905K: Kings triaxial connector CA-905F: Fischer triaxial connector REMOTE connector 8-pin Supplied accessories Number plate (2) (side panel) Number plate (1) (rear panel) Cable clamp (2) Operation manual including BKP-9057 (1) Maintenance manual part 1 (1) Angle-adjusting plates (2) Accessories available separately Triax cable For CA-905K CCT-K5T/ K10T/ K20T/K50T/ K100T/ K150T/ K200T For CA-905F CCT-5/10/20/50/100/150/200 BKP-9057 Viewfinder saddle BVF-77/77CE 7-type monochrome viewfinder (only in conjunction with BKP-9057) BVF-55/55CE 5-type monochrome viewfinder
Appendix
Function comparison chart Paint

MSU-700A Menu Sub Menu Control Item Menu Black R,G,B,Master ABB R,G,B AWB R,G,B Flare Off Gamma Blk Gamma Knee Point Knee Slope Gamma Off Black Gamma (on/off) Knee Off Auto Knee (on/off) R,G,B, Master V Mod Saw Off Level Limiter Crispening Level Dep Level Dep Off Detail Off SD DTL Off H/V Ratio Frequency Mix Ratio Detail Comb Detail Off SD DTL Off W. Limiter B.Limiter Knee Aperture Knee Aperture(on/off) Detail (on/off)

MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu
RM-B750
Direct Direct Menu Button Button


White Flare Gamma/Knee
*2
R/B/ Master R/B
*1 *1
V mod Saw Detail Detail 1
Detail 2
Detail 3
Skin Detail
Gamma
Black Gamma
1/2/3 Level (common) Phase Width Saturation Auto Hue# DTL Gate Gate# (on/off) Skin Dtl#(cach channel) (on/off) SkinDetail (all channels) (on/off) R,G,B, Master Gamma 0.40, 0.45, 0.50 Gamma Off RGB R,G,B, Master Low/L Mid/H Mid/High Range Black Gamma (on/off) Y Y Low/L Mid/H Mid/High Range
(1)
(1)
*1 *1
192 Appendix BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
MSU-700A Menu Sub Menu Control Item Menu Black Gam(Y) (on/off) Standard User Standard (on/off) User (on/off) Gamma Off R,G,B, Master Auto Knee (on/off) Knee Off R,G,B Master Auto Knee (on/off) Knee Off Knee Point Knee Slope Level Auto Knee (on/off) Knee Off Knee Sat (on/off) R,G,B, Master White Clip Off R-G, G-B, B-R Multi Matrix (on/off) User Matrix (on/off) Preset Matrix (on/off) Matrix Off R-B, G-R, B-G Multi Matrix (on/off) User Matrix (on/off) Preset Matrix (on/off) Matrix Off Phase, Hue, Saturation All Clear Multi Matrix (on/off) User Matrix (on/off) Preset Matrix (on/off) Matrix Off Level Low/L Mid/H Mid/High Range Low Key Sat (on/off) Saturaion Hue Mono (on/off) Pattern Auto Iris (on/off) Shutter ECS S-EVS Shutter (on/off) ECS (on/off) S-EVS (on/off)

MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu

RM-B750


*1 *1 *1 *1
Gamma Table
Knee Point
Knee Slope
Knee Saturation
White Clip Matrix 1
Multi
Low Key Sat
Mono Color
Auto Iris ECS/S-EVS
Note MSU: V1.20 RCP: V1.01 RM-B750: V1.00 *1 Available w/VTR function SW (selectable when in the ENG Mode in the menu) *2 Available w/Black knob (selected from the menu) Appendix 193 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
Function comparison chart File

MSU-700A Menu Reference Sub Menu Ref. Store Ref. Transfer Control Item Menu
MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu
(MS) (MS)
RM-B750


(MS) (MS)
Scene File
Adjusting Scene Transfer
Lens File
Adjusting Lens Store Auto White Lens Select Adjusting OHB Store Auto W.Shading Auto B. Shading Auto White Auto Black Adjusting
CAM t CARD CARD t CAM CARD t CAMs CAM t CAMs (Paint Menu Items) CAM t CARD CARD t CAM CARD t CAMs CAM t CAMs Delete (Paint Menu Items)
(MS) (MS)
(MS) (MS)
Select File Change Name (Lens Adjusting Items)
OHB File
Black Shading White Shading Black Set OHB Matrix
Function comparison chart Maintenance

MSU-700A Menu Secondary Menu Black Shading Sub Menu Control Item Menu R, G, B H saw, H Para, V Saw, V Para Auto B. Shading Blk Shd Off H saw, H Para, V Saw, V Para Auto W. Shading R, G, B AWB R, G, B Gain Bounce (on/ off) R, G, B, Master ABB R-G, G-B, B-R Matrix Off, OHB Matrix Off R-B, G-R, B-G Matrix Off, OHB Matrix Off Phase, Hue, Saturation Matrix Off, OHB Matrix Off, All Clear H Step (usec) H Coarse SC Y, Sync, I Black, Q Black Chroma, SC Quad, Q Level Y, R-Y, B-Y Y, R-Y, B-Y Skin Gate Mod Level 4:3 Marker (on/off) 4:3 Mod (on/off) Cam SW Setting Auto Setup Camera Fan Mode Auto White Auto Black Auto Level Auto Hue Skin Detail 1, 2, 3 Auto W. Shading Auto B. Shading Lens Adjusting Flare R, G, B V Mod Saw R,G,B, Master D Shad Comp (on/ off) V Mod Saw Off Auto Iris Pattern

MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu

RM-B750


Adjusting 1/2
White Shading
R, G, B
(1)
(1)
White Black Set Black Set
Black OHB Matrix 1
Multi
Phase
H SC
VBS Level
VBS Level 1 VBS Level 2 Y/C Level Y/C Black
Monitor Output
Appendix 195 BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual
MSU-700A Menu Secondary Menu Sub Menu Control Item Menu Level APL Ratio Iris Gain (HD)M Gamma (HD)Blk Gamma SD M Gamma A,B,C,D,E A,B,C,D,E (SD) Level (SD) Limiter (SD) Crispening (SD) Level Depend (HD) Detail Off (SD) Detail off (SD) H/V Ratio (SD) Frequency (HD) Detail Off (SD) Detail off (SD) W.Limiter (SD) B. Limiter (HD) Detail Off (SD) Detail off Crs Col Reduce (on/off) Coring Level Comb Aspect Select 16:9 Squeeze Letter Box 4:3 Crop Letter size Crop Posi

MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu

RM-B750


SD Adjusting
Gamma
H Interp V Interp Detail
Detail 1
Detail 2
Detail 3
Crs Col Reduce
Aspect
Function comparison chart Configuration

MSU-700A Menu Secondary Menu CAM Mode Set 1/2 Sub Menu Control Item Menu White Setup Mode OHB Matrix Correct Mode (on/off) V Detail Creation Mode V Detail Control Mode Preset Matrix 16:9->4:3 Crop On BARS Character (on/off) Return Letter Box Mode Gen Lock Mode Bars Characters Return 1,2,3,4 System Output 1,2,3 CNU RCP Assign MSU Assign Buzzer Call, Touch, Switch, Master Call Buzzer, Touch Click, Switch Click, All Off Switch, Tally, Other LED, Master Year, Month, Day Hour, Minute, Second

MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu
RM-B750

Camera
2/2
CCU
CCU Mode Set 1/2 2/2 BARS Char Set Return Setting Multi Format
MSU or RCP or Adjusting RM
LED Bright Date/Time Date Time Engineer Mode (on/off) Status
Security
Ref. Enable (on/off) Lens Enable (on/off) OHB Enable (on/off) Crop Enable (on/off) Full Lock (on/off) View Mode (on/off) Paint Only (on/off)
Code Change Information MSU EL Bright Adjusting LED Disp Bright MSU SW Set 1/2
MSU
Level Level PIX/WF Syncro(on/off) PIX/WF All Mode (on/off) PIX/WF Control Mode Screen Saver TestSW Mode (Saw, 3step, 10step) Extended Call Mode Shutter Angle Mode (on/ off)
2/2
MSU-700A Menu Secondary Menu Rotary Encoder Setting Sub Menu Control Item Menu BLACK/ FLARE
MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu

RM-B750
RCP
Black Flare Detail SD Detail Bright Contrast
DETAIL LCD Brightness/ Contrast
LCD
Memory Stick RM
Memory Stick Cable Comp SW Setting 1/2
Format 10M, 30M, 50M Panel Active Mode Test VTR S/S Function SW VF Menu Full/Part/Lock Full/Lock Saw/3 Step/10Step VTR/CALL VTR Ctrl/CAM Ctrl Control Enable Absolute, Relative 1/1, Relative 1/2, Relative 1/4 Absolute, Relative 1/1, Relative 1/2, Relative 1/4 Absolute, Relative 1/1, Relative 1/2, Relative 1/4 Absolute, >Min, >Max, Relative 1/1, Relative 1/2, Relative 1/4 R,G,B, RGB, SEQ, ENC
2/2
VR Setting White BLACK Master Black Iris WF/PIX
Note Italic: Accessible only when in the ENG Mode
Function comparison chart Function

MSU-700A Menu Operation Control Item Menu Ctrl ND (1/2/3/4/5) CC (A/B/C/D/E) Shutter (on/off) ECS (on/off) Shutter ECS Gamma Master Gain 5600K (on/off) Auto Knee (on/off) Skin Detail (on/off) Detail Gate (on/off) Black Gamma (on/off) Knee Aperture (on/off) Knee Sat (on/off) Mono (on/off) S-Skin Knee (on/off) Low Key Sat (on/off) Knee off Gamma Off Detail Off Matrix Off White Clip Off Level Dep Off Chroma Off SD Detail Off SD Matrix Off White Preset Memory A Memory B

MSU-750
RCP-750/751 Menu

RM-B750


*1 *1 *1 *1 *1
SW 1/2
2/2
White Select
Note *1 Available w/VTR function SW (selectable when in the ENG Mode in the menu)
Function comparison chart Multi, Card

MSU-700A Menu Multi-Control Menu Master/Slave Control Item Menu MSU-750 RCP-750/751 Menu RM-B750 Direct Direct Menu Button Button

Character
Master Slave All Slave All Off Character on Default System Auto Diag/One Cam Data/One Cam
IC Memory Card Menu Card Initialize
Function comparison chart Button and Knob

Button All CAM PW VF PW Signal output select MSU-700A
*4 *4 *4 *4 TEST1/TEST2/ BARS *4 *4
MSU-750
*4 *4 *4 *4 TEST/BARS *4 *4
RCP-750/751
*4 *4 TEST/BARS *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4
RM-B750
*4 TEST/BARS *4 *4
CLOSE STANDARD AUTO SETUP
Camera/CCU function ON/OFF
SKIN DTL AUTO HUE LEVEL START/BREAK WHITE BLACK KNEE off DETAIL off LVL DEP off GAMMA off CHROMA off MATRIX off KNEE APERTURE KNEE SAT MONO COLOR COLOR CORRECT 5600K AUTO KNEE SKIN DETAIL DETAIL GATE SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK GAMMA CHARACTER SD MATRIX off SD DETAIL off LOW KEY SAT SCENE FILES STORE
*4 *4
*1
*1 *1 *1
*4
*1
Scene File Control PICTURE MONITOR WAVEFORM MONITOR Camera Select
*4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4
Filter control
PANEL ACTIVE PARA EXPAND MASTER SLAVE FILTER CTRL ND CC
*4 *4 *4
*4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *1&*4
ECS/Shutter select Gamma select Master gain select IRIS/MB ACTIVE MASTER BLACK control knob MASTER BLACK RELATIVE Iris Control knob CALL
Button Auto Iris IRIS RELATIVE SENS control COARSE control WHITE knobs BLACK knob FLARE knob PANEL ACTIVE DETAIL knob VTR START/STOP STOP REW PLAY FF REC REVIEW MONITOR FUNCTION (Menu Mode) MAINTENANCE (Menu Mode) SCENE (Menu Mode) PAINT (Menu Mode) VF DISP VF MENU CANCEL ENTER
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
*4 *4 *4 (R,G,B,Master) *2
RM-B750
(R,B) (R,B,Master) *4 *4
Full<->Lock Full<->Part<->Lock
*4
*4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *3&*4 *3&*4 *3&*4 *3&*4
Note *1 Available w/VTR function SW (selectable when in the ENG Mode in the menu) *2 Available w/Black knob (selected from the menu) *3 Available w/Menu Mode buttons by pressing the MONITOR button *4 Accessible only with switches or knobs on the control panel

Bvpe10 Pim

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Bvpe10 Pim

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Studio/OB/EFP Camera Family

Table of Contents BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings

BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

1-2. Features and Benefits

Photo 1-2-2: Cross Colour Suppression On

1-3. Creative Control

Output signal level

Photo 1-3-4: Enhanced Vertical Detail (Non-Additive Mix) On

Chapter 1 Introduction BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

Photo 1-3-5: Adaptive Detail Control On

Chapter 1 Introduction BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

1-4. Operational Versatility

Photo 1-4-2: CCU-550A with BKP-5973

Chapter 1 Introduction BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

2-1. System Configuration

BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP +CA-950/950P

BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP +CA-570/570P

CCU-550D/550DP BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP +CA-570/570P with BKP-5973

BVP-E10 Series Configured with Studio Lens

BVF-55 or BVF-77 with BKP-9057

Fibre Optic Cable Triax Cable Command Coaxial Cable

* Ether the CA-570 or CA-950 cam be used in this configuration

** CA-905L - Fibre CA-905K/F - Triax

Figure 2-1-2: Stand-alone system

DVW-250/250P BVP-E10/E10P BVP-E10WS/E10WSP CA-553* BVV-5/5P CA-570/570P

BVW-50/50P RM-B150/750 RCP-700/701/750/751

SDI CCZ AC-550/550CE DNV-5 Command

Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

Figure 2-1-3: Optional accessories for BVP-E10

2-inch VF(BVF-20W/20WCE) 1.5-inch VF(BVF-10/10CE)

ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER BVF-55/55CE DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER DVW-250/250P

REMOTE CABLE (max. 100 m)

PANEL STANDARD ACTIVE MEMORY STICK

FUNCTION VF DISP MAINTENANCE VF MENU SCENE CANCEL PAINT ENTER

CCA-5 CABLE (max. 50m)

AUTO IRIS/MB IRIS ACTIVE MASTER BLACK EXT

ALARM MENU SELECT

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-B750

RM-B750 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT( ) RM-B150

VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor

RETURN VIDEO SELECTOR CAC-6

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BVV-5/5PS Tripod BETACAM ADAPTOR CA-553

CAMERA ADAPTOR CA-3A

RECORDER UNIT DNV-5

Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual

2-2. Camera Head

Main Features of Camera Heads

2-4. Camera Control Unit

2-4-1 The CCU-700A/700AP has the following features:

2-4-2 The CCU-550D/550DP has the following features:

2-4-3 The CCU-900/900P has the following features.

2-5. Control System

2-5-1 Master Set-up Unit (MSU-700A and MSU-750)

2-5-2 Camera Command Network Units (CNU-700 and CNU-500)

2-5-3 Video Selector (VCS-700)

2-5-4 Remote Control Panels (RCP-700 Series)

2-6. System Setup Examples

BVP-E10/E10P/E 10WS/E 10WSP

When a large lens is used

Chapter 2 A Total System BVP-E10 Series Product Information Manual